Editions
Kt
The Universal Order
of Creation of
MATTERS
by Nuclear Engineer M.T. KESHE
1
…
ISBN 978-94-6087-002-6.…
本电子书不是官方正版，
而是使用从官方购买的正版电子书，
截屏＋拼接＋OCR文字识别＋重新拼版制作。
因此难免出现错误的字或符号，
如果您希望获得原始的官方版本，
请购买正版，支持KESHE。
QQ群：30137653
2
The Universal Order
Of Creation Of
Matters
ITNOTGOG
3
… a Reflection
Mans intelligence has reached levels that through the
use of modern technologies that anyone can peer the
knowledge he reads to verify
its logic and validity.
I firmly believe that this work has to be understood by
all Men and not judged by a few whose self-interest
might, and has been, obstructing the release of such a
knowledge as disclosed in this book.
This book is written in such a way that anyone from
any background field of science, and interest in the
workings of all Matters of the universe, can understand
the full new knowledge and be their own peers in
receiving such a disclosure, which is at the edge of
science and technology.
In this book a synthesis is given of the understanding of
new first principles in physics that are gathered for over
more than thirty years of independent research and
development, where several working prototypes and
numerous tests with different loadings have confirmed
their correctness and operativeness.
Mehran Tavakoli Keshe
2009
4
Copyright notice: © Mehran Tavakoli Keshe 2009. All rights
reserved.
Nothing of this e-book may be replicated, simplified,
translated and/or made public by means of print, microfilm,
tape, audio-recording systems, electronics, optical and solidstate
media, electronic storage systems, by network
publishing or by any other ways without prior written
authorization of the publisher or the author.
ISBN 978-94-6087-002-6
Illustrations and Layout: Dirk Laureyssens
Publisher: Stichting The Keshe Foundation
Registered Office: Jubileumplein 3, NL-6161 SR Geleen,
The Netherlands
Registration Number: KVK 14089728.
Web site: www.keshefoundation.com
E-mail contact: info@keshefoundation.com
5
Forewords
In Mans technological and scientific evolution over thousands of years, conversion of
the Earthly state of matters and energies from one state to another has been the key to
his progressive success.
For man to progress further in the path of this evolution, man has to learn, understand,
and unravel the powers of the initial fundamental particles of the Matters.
In the following pages, simple new theoretical principles and results of tests done to
unleash the powers of the initial fundamental particles forces will be released and
discussed.
In my writings, the simplest form of language is used so that every man, from all
corners of the world, can read and will be able to comprehend the fundamental orders of
their physical creation.
Therefore, every man on Earth will have the same groundwork knowledge and
opportunity to build his own environment and so be in control of his future and destiny.
This simple transfer of knowledge gives every man, by understanding the principles of
his world of creation, the possibility to utilise and enhance the fundamental powers of
creation for his advancement in his path of evolution.
Through appropriate use of this new knowledge, one can generate as much clean power
as one needs for survival at any location in the universe.
This is energy production capability, without the production of any further new wastes
to damage the environment and to endanger the future generations’ chances’ of
survival.
This new knowledge allows man to produce food and medicine through the natural
process of the construction of his cells’ initial fundamental plasmas.
Therefore, no child, woman or man should go hungry and rely-upon others for his
survival.
This new knowledge gives man the opportunity to produce all his materials’ needs,
without him being tied-up to the Earthly resources, or environmental conditions, or the
place or a position in the universe, wherever that might be.
This new knowledge brings about the capability for man to be able to move and travel
in his environment and in the universe with universal magnetic fields protection, in any
atmospheric or space conditions.
6
This new knowledge, gives man the freedom of motion irrespective of the medium
whatever his medium, and wherever he might be in the universe. For man to be able to
use systems for travel that is at all time in protected magnetic fields levels and
gravitational field levels as on the Earth. As his physical body has become accustom to
the atmospheric condition around his home planet.
Which up to now, this has been a dream and unattainable in all dimensions, with his
present level of scientific development and knowledge.
Men will build on this new knowledge, and they will add their own scientific and
technological flavours and unique additions and discoveries to overcome their present
natural problems and limitations.
Our hope is that, Men, irrespective of their race, colour of skin, creed or religion, will
use this new knowledge collectively and in unity, for advancement of the human race.
We pray that, Man uses’ these new knowledge and information’s for creation of peace
and justice among their fellow men and other of Gods’ creations and creatures, whom
they will come to be in touch with, irrespective of their appearance, technological
progress and intelligence.
Mehran Tavakoli Keshe
7
Table of Contents
… A REFLECTION ……………………………………………………………………… 3
FOREWORDS …………………………………………………………………………….. 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS………………………………………………………………. 7
INTRODUCTION……………………………………………………………………….. 11
Rays and plasmatic magnetic fields ……………………………………………. 11
Magnetic and gravitational fields (Magravs)……………………………….. 13
Plasmas …………………………………………………………………………………. 14
Matter and matter ……………………………………………………………………. 14
Initial Gravitational Fields ……………………………………………………….. 14
Reactor technology ………………………………………………………………….. 14
Fission and Fusion by Plasma Dilution ………………………………………. 15
Lift and Motion by Magravs positioning ……………………………………… 17
CHAPTER 1 ………………………………………………………………………………. 20
HISTORICALLY UNEXPLAINED PRINCIPLES ……………………………………….. 20
- The creation of Magnetic Fields of the Earth……………………………. 21
- Creation of the Gravitational Fields of the Earth………………………. 23
- The source of the Heat in the Earth Cores ……………………………….. 27
- What causes the Rotation of the planet Earth?………………………….. 28
- The difference between Matter and matter ……………………………….. 30
- How motion of matters and Matters are created? ……………………… 31
- How Light is created?…………………………………………………………… 32
CHAPTER 2 ………………………………………………………………………………. 34
INTERACTION OF PLASMATIC MAGNETIC FIELDS (PMTICS)………………….. 34
CHAPTER 3 ………………………………………………………………………………. 37
THE INITIAL FUNDAMENTAL PARTICLES OF THE PLASMA……………………. 37
Creation of Matter of plasma through interaction of pmtics. ………….. 38
Creation of the Antimatter of plasma ………………………………………….. 41
Creation of the Dark Matter of plasma ……………………………………….. 43
Creation of the torus field force …………………………………………………. 45
Initial structure of Matters of plasma………………………………………….. 47
Transition-zone pmtics……………………………………………………………… 48
Initial Fundamental Plasma………………………………………………………. 49
Decay of initial fundamental plasma…………………………………………… 50
8
CHAPTER 4 ………………………………………………………………………………. 53
MATTERS’ OF PLASMA AND THEIR TRANSITION OF STATES ………………….. 53
CHAPTER 5 ………………………………………………………………………………. 60
DEFINITION OF ENERGY THROUGH PMTICS………………………………………. 60
Measure of a mass …………………………………………………………………… 62
CHAPTER 6 ………………………………………………………………………………. 67
THE TOTAL ENERGY BALANCE EQUATION OF PLASMA………………………… 67
CHAPTER 7 ………………………………………………………………………………. 73
THE CREATION AND SPEED OF LIGHT ………………………………………………. 73
CHAPTER 8 ………………………………………………………………………………. 83
DARK LIGHT PHENOMENA ……………………………………………………………. 83
CHAPTER 9 ………………………………………………………………………………. 84
RELATION BETWEEN GRAVITY AND LIGHT ………………………………………. 84
CHAPTER 10 …………………………………………………………………………….. 90
THE ANTIMATTER ………………………………………………………………………. 90
CHAPTER 11 …………………………………………………………………………….. 92
THE ANTIMATTER ENERGY …………………………………………………………… 92
CHAPTER 12 …………………………………………………………………………….. 93
THE DARK ENERGY…………………………………………………………………….. 93
Steps in the creation of Dark Energy ………………………………………….. 94
CHAPTER 13 …………………………………………………………………………….. 98
THE DARK MATTER…………………………………………………………………….. 98
Dark spots on the Sun and Black Holes …………………………………….. 100
CHAPTER 14 …………………………………………………………………………… 104
VIRTUAL PARTICLES (VIRTUAL MATTERS) ……………………………………. 104
The Casimir effect………………………………………………………………….. 105
Van der Waals forces……………………………………………………………… 106
CHAPTER 15 …………………………………………………………………………… 107
INTERACTION BETWEEN MATTERS ……………………………………………….. 107
Interaction of Matter with Antimatter ……………………………………….. 107
Interaction of Matter with Dark Matter …………………………………….. 108
The interaction of Antimatter and Dark Matter…………………………… 109
1) Scenario 1………………………………………………………………………. 109
9
2) Scenario 2………………………………………………………………………. 111
Interaction of plasma with plasma ……………………………………………. 115
Electron interaction:…………………………………………………………….. 115
CHAPTER 16 …………………………………………………………………………… 122
THE FUNDAMENTAL DIFFERENCE BETWEEN INERTIA AND GRAVITY ……. 122
CHAPTER 17 …………………………………………………………………………… 129
PLASMA’S AND NUCLEAR DECAY…………………………………………………. 129
CHAPTER 18 …………………………………………………………………………… 132
NEUTRON-PROTON, ELECTRON-ATOM………………………………………….. 132
The decay of the neutron…………………………………………………………. 133
CHAPTER 19 …………………………………………………………………………… 140
MOTION OF THE ELECTRON AROUND THE PROTON…………………………… 140
Universal Magravs positioning principle…………………………………… 143
Universal method of motion…………………………………………………….. 143
CHAPTER 20 …………………………………………………………………………… 146
MOLECULES …………………………………………………………………………….. 146
CHAPTER 21 …………………………………………………………………………… 148
PLASMA DILUTION TECHNOLOGY ………………………………………………… 148
A soup of weak plasmatic magnetic fields ………………………………….. 148
Disentanglement ……………………………………………………………………. 150
CHAPTER 22 …………………………………………………………………………… 154
MATTERS AND MAGRAVS SYSTEMS ……………………………………………… 154
matter propulsion technology ………………………………………………….. 154
Matter gravitational technology……………………………………………….. 154
CHAPTER 23 …………………………………………………………………………… 159
MATTER PMTICS IN REACTORS FOR LIFT AND MOTION………………………. 159
Principle concept of upward or separation motion ……………………… 159
CHAPTER 24 …………………………………………………………………………… 163
PASSIVE MAGNETIC FIELDS ………………………………………………………… 163
CHAPTER 25 …………………………………………………………………………… 164
NEW UNDERSTANDINGS AND NEW TECHNOLOGIES………………………….. 164
Pmtics reactors for production of energy…………………………………… 168
New type of Generators ………………………………………………………….. 169
Seed of thought ……………………………………………………………………… 174
10
CHAPTER 26 …………………………………………………………………………… 176
MATTERS EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS AND OBSERVATIONS ………………….. 176
Radiation ……………………………………………………………………………… 177
Weight reduction, motion and lift……………………………………………… 177
Production of matters …………………………………………………………….. 181
Dark Matter technology………………………………………………………….. 182
CHAPTER 27 …………………………………………………………………………… 183
DISCUSSIONS AND CONCLUSIONS…………………………………………………. 183
Mass of the Matters and Mass of the plasma………………………………. 185
CHAPTER 28 …………………………………………………………………………… 191
INSIGHT INTO THE FUTURE………………………………………………………….. 191
REFERENCES…………………………………………………………………………. 197
PUBLISHED AND UNPUBLISHED WORKS BY M. T. KESHE … 200
INTERNET LINKS…………………………………………………………………… 211
INDEX …………………………………………………………………………………….. 212
11
Introduction
In the progressive path of mans’ technological achievement, it has been proven that the
human race has not been able to create and produce fundamental energy systems similar
to the ones which are operating in the spans’ of the universe.
Nevertheless, he has managed simply to convert one form of energy to another and he
has made use of the small surplus energies released by these methods to his advantage.
In the universe, the structure, operation, appearance and existence of the plasma and an
atom, does not so much differ from the relationships and interactions of their larger
counter parts as the molecules, solar systems and galaxies.
Where, as in the present science and state-of-the-art technology, the lower orders of
particles of construction of an atom in its nucleus are considered to be made of quarks
and gluons.
The world of science has never looked at and into the progressive construction of a
plasma (Chapter 3) on the same basis and principles’ as other larger matters and fields
in universal orders of creation and motion.
What this simply means, is that scientists over centuries have made some limited and
un-necessary self-imposed conditions in looking at the physical realities of Matters and
matters in their surrounding environment, for them to be able to compare and draw
parallels from these phenomena and principles to understand the criterions by which the
initial seeds of plasmas are set in the universe and to understand the methods by which
different forces operate within them.
From the basic knowledge of what is in hand in the world of science at the present, it is
not too hard to discover what are the real elementary particles in the universe, and find
an alternative and realistic way of how these fundamental particles of plasma come
together to create the initial seed of plasma.
It is important to note that the existence of dynamic and different strengths, speed,
velocity and densities of magnetic fields, and their interactions, are the cause and the
foundation of the existence of different Matters within the universe. In the universe,
collections of loose and weak magnetic fields have initiated the creation of, and finally
become the initial components of the Matters of plasma.
Rays and plasmatic magnetic fields
At the same time, we consider “rays” as individual and directional magnetic forces. We
consider “fields” as the same ray’s magnetic force as it is influenced by other rays and
magnetic field forces, which the ray makes a dynamic zone of influence in its path.
We consider the same phenomena in principle with respect to plasma and plasmatic
12
magnetic fields, where, a plasma of magnetic fields is considered to be a collection of
such rays and fields of rays.
The collective interactions of weak plasmatic magnetic fields in the universe are
considered to become the foundation and the cornerstone of the creation of initial
fundamental particles.
In the universe, the same and regular specific sequential and consequential interactions
of lower orders of magnitude plasmatic magnetic fields strength are always considered
to lead to the formation of the plasma and its sub-Matters’ components.
Throughout this book a clear distinction has been tried and been made between the
magnetic field and plasmatic magnetic fields.
The Plasmatic magnetic fields are considered to be of collection of near similar
dynamic rays of magnetic fields strength. We refer to the Plasmatic Magnetic Fields as
“pmtics”, as Magnetic fields, which were detached from their source of creation, hence,
the use of the term “plasmatic” for these magnetic fields. For clarity: In this book the
term “plasmatic” refers to a “collection” of dynamic magnetic fields, and NOT to the
state of a plasma in its common term use that refers to a state of dynamic protons.
At the same time, pmtics interactions with other pmtics are considered to create effects
the likes of gravitational fields and Magnetic fields of Matters, plasmas, planets and so
on.
These magnetic rays or fields and their collection as plasmatic magnetic fields, become
known as the Initial Fundamental Particles. Therefore we consider that magnetic
fields to be the “real” fundamental particles.
The present science considers that the ‘elementary particles’ to be of ‘quarks’ and
others. With the new understanding of creation of Matters and forces within the
universal order of creation, in this book when the term ‘elementary particles’ is used,
this means that the ‘magnetic fields’ are considered to be the new ‘elementary
particles’ and their forces. The existence and interaction of these magnetic fields leads
to and creates all other effects that one sees and observes in the universe, like creation
of Magnetic and gravitational fields which leads to creation of what I call different
Matters (Matter, Antimatter and Dark Matter) of the plasma, or what presently is
known as quarks and so on of the plasma. Where, we consider the Dark Matter as an
integral and part of the same normal Matters of existence and as an important part of the
construction of the initial fundamental plasma in the universe, and we do not consider
the Dark Matter as an exotic and distant hidden Matter.
From this point on in this book, we refer to ‘magnetic fields’ as the ‘elementary
particles’ and not consider quarks and others as elementary particles any further, I
consider that these quarks of different colour, with up and down notation and spin are
all created as the outcome and consequences of different interactions and attraction of
these ‘magnetic fields’ or ‘plasmatic magnetic fields‘. As quarks themselves are now
known to be made of simpler particles of ‘magnetic fields‘, then quarks cannot be
13
considered to be the elementary particles.
In this book will be explained how ‘magnetic fields’ become to be the creators of
quarks and other effects and forces within the plasma of proton, then the ‘magnetic
fields’ become the ‘new elementary particles’ in the science of physics.
Further in this book it is explained how different strength of these fields leads to the
creation of different Matters and their forces as has been observed by world of
science.
Furthermore, these weak collections of pmtics and their interactions with magnetic
fields and turbulent magnetic fields forces in different parts of galaxies manifest
themselves as the seeds of atoms, stars, galaxies and so on.
Magnetic and gravitational fields (Magravs)
When we write Magnetic field (with capital M), we considered that these fields refer to
the Magnetic field of celestial objects, like a Star, planet, etc. Where this Magnetic field
is always accompanied with gravitational fields of the object.
Where we consider that gravitational fields and Magnetic fields cannot exist in the
universe without each other, and that they are produced simultaneously. Through the
same dynamic materials and Matters in the same region. Due to the construction of
other Matters in their catchments area, these entities could have a different value than
the other. As the Matter/matter content of the object dictates which will be stronger in
strength and value than the other in that given position. The only known and possible
objects that its gravitational and Magnetic fields could be equal in value strength, in
majority of the cases in the universe, are objects of mono-material (like some stars),
with pure hydrogen content. There are cases in the universe(s) that mono-matter of
objects can be like uranium or heavier elements. These objects of heavier mono-matters
are usually the producers of stronger gravitational fields and Magnetic fields, by several
orders of magnitudes than the hydrogen mono-matter objects. It is assumed that each
universe cannot possess more than one heavy material mono-magnetic star.
It has to be noted that the co-existence of these two fields always in interaction with any
other magnetic fields or plasma of fields always lead to the creation of a
magnetosphere, which the boundary of the magnetosphere is the maximum point of
balance or equality between the two field forces. Any variation in strength of one of the
two fields in respect to the other will create different effects, for example such
unbalance field between the two fields can be seen in Mercury, which has no
atmosphere, and such a misbalance can also be observed in most moons of planetary
systems.
In this book, as one field cannot exist without the other, for representation of the
MAgnetic and GRAVitational fieldS we use the term: “MAGRAVS”.
14
Plasmas
We consider that “ The Plasma in its collective existence is a combination of different
initial fundamental Matters, which these Matters are created through the interaction of
at least two or more of the same strength plasmatic magnetic fields (the initial
fundamental particles)”.
Plasmas (Chapter 3) are considered to be collection of combination of interaction of
pmtics forces of Matters’, Antimatters’ and Dark Matters’ and other magnetic fields
forces, all at the same time and within an overall sphere of the confines of the plasma.
Further, in the process of interactions and collections of these initial pmtics with each
other, in specific combinations, these leads to creation of atoms, molecules, matters and
so on.
In this disclosure, simple connections between Initial Fundamental Particles and initial
Fundamental Plasmas are explained and discussed.
These specific collections and interaction of initial fundamental particles and initial
fundamental plasmas and their interaction with other magnetic fields manifest
themselves as states of matters, these are purely magnetic fields densities and
compactness environment dependent, and they present themselves as different states of
matter (gases, liquids and solids).
Matter and matter
In the following sections, we clearly distinguish between states of matter (gases, liquids
and solids), denoted as “matter”, and state of the Matters (Matter, Antimatter and Dark
Matter) denoted as “Matter” or “Matters”.
Initial Gravitational Fields
The interaction of different magnetic fields of different strengths, upon each other, is
considered to be the creator of initial gravitational fields for the start of the creation of
the initial seeds of the Matters of the plasma (Fig. 8 B).
We consider that pmtics interact to create the attraction field or gravitational field.
Reactor technology
With the new knowledge and new first principles which are disclosed in this book about
the creation of Matters’ and plasmas’, techniques acquired and reactor systems have
been designed, developed and tested, it has become possible to replicate the pmtics of
plasmas’ environment that allows different Matters of plasma to be released from their
interlocking magnetic fields forces within the confines of a reactor.
15
Further on, it has become possible within the structure of these reactors, to manage and
control, these unlocked fields and Matters of the plasma, for specific predetermined
functions and applications.
In these new reactors, in being able to weaken the Magravs of the plasmas (Coulomb
magnetic or energy barrier) and by allowing the Matters of the plasma to be more free
to move within the environment of the reactor. Where, these reactors were designed to
facilitate the reduction in plasma magnetic fields forces and eventually to create an
environment that Matters of the plasma can freely move in a soup of Matters, pmtics
and rays. Where, through the operation of these types of reactors the famous Coulomb
barrier becomes irrelevant in the overall structure of the soups of Matters binding
magnetic fields of the plasma.
With these new methods of the manipulation of the structure of the Matters’ of the
plasma it has become possible for the pmtics forces of the plasma within these reactors
to be unleashed, and with plasmas’ constituent substructure loosen, it has become
possible to manage to attain new powerful effects and properties from these rather weak
initial fundamental magnetic fields of the plasma. Where up to the present time, these
have been the unknown knowledge and methods in the world of science.
Within the structure of simple nuclear-based systems that have been developed,
conditions are created in which simple weak ambient dynamic pmtics, similar to the
internal construction of plasmas, are generated. The technology for creation of
conditions similar to the internal structure of the plasma and methods which have been
specially developed, that allows the loosening of the magnetic fields structure of the
plasma, this will change the course of present nuclear fusion, and allows scientists in
this field to achieve their goals rapidly and at the fraction of cost of present systems.
In the new state-of-the-art technology much simpler, softer and more practical ways,
very similar to conditions as in the universe, are employed to attain fission and fusion of
different Matters and plasmas.
During the reading of this book the reader will discover various future applications of
this technology, so it will not surprise the reader that we have applied for several
international patents to cover all aspects of the topics, principles, methods and systems
mentioned in this book and the ones to follow.
Fission and Fusion by Plasma Dilution
The present methods of fusion and the Antimatter production technologies apply strong
magnetic fields forces or high-speed rotation of the plasma, with low or limited success.
As the real principle of the construction and structure of these sub-plasma Matters have
never been understood correctly.
In our new state-of-the-art science and technology, one creates a control-conditioned
environment within the confines of a multi-core reactor, which facilitates and allows the
plasmas’ Matters to disentangle themselves into their sub-Matters and pmtics
16
components.
In these reactors the effects of the newly freed principal Matters of plasma’s
interactions with each other are utilised to create new and more powerful internal and
external Magravs’ forces, within and in respect to other plasmas and Matters in multicore
reactors system environments’.
In the new state-of-the-art technology reactors, after achieving desired goals, the system
parameters can be changed so that the system can allow the same separated parts of
plasmas’ Matters to return to their original properties and regroup as the original
plasmas.
This new method of loosening and the use of plasmas’ Matters within the confines of a
reactor is to be called the Keshe Theory of the “Plasma Dilution” and the art to achieve
this “Plasma Dilution Technology”(Chapter 21).
This technology means that it is now possible to create an environment of weak
magnetic fields within the cores’ of a reactor, where the plasma is allowed to be
opened-up and be released of the interlocking magnetic fields forces between its
different constituent Matters.
The new dilution method in opening-up the plasma is a more practical and gentler
methods for fission or fusion of the plasmas and/or its sub-Matters’ components, for
utilisation of their effects and properties.
In the present state-of-the-art technology in physics, scientists have chosen harsh
method systems in fission industry. For fusion, they have chosen high speed and by
compression of plasma, utilising giant magnetic fields induced technology to achieve
their goals.
They use accelerators to slam the plasma on to a surface, to extract the sub-plasmatic
components like the Antimatter component of the plasma (6, 7, and 8).
In the new state-of-the-art plasma dilution technology, within the confines of the
reactors, environments and conditions are created, which are like a soup of weak
pmtics, similar to the internal structure of plasma’s own environment.
In this new approach, any new introduced plasma into the reactor, new plasma’s
binding magnetic fields forces come into an environment and interact with fields
similar to their own plasmatic magnetic fields strength to allow their more condensed
fields of interlocking Matter, Antimatter and others, to loosen and operate more freely
in the environment of the pmtics soup of the reactor cores.
Using this new state-of-the-art science and technology, achievements of astonishing
effects has been reported over the past few years. Where, with the current state-of-theart
technology, to achieve these effects, is considered to be nearly impossible and
literally a dream and against the present known laws’ of physics.
17
These effects reported, like being able to lift a reactor system weighing several
kilograms by the use of a few grams of gasses, utilises the properties of the Antimatter
components of the plasma’s interactions with each other within the cores of these
reactors.
This new technology makes it possible to produce in a very fast and easy manner
nanomaterials and their constituent pmtics, like nano atomic layers known as graphene
(sp2), diamond atomic structure (sp3) and nano-oxides, at room temperatures and
atmospheric conditions, as has been independently confirmed by reputable organisation
in the west.
In fact, all that has been achieved is the application of the understanding of how to use
the soup principle to undo the tangles of magnetic fields of the plasma, and release of its
substructure Matters, like Antimatter, in a reactor.
Lift and Motion by Magravs positioning
By utilising the properties of the interaction of forces of the collection of pmtics,
interlocking between the Matters of the plasma and/or their sub-magnetic fields, which
are part of the structure of the Antimatter and the Dark Matter, it has become possible to
create stronger Magnetic fields, or gravitational fields’ forces within the confines of and
in respect to the surrounding environment of multiple-core reactors’.
These Magravs, if strong enough to interact with similar fields in their environment and
with other fields of the same components of plasma in other parts of the same reactors,
these Magravs interactions’ of the system and the planet can cause lift and motion of the
mass of the system, which the reactor is attached to.
Scientists at the Fermilab (6) in the USA state that small amounts of Antimatter, as little
as a spoon-full, can release enough energy equivalent for the launch of several shuttle
flights. This laboratory has confirmed that they have managed to collect some of this
Antimatter in the past forty years, using special plasma separation and containment
methods.
Utilising the new plasma dilution simple methods’, not only are the Antimatter
components of the plasma separated but, at the same time the interaction of the
magnetic fields of these Matters are used within the system for the creation of strong
Magravs within and in respect to their environment, for creation of lift and motion.
The newly created Magravs in these reactor cores, in interacting with the surrounding
planetary Magravs and in trying to find a new Magravs balance, for example, in respect
to the Earth fields, causes the system to move.
This method of achieving system motion due to interaction of Magravs forces is to be
known as the Keshe principle of Magravs positioning (Chapter 19). This position is,
the point where the combined gravitational and Magnetic fields strength of the reactor
18
system and the Earth, find a new position, where they are in balance strength in respect
to each other.
After achieving the required Magravs positioning, this being the new height and/or
distance, in respect to another Magravs force like that of the Earths Magravs, the
systems’ internal parameters can be changed again to create a new Magravs strength
within the reactor. At this point, a new Magravs positioning balance needs to be attained
by the system in respect to the planet. This, forces the system to find a new Magravs
balance in respect to the planet Magravs’ strength, and consequently for the need for the
system to achieve the new Magravs positioning in respect to Magravs of the planet.
In attaining a new Magravs positioning balance, this leads to the movement of one
system, in respect to another.
Thus through this new Magravs positioning method, motion of crafts, cars and systems
for energy production can be attained without burning any fuel or using the present
propulsion technology for lift of relatively small payload into space.
Through Magravs positioning principles, this is how motions of atoms, planets, and
stars and so on, are created and achieved in the universe (Chapter 19).
Through tests, we can confirm that, the motion of any mass for any Magravs positioning
system is not size dependent, but mass dependent, where the smaller mass always tends
to move in respect of the larger mass in the universe. There are some exceptions in
respect to this rule of the thumb. As in Magravs positioning reactor systems, where
gravitational field strength control within the cores of the reactors plays a major roll to
achieve lift, motion and Magnetic field protection of the system.
As I have said before “no one has ever seen a rocket in the back of the Earth that has
been causing its motion for billions of years”.
Subsequently, if necessary, through the same changes in internal parameters of these
new reactors, the components of the Matters’ of the plasma are and can be allowed and
be facilitated to regroup and return back to their original structural state of pmtics levels
of Matters and composition, once the desired affects are achieved.
Through new understanding and new state-of-the-art technology and by simply
following the methods and universal orders of creation of Matters, the components of
plasmas’ Matter, Antimatter and Dark Matter can be manipulated and utilised for
effective lift and motion of objects, creation of energy, production of new Matters and
so on.
By the release of this new knowledge, this does not mean that the paths chosen up to
now by other scientists have been wrong; this is by no means so. Nevertheless, their
achievements have been and are limited because of the focus on the use of the matter;
it’s state of gases, liquids and solids, and even a limited view on plasma (as the fourth
state-of matter) rather than our approach in use of the Matters; it’s state of Matters,
Antimatters, Dark Matters with their different pmtics strength components of the
19
plasma.
With the use of the matter, one has to burn fuel to overcome gravitational field forces to
attain a new position in respect to the planet. However, “with Magravs positioning
systems one uses the pmtics of the Matters of plasma (Matmags) to create Magravs
forces within the reactor, for the reactor system to move within the Magravs forces of
another object, like the Earth, for the system to attain a position in respect to the Earth
Magravs forces.”
We consider that as much as there are Magravs forces between Matters, the same is true
for the existence of Magravs forces between the Antimatter and the Dark Matter
components of the plasmas too. This principle applies the same in respect to the inertia
of Matter as much as to inertia of the Antimatter and the Dark Matter components of the
plasma.
That is to say, in the universe there are Antimatter Magravs forces and Dark Matter
Magravs forces as well as inertia for all three Matters.
All Matters and their effects can be used for the creation of motion and energy
production in conjunction with other matters and Matters of the plasma.
Our newly released knowledge is for achieving and reaching the same target as other
scientists and institutes, but with new knowledge about the construction of Matters of
the plasma, we are achieving more profound and stronger effects, in simpler and less
complicated ways than have been chosen in the past.
We see this release of new knowledge and technologies as an addition to the rest of the
past and present scientific works, and a breakaway from the complicated ways and
harsher methods.
In this disclosure, one comes to understand how Matters and matters are made from the
start of time (Chapter 3). Where, the method of creation of plasma and atoms in the
universe is explained in a simple form.
Then one can see how to use the inner construction of Matters’ pmtics to generate vast
amounts of energy and learn to use magnetic fields principles of interaction that are the
fundamental principles’ in the universal method for creation of motion.
We have tested the Magravs positioning systems for motion, and the results confirm the
correctness of the theoretical aspects of the approach. The future of space technology
will be based on simple safe portable Magravs positioning nuclear-based reactors,
which have been developed and tested.
20
CHAPTER 1
Historically unexplained principles
The main reason for the lack of understanding of simple processes of creation and
control of Matters of the plasma is not so much the lack of knowledge in the scientific
world in the past or present. Rather the lack of progress is by large due to, the peer
review obstruction mechanism, which has been put-up, for some scientists, to protect
their individual financial interests and titles, in their schools of thoughts in their field of
science.
For example, despite having huge research budgets and human resources, the world of
science in respect to understanding of the simple structure of the plasma and its fusion,
has not reached substantial results in the past sixty years. Where, nuclear physicists and
industry have been trying to cause fusion of plasmas of hydrogen atoms, in fusion
reactors, which have been built, and are being built at costs of billions of dollars.
The structure and working of these state-of-the-art fusion reactors are built against the
natural laws of physics and opposite to the way, that fusion of plasmas takes place in
the universe. Where, these reactors operate with near zero-gravitational field forces
within their structure in trying to achieve fusion. Where in these systems, the natural
internal gravitational field forces needed for a simple fusion is missing.
What they miss as the natural gravitational field forces needed for fusion, they try to
replace this with the use of strong external electro-magnetic fields, by the use of large
massive coils and huge amount of energy to operate these systems, and then the they try
to achieve fusion. This is like as they are trying to bake bread with only water, salt and
heat, without having its main ingredient, the flour. The question to ask from these
scientists, is simply that, where are the gravitational fields essential for fusion in these
reactors, and where is it suppose to come from, if there is going to be a successful
fusion chain process as in the middle of the Sun, which, these forces are in thousands of
G‘s.
In fact, with the use of giant external magnetic coils, they squeeze plasmas into tighter
balls and then they try to fuse two hard balls of plasmas together. This is the reason
why, they have and will achieve very little, if the present misguided path of fusion
technology is to continue.
Another point is that the present twenty-first century advanced world of science is lead
to believe and to accept the outdated 19th century principles of creation of Magnetic
fields through convection principles in the centre of the Earth. Even, when scientific
seismological data’s (1, 2, 3, 42A, 42B) indicate that another explanation is needed.
For example, some peers consider that man in the 21st century is not intelligent enough
to discover how gravitational fields of planets are created. According to these peers, the
principle of creation of gravitational field forces and their control at present is beyond
21
comprehension of other scientists.
Where, as new Magnetic and gravitational fields positioning systems, which have been
developed and tested, confirms the ability to create lift and motion by just using the
effects of Matters magnetic fields (Matmags), without burning any fuel or use of
propulsion technology.
Within the present 21st century knowledge and proven science, there are a number of
unacceptable points from these earlier centuries accepted principles like the creation of
the magnetic fields of planet through convection principles.
New theories and principles for these misassumptions, unexplained and out-of-the-hat
principles are explained and discussed in the following sections and chapters.
In the following four sections in this chapter, it is important to note that:
Information that have been obtained through the earth-quakes seismological data over
past thirty years from around the world, these data points to the fact, that what has been
assumed to be the solid inner core of the planet and to be made of one piece solid
metallic matter (Fig. 1), this core in fact has a cavity in its centre (Fig. 1) (1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
41A, 41B). This newly discovered cavity in the solid core of the planet has been called
by geologists the ‘inner-inner’ core of the planet and is assumed to be about at least
over 500 km in radius in the centre of the inner solid core of the planet.
I have called this new core, “The Caroline Core” (Fig. 1, 2 and 3), to distinguish it
from other presently known cores’ of the planet (12). - The creation of Magnetic Fields of the Earth
The assumption of the creation of the Magnetic fields of the Earth by scientific world
has been based on the understanding of the working of the dynamo principle of earlier
centuries. Where, the process of the production of the current was accepted to start-off
with the motion of high temperature fluid of matters in the outer core (Fig. 1), in the
centre of the Earth by heating and liquidity of matters in this core.
Where electrons of atoms of matters are considered to be released or loosened from
their atoms to be free to vibrate or float in this region, and as the rotation of the solid
metal inner core (Fig. 1) of the planet interacts with these free electrons in the outer core
of the planet, this leading to the creation of Magnetic field of the planet (Fig. 1 Field
M).
If this assumption is totally correct, then how do other planets and stars create their
Magnetic fields?
Stars like the Sun, possess Magnetic fields and yet do not have solid inner cores as the
Earth does. The Sun definitely generates Magnetic fields, which does span beyond the
22
Earth and the Saturn.
The first flaw with this convection theory of electrons motion is that, we know now that
plasma of an atom is a charged entity and possesses much stronger charges by
several orders of magnitude than its smaller counterpart electron.
Thus, the main Magnetic field force of the planet is more feasible to be created by the
plasma charges rather than electrons charges. With the knowledge we now know, that
even the electron is a plasma condition similar to the proton construction (Chapter 3, 17,
18 and 19).
Fig. 1: Two interacting plasmatic magnetic fields in the inner cores of the Earth lead to the
creation of the Magnetic field of the planet.
Note: The Caroline Core, can contain plasmas, atoms (nanomaterial), molecules,
different matters, hydrogen, potassium, uranium and plutonium due to nuclear decay,
fission, possible fusion, ionisation of matters, leading to the creation of heat in this
core, which is transferred through the solid inner core to keep the materials content of
outer core in fluid state.
Through current knowledge in plasma physics and studies in the nuclear fusion
industry, it is a known fact that dynamic protons (plasmas) of atoms are positively
charged entities and do generate their own currents, through what is known as the
Birkeland current principle. It is through this principle of creation of current and the
dynamism of plasma in the centre of stars that main solar Magnetic and gravitational
fields forces of stars are created, and not the convection principle.
23
Secondly, if we have plasma in the centre of the planet, which is possible, then the
convection theory for the production of Earth’s Magnetic field has limited validity, and
it is possible that some of the Magnetic fields of the planet are partially created by the
convection principles method too. - Creation of the Gravitational Fields of the Earth
The other major concept, which is an obstacle to the development of new knowledge, is
to understand how gravitational fields of planets are created. This is a concept that has
not been understood until now. Where, the creation and maintenance of gravitational
field’s forces in stars and planets have unnecessarily made been by the scientific world
into the holy grail of science.
In fact, the creation of the gravitational fields of planets and stars in the universe is as
simple as the creation of their Magnetic fields.
The hypocrisy with this is that the scientific world and an infant child (at school age)
agree on one principle, that, two dissimilar poles of solid magnets, gets attracted to each
other and pulls one magnet to the other, or they have gravitation in respect to each
other. It is an accepted fact that, opposite poles of magnetic fields forces can interact to
create attraction field forces or the gravitational fields forces in respect to each other
and other matters around them.
Thus, it is correct, to assume that, to have a gravitational field in a planetary system, the
gravitational field forces must be made similarly by the same principles of attraction
and interaction of at least two magnetic fields, in the centre of the planet in respect to
each other. Therefore, the gravitational fields of the planet must have been made by
interaction of two or more sources of magnetic fields in respect to each other in the
centre of planets or stars that can span beyond the physical boundaries of these objects.
By the reality of the existence of the Magnetic and Gravitational field forces around the
Earth, this leads to the confirmation and understanding of a need for two independent
regions that can create magnetic fields forces within the structure of the planet inner
cores, that, their interaction leads to the existence of the gravitational field forces of the
planet.
Consequently the Earth, being in possession of gravitational fields, this confirms and
indicates to the existence and operation of at least two independent magnetic fields
forces regions in the centre cores of the planet (Fig. 2, fields G1 and G2).
Where, the interaction of the two magnetic fields (Fig. 2, fields G1 and G2), which are
generated in the centre cores of the planet, upon each other, leads to the creation of
attraction or gravitational field forces of the planet, similar to the attraction fields of
opposing poles with solid magnets.
It is a known fact that, planets and stars are made of different layers of different
24
materials. Similarly stars are made of the same material (Hydrogen), which, due to
variation in the compression and temperatures, layers are created in these objects, where
the same matters in different layers create and behaves and show slightly different
properties and effects; These different layers produce their own slightly different in
strength magnetic fields force, compared to their adjacent layer magnetic fields
strength. Thus, the layers of plasmatic or fluid materials in different depth of stars and
planets, each layer create their own independent magnetic fields in the centre of planets
or stars.
The magnetic fields created in each dynamic layer in the cores of these celestial bodies,
due to the proximity have no alternative, but to interact with the magnetic fields
generated in ascending or descending layers from them. The interactions between these
magnetic fields in different layers are considered to be as or similar to a solid magnets
state magnetic fields interactions.
In the case of stars and planets’ inner cores, magnetic fields are created by and in
plasmatic states or fluid states of Matters. Where, these flowing dynamic materials in
the inner layers of celestial objects cannot physically lock to each other through the
magnetic fields generated by each layer, as it happens with solid-state magnets. This
being due to fact that atoms and molecules in these layers are continuously in motion
and are pushed around by other forces and the rest of the Matters in their given layers or
by other layers effects and forces.
Nevertheless, the magnetic fields created by each dynamic layer interact with the
magnetic fields of the adjacent dynamic layer or layers. These interactions of magnetic
fields in different layers creates attraction magnetic fields, as much as, repulsion
Magnetic fields forces, in between the materials in the different layers.
Therefore in the same regions and by the same matters, similar magnetic fields
polarities in different layers interact and two similar polarities magnetic fields forces
(Fig. 1 field M1 and M2) repel each other. This repulsion magnetic fields forces (Fig. 1
field M1 and M2) becomes’ the outwards field force pushing and what is known as the
Magnetic field force of the planet (Fig. 1 field M).
Further, the opposite polarities magnetic fields in these layers at the same time, interact
simultaneously and in a similar way, and the interaction of opposite magnetic fields
polarities of matters in these layers (Fig. 2 field G1 and G2), leads to the creation of the
different layers magnetic fields pulling or attraction in respect to each other. This
attraction magnetic fields force (Fig. 2 field G1 and G2) becomes the inward field
forces pulling field force and what is known as the Gravitational field force of the
planet (Fig. 2 field G)(18).
Through tests done over several years with the construction of similar set-ups as in the
inner cores of the planet, the Keshe Theory of creation of gravitational field of
dynamic objects in possession of dynamic cores states that:
“The dynamic outward’ Magnetic fields forces of planets and stars are created by
interaction of the same materials and in the same layers, as their dynamic
25
gravitational fields forces”.
Fig. 2: Two interacting plasmatic magnetic fields in the inner cores of the Earth lead to the
creation of the Gravitational field’s forces of the planet.
The Magnetic fields forces of the planets are made from the interaction of similar
polarities of plasmatic magnetic fields of Matters in the dynamic layers of its inner
cores (Fig. 1 field M) and these radiate themselves outward. The Gravitational fields
forces (Fig. 2 field G) are created by the interaction of the opposite plasmatic magnetic
fields polarities of the same Matters in the same layers in the cores of planet, creating
the pull or inward attraction in these celestial objects”.
This new understanding of interaction of multi-magnetic fields in the planets inner cores
brings about a new definition, new understanding and new explanation of how
gravitational field forces are created in centrally dynamic multi-inner-cores celestial
objects in the universe the like of the Earth and the Sun.
Gravity can now be defined on the real basis and what leads to its manifestation,
strength, existence and control.
Therefore, Gravitational field forces are magnetically based fields, and thus according
to the Keshe Theory of Gravity, Gravity is defined as:
“The Gravity is, the measure of the interaction and attraction of two or more,
magnetic fields forces or dynamic plasmatic strength created within the second
system”(18).
26
This is the same as Newton’s definition of gravity, with the extension however, that two
Matters or matters cannot possess pulling forces nor have gravitation in respect to each
other position, without the existence of magnetism.
Certainly, the attraction and interaction of pmtics forces changes with respect to
position of two objects and they are distance and fields’ strength dependent.
If the celestial objects do not possess magnetic fields strength that can interact with each
other, then, how could they be attracted to each other?
Thus, gravitational field now can be understood and explained in its real terms of what
creates it, and this is due to interaction and attraction of pmtics created within dynamic
cores of celestial objects in respect to each other.
Secondly, as the gravitational fields of these planets or stars are magnetic fields strength
dependent, one can now understand why their attraction is position dependent.
Therefore, gravity in a simple form can be defined as; that gravity or gravitational
fields forces are the measure of the interaction and attraction of two or more magnetic
rays or magnetic fields systems of two or more entities in respect to each other’s
strength and position at any point in the Matter, plasma, matters, planets, solar systems,
galaxies and universe.
This new definition of gravitational fields is an extension to the present knowledge and
due to new understanding of the plasmatic magnetic fields interactions between
components of Matters (see Chapter 3).
Another proposition can be that: We further can assume that the cell of a human or
matters of other objects, which all are made of atoms and plasmas and of magnetic
fields can/are/or behave as the possessor of the second magnetic field in respect to any
other plasmatic magnetic fields in their environment. Therefore, it is possible that
pmtics of these cells and matters in their interaction with the dynamic pmtics of the
planet can behave and replace the interacting double magnetic fields system principles
necessary for the creation of gravitational phenomenon principle to operate.
Further it can be said, that any substance in possession of plasma or nuclei has
gravitational attraction in respect to the planet.
If this is correct and applicable, then, this can be another reason why, a singular
Magnetic field of a planet can be enough to create the gravitational field pull in respect
to any object within the catchments zone of the Magnetic field of the planet’s. That is to
say, a single Magnetic field would be sufficient for the gravitation of plasma to the
planet to be created and exist.
Nevertheless, there could be a flaw with this concept, as one need the gravitational and
magnetic fields (Magravs) together to be able to have a constant free motion and
position option of the two objects too.
27
In this book, we try to make a distinction between magnetic fields of matters and
Magnetic fields created by dynamic interaction of two magnetic rays, two magnetic
fields or two pmtics. Where, in the case of like plasmas and planets Magnetic field and
gravitational fields, which they always accompany each other we use capital M as
Magnetic field. In these references instead of writing Magnetic and gravitational fields
we write in short as “Magravs” magnetic fields forces in respect to each others
position”.
“Where, the Gravitational field force of one celestial body in respect to the other is a
measure of the attraction and of the interaction of one plasmatic magnetic fields
strength created within one system in respect to another plasmatic magnetic fields. - The source of the Heat in the Earth Cores
Another unanswered question in geophysics is that, where does exactly the heating of
the inner solid core of the planet Earth comes’ from that can keep the outer core
materials in their fluid state? Secondly, how and through what method is heat generated
in the inner cores of the planet?
These questions have not been addressed fully with clarity up to the present time in the
science of the planet.
In general, it is an accepted fact that the Earth maintains heating of its inner cores. I
consider that the Caroline core is a Geo-nuclear reactor (Fig. 1, 2 and 3) to be known as
the Geo-Reactor (Fig. 2). It is not hard to assume that there are radioactive matters
(41C) in this new central core of the planet (12), which leads to the heating of the inner
cores of the planet. In general, nuclear geophysicists and myself agree upon this, up to
certain degree, with difference in the content of the matter types and the process by
which this heating is generated.
Where, geophysicists mainly consider that the heat in the Caroline core is generated
through the nuclear decay of heavy elements, which have sunk into the centre of the
planet due to their weight.
As a nuclear engineer having built several simple nuclear reactors replicating the
structure of the inner cores of the planet Earth and achieving the same effects of
creating Magravs similar to of the Earth, I believe, Matters, plasmas, hydrogen atoms,
carbon atoms, radioactive matters and other matters collectively are parts of the mixture
of the matters content of the Caroline’s core (12).
One can now clearly explain that the major contributor to the generation of heat in the
inner cores of the planet are, or can be due to nuclear decays, operation of plasmas,
nuclear fission (41C) and possible nuclear fusion of materials in the Caroline core of the
planet.
Materials in this region of such a high temperature are, and can be, considered to be in
the fluid state (12) as has been considered by present geophysics scientists in respect to
28
the condition in the outer core materials of the planet.
Matters in this region, due to their fluidity, can be considered to be able to produce their
own dynamic magnetic fields (Fig. 1 field M2 and Fig. 2 field G2), due to the dynamic
motion of fluid matters in this section of the planet and these fields can/and interact with
the dynamic solid inner core of the planet (Fig. 2). This being in principle similar to
what has been assumed by geophysicists, that to be happening in between the inner
core and the outer core regions of the planet matters leading to production of Magnetic
field forces of the planet at the present time. Secondly due to the charged plasmas and
charged electrons and their motion in this core, these could be partially responsible for
the creation of the second magnetic field force of the planet.
By the discovery of the second cavity, the Caroline core, in the inner cores of the planet,
it becomes clear that the second magnetic fields (Fig. 1 field M2 and G2) can be, and
are created in the very centre of the planet. Where, the solid core of the planet will act
as a separating partition wall, between the two dynamic matter regions in the centre of
the planet, namely the fluid matters in the Caroline core and the fluid matters in the
outer core.
So, the holy grail of the gravity (18) can be explained by the principle of interaction of
two dynamic magnetic fields sources in the centre of the planet as was discussed in the
above section. Therefore, the interaction between two pmtics on either side of the solid
core is the source of the plasmatic Magravs of the planet. - What causes the Rotation of the planet Earth?
Another unexplained and daily-accepted phenomenon is the rotation of the planet Earth.
How is the rotation of the planet Earth created and maintained? What causes and
dictates its constant speed of rotation of the planet, irrespective of where the planet is in
its solar system?
The way and how the rotation of a planet is created, has never been explained in the
past by world of science.
The existence of two independent pmtics forces (Fig. 1 field forces of M1 and M2, and
Fig. 2 field forces of G1 and G2) on either side of the inner solid core of the planet
(Fig. 3) can help to explain the next mystery in the world of geophysics, through the
Keshe Theory of “The principle of the rotation of the planet”.
Magnetic fields are known to possess field forces that can exert pressure on an object,
and are capable of causing its motion.
The existence of, and the continuously maintaining and interplay of the two dynamic
pmtics forces (Fig. 1 fields M1 and M2 and Fig. 2 fields G1 and G2) on either side of
the inner solid core of the planet, partially goes to answer the sources of the fields that
exert forces on the inner solid core of the planet that causes the motion of the inner solid
core.
29
It has been explained that the interaction of two dynamic magnetic fields on either side
of the inner solid core, leads to the creation of Magravs forces of the planet. At the same
time the interaction and exertion of the same magnetic fields forces on the inner solid
core of the planet put magnetic pressure on the inner solid core of the planet, causing
the motion of the inner solid core of the planet (Fig. 3 fields G1 and G2). In the figure 3
the total and overall effect of Magnetic field and Gravitational field forces of each core
on the inner solid core are denoted as G1 and G2.
Fig. 3: Interacting plasmatic magnetic fields in the inner cores of the Earth leads to the creation
of the rotation of the planet.
As the solid inner core confines’ the materials in the Caroline core (Fig. 3) and the outer
cores materials are confined by other matters at the outer boundaries of this core (Fig.
3), these two cores are considered to be holding a constant volume and weight of
matters. Thus, it is possible to assume that the magnetic fields forces created by each
core will be constant and these magnetic fields forces will be maintained on either side
of the inner solid core of the planet for a long period of time (billions of years).
Hence, the balance of magnetic fields forces exerted on the metallic inner solid core, by
both magnetic fields on either side of the inner solid core, will determine the speed of
rotation of the solid core of the planet.
Consequently, through the principle of viscosity and friction of the matters inside the
planet, the final speed of the rotation of the whole planet is considered to be set and be
due to the motion of the inner solid core of the planet. Which is carried out to the outer
30
layers of the planet and becomes the final rotational speed of the planet.
Therefore, the speed of the rotational motion of the planet is determined by the planet’s
internal cores magnetic interactions upon the inner solid core of the planet and by large,
this speed of rotation is irrespective of the position of the planet in its solar system and
overall effect of the external Magravs forces, which are exerted by other planets, and
the star of the solar system, on the planet.
So the twenty-four hour speed of rotation of the Earth is totally dictated by the exertion
of the magnetic fields of the other cores on the solid inner cores of the planet as has just
been explained, and not necessarily by any other factors.
This principle of constant speed of rotation of celestial object should hold true for the
all-dynamic celestial objects that are in possession of dynamic thermal central materials
cores and this rotation is irrespective of the temperature of the inner cores or
temperature of the outer layers and surrounding environment of these objects.
Through tests in laboratory of similar reactors as the construction of Earth inner cores,
we have concluded that the speed of rotation of celestial objects and Matters and the
creation of Magravs strength are temperature independent.
The motional rotation of a planet is created through the same principle as the linear
motion that is attained in the present Maglev magnetic railway system of Japan, with
the difference that, due to spherical shape of the inner solid core of the planet (Fig. 3),
the motion created in this case will be a rotational one (12) rather than linear. We can
consider that this principle is universal. - The difference between Matter and matter
Another unexplained phenomenon in the world of physics has been the understanding
and the difference between the Matter and the matter, one in respect to the other.
In this book we make a clear distinction between the Matters and the matters in all
levels of universal orders of materials, where;
The Matters are understood to be as the like of the Matter, the Antimatter and the Dark
Matter. These three Matters are all made of different plasmatic magnetic fields strength
and are field strength dependent in respect to each other. The three Matters are the three
major components of a plasma. Each of the three Matters have pmtics of another
strength, where the constituent strength of the pmtics creates different Magravs,
different magnetosphere field strength and different mass for each Matter, and these
independent of the other two Matters within the plasma, and independent of the
environment that surrounds the plasma.
Whereas:
31
The matter refers to the Matter component of the plasma. Matter becomes matter, when
the Matter comes to levels that plasmatic magnetic fields forces and the motion of
these forces in their environment can determine the compactness of the components of
the Matter pmtics appearance in the plasma that make the matter appears as a gas, a
liquid or a solid state-of-matter. These forces being created due to interactions of
Magravs, dynamism of the environment, and so on.
At the same time, Matters are pmtics strength, contact friction dependent. Where, the
friction of pmtics in matter usually leads to the change of the state of the matter through
the change of plasmatic magnetic fields forces to the likes of light, heat and other’s.
It is the external field forces and not the field strength of the environment that dictate
the compactness of any of the plasmas’ Matters so that the pmtics becomes matter and
visible or tangible to human senses, like odours or appearance of Matter as solid, gas or
liquid, it is then that the Matter comes to be called the matter.
The principle of strength of the magnetic fields of Matters is very different than the
strength of magnetic fields in matters.
When we consider to work with Matter(s) for space technology, the term “fuel” is not
applicable, therefore the use of the term “MATter MAGnetic Supply”, abbreviated to
“MATMAGS”. This is a Matter (Matter, Dark Matter, Antimatter) source of pmtics
used in reactors for the production of Magravs for the operation of gravitational
positioning reactors, where one can state the Matter needed and the strength of the
Magnetic fields of the Matter needed to achieve desired effects from the reactor.
Since “fuels” only refer to the matter level, where fuels are usually burned through
ignition of matters, whereas magnetic fields of Matters, in the form of Magravs, are
manipulated to create a preferred effect, and where the magnetic fields can be reversed
back to any other state of Matter, and they are never lost. The only difference would be
that with the Matter supply the magnetic fields strength can differ after processing, but
in reality one would be left still having magnetic fields of varying degrees in strength. - How motion of matters and Matters are created?
The question to be asked first is, that, how the Matter, the Antimatter, and the Dark
Matter are created in the universe.
Secondly, how are the regular independent motion of Matters (Matter, Dark Matter and
Antimatter) and matters (electrons, atoms, matters, planets, stars and galaxies) in the
universe without burning of any fuel created and maintained?
No explanation has been put forward by the scientific world that is realistic,
fundamental and applicable in all levels and to all sizes of objects and in any position in
the universe.
In the following chapters of this book, I will disclose how matters (gasses, liquids and
32
solids) and Matters (Matter, Antimatter and Dark Matter) as part of fundamental
elements of creation, move in the universe. In addition, it will be explained, how the
plasmas, electrons, planets and stars attain and maintain their motion in the span of the
universe. (Chapters 19)
Motion in the universe is achieved by understanding in full that how the construction of
Matters happens at their simplest form, from the inception of the initial fundamental
particles how they come together, and how they respond to each other’s magnetic fields
forces, that the interactions of all constituents Magnetic field forces in Matter and
plasma of Matters, leads to the creation of motion of plasmas, electrons, planets, stars,
and so on. - How Light is created?
The present science of physics accepts that the light is created through the drop in
energy of an electron from one energy level to a lower, or its ground energy level.
Further, in this book we will explain how light is created in the universe, where actually
there are no electrons present in the plasma-saturated environment.
The other unanswered question is whether the speed of light (C) is the ultimate speed in
the world of Matters.
The speed of light is in the world of science thought to be the ultimate speed that any
Matter can travel.
I consider this assumption to be incorrect for all states of Matters (Matter, Dark Matter
and Antimatter).
The assumption that the speed of light is the ultimate speed can be correct only for
interactions between matter and Matter component of the three basic Matters (Matter,
Antimatter, and Dark Matter).
I consider that the plasma is to be in possession of all three states of Matters, these
being the Matter, the Dark Matter and the Antimatter. (See the cover image of the
book)
Secondly, the assumption that the speed of light to be the ultimate speed, can at the
same time be partially correct and applicable, only for a limited fraction of time for
specific conditions of matter (and not necessarily only in vacuum conditions). Where
matter itself is only a small part of bigger components of Matters of plasma in the
universe.
There are too many physical facts that are present in the mechanism of the universe’s
daily operation that rejects that the speed of the light being the ultimate speed. These
new theories will be discussed further in Chapter 7, titled “Speed of light”. A large
numbers of physicists around the world do not accept such a limitation on the speed of
33
matters in the universe.
34
CHAPTER 2
Interaction of Plasmatic Magnetic Fields (pmtics)
In the Matters the strength of the magnetic fields goes back to the origin of the creation
of magnetic fields. Where, the strength of the magnetic fields is in terms of reference,
the power of the magnetic fields. Where magnetic fields in essence are created out of
the potential difference in position from their source and the rate of the flow of the
magnetic fields from their source becomes the current of the magnetic fields. Thus, as
the position is closer and the rate of the flow is higher, the stronger the strength of the
fields. This principle of creation of magnetic fields and magnetic fields strength are
explained in full in the paper titled “The creation of magnetic fields”.
In understanding the ways and the simplicity with which the gravitational field force of
plasmatic conditions are generated and maintained in planetary and stars systems, we
can now state that the method of creation and production of the Magnetic fields and
gravitational field forces of galaxies, stars, planets, molecules, atoms and plasma are all
considered to be through the same method, irrespective of their physical size.
At the same time, it is important to appreciate that this applies to all scales of the
universal order of creation. That is to say, stars are made of the denser, larger and
stronger by order magnitudes of plasmatic magnetic fields strength forces in the
universe. Compared to the plasmas and the electrons, which are made of a weaker order
of magnitude of plasmatic magnetic fields strength forces.
Nevertheless, the same principle of structural formation applies to the Magravs structure
of stars as to the structure of an atom, the plasma and the electron.
In the physically big state order of matter, large scale, stronger and denser magnetic
fields can be easily observed and detected, like the magnetic fields of the Earth, the Sun
or the Galaxies.
By the same measure and the same order of the scale and magnitude, plasmas and
electrons possess and are made of and follow the same principles of Magravs
interaction and attraction, and hold on to their different Matters and forces, as a star or a
galaxy does.
Whereas, the existence of the lower order of the magnitude pmtics that make the
physical structure of plasma due to their very weak magnetic fields strength, can mainly
be confirmed through the physical existence of the plasma itself, its behaviour, and its
properties.
Through our own tests, which have been done over several years, it is apparent that the
plasmas possess their own Magravs forces, which are made from the interactions of
combinations of different pmtics forces within their structure.
35
The fact is that, if the plasma did not create and maintained Magravs forces internally, it
would not have been able to hold on to its fundamental particles, for the plasma to exist.
By the Keshe Theory of the Gravity, the existence of Magravs forces as the existence of
a magnetosphere of the plasma confirms the existence and interaction of at least two
plasmatic magnetic fields forces within this structure.
Secondly, if the plasma did not possess Magnetic field, it would get stock to other
plasmas in its environment, these environments being for example the like of the other
plasmas in the nucleus of heavier atoms. Then as the plasma is a free motion entity,
which keeps distance from other plasmas in its environment, this confirms the existence
of Magnetic as well as gravitational field’s, which is internally maintained and
emanated from the plasma itself.
Unless it can be proven to the contrary, we can assume that all plasmas are made of the
same types of pmtics, and the same structural Matters and the same structural
configuration. Then, we can say with confidence that all plasmas are made of identical
Matters and create the identical Magravs forces within their structure.
We consider neutrons, protons and especially electrons as being of plasma structure
with only difference in their pmtics content level. Thus, different atoms of different
matters have different energy and physical pmtics properties from other atoms purely
due to the level of total pmtics of their total plasmas that they can hold onto.
From this point on, in this book, it is considered that all hydrogen atoms have and will
always be in possession of the same properties, be of the same construction and be
made of the same similar internal pmtics and Matters.
Therefore, it is assumed from this point in this book that what we call initial
fundamental plasmas, or what is called neutron, must always be made of the same
composition and of the same specific pmtics at all times, for all such plasmas of all
atoms.
Furthermore, it can be said that all initial fundamental plasmas create the same and
similar plasmatic Magravs forces.
Until contrary to this fact is proven, then it is correct to assume that majority of plasmas
have the same characteristics, the same properties, and have the same dimensions, and
the same measurement of Magravs density and field strength.
Therefore, it is right to assume that the majority of plasmas in the universe are all made
of the same collection of pmtics interactions.
Hence, it is correct to assume that to have plasma of specific characteristics and specific
Magravs strengths; the plasma is made of and must be able to attain a Specific Magnetic
Configurations for all initial fundamental plasmas.
From observation of motion of plasmas in the universe, it is clear that not all packs of
pmtics are connected to a specific source. They are mainly free floating in space and are
36
made of different magnetic fields strength.
Where, some of these pmtics interact with others of the same strength. Which, these
interactions lead to the creation of the plasmatic Magravs, in their space and in respect
to other floating pmtics in their given environments.
Initially, when pmtics of similar strength get close to each other, the interacting fields
get entangled with each other and set-off a new cycle of Magravs in respect to other
pmtics and magnetic fields in their given environment.
Further on as more pmtics of different field strength are gathered together due to their
initial magnetic fields strength the new seeds for creation of new and different Matters
are set to start. Where, the collection of these different Matters and fields and their
interactions leads to the creation of initial fundamental plasma, in a specific given
position in space.
Plasmas are always considered to be made in the same manner, by the same process, by
the collection of the same pmtics force strength and the same interaction procedure of
the fields within their structure.
Hence, plasmas are said to be made of Specific Entangled Plasmatic MAgnetic Fields
(SEPMAF) and this is considered to be the same for composition of all plasmas in
general.
37
CHAPTER 3
The Initial Fundamental Particles of the plasma
The initial fundamental particles components of plasma are considered to be a
collection of weak plasmatic magnetic fields (in short: pmtics) originally existing in
the spans of galaxies.
These are residuals of different plasmatic magnetic fields activities of matters and
Matters, which are released by the interaction of different magnetic fields by/and
through for example processes like fission and fusion within stars and so on. It is
considered that some of these weaker plasmatic magnetic fields are released into the
environment by the nuclear decay of atoms themselves.
Where some of the pmtics (Fig. 4) are continuously created in the denser environments
by the interaction and friction of two or denser or stronger pmtics and some weaker
pmtics are generated through the collision or friction of matters and Matters in the
universe.
Fig. 4: Graphic presentation of plasmatic magnetic fields.
Note: The figure 4 A: represents the collection of plasmatic magnetic fields of different
strength. The figure 4 B: represents a graphical representation of dynamic pmtics in
motion.
The pmtics due to their very weak strength are usually considered to exist and be in
motion in packs within the different parts of universe (Fig. 5). Where, each pack can be
made of number of different orders of magnitude of pmtics strength.
For ease of understanding in trying to explain that how plasmas are created initially, we
will consider three packs of pmtics. Where, for our purposes, each pack of plasmatic
magnetic fields is denoted by one capital letter. Then each strength sub-constituent
magnetic fields forces is number denoted. The different strength fields denoted with
different numbers (Fig. 5).
For simplicity of explanation, we will consider three packs of A, B and C with
constituents of different dynamic pmtics (considering that fields are in motion in their
environment).
Furthermore we consider that each pack of magnetic fields contains five different sets
38
of fields strength called (Pack A) as A1, A2, A3, A4 and A5, (Pack B) as B1, B2, B3,
B4 and B5 and (Pack C) as C1, C2, C3, C4 and C5 respectively (Fig. 5).
Fig. 5: Initial fundamental particles of plastic magnetic fields.
It is important to remember in this section, that when we talk about the gravitational
field forces (Magravs), this means the gravitational fields and the Magnetic fields of
any entity in possession of these magnetic fields, which are generated simultaneously
by the interaction of the same two or more plasmatic magnetic fields.
It is crucial to remember that there cannot be a situation where, there are gravitational
fields and no Magnetic fields within a system and vice-versa. Even where, the Magnetic
field comes to be placed in the boundary of the gravitational field zone.
In principle, the gravitational fields and the Magnetic fields of the plasma are
represented in the same region in our diagram(s), and for simplicity, these are shown
with the doted line and this single line is representing both the Magravs zone of a
Matter.
Creation of Matter of plasma through interaction of pmtics.
Initially considering interactions between, the pack A and the pack B and at least one
pmtics of each pack, which are to match with each other strength of the other pack,
where these two pmtics are allowed to interact and interlock into each other.
Fig. 6: Dynamic plasmatic magnetic fields A1 and B1 making the initial magnetic interaction of
two packs.
39
Note: Only pmtics of similar or near similar pmtics strength can interlock into each
other, where pmtics of different strength are attracted to each other but cannot interlock
in the majority of the cases.
For the pmtics of packs A and B, which are similar or equal in magnetic fields strength,
and they are in motion, and able to interact with each other or to interlock into each
other (Fig. 6 and Fig. 7 a), it is considered that the North Pole of pmtics A1 and the
South Pole of the pmtics B1, (Fig. 7 b) start the attraction of the two pmtics to each
other.
Fig. 7: Interacting plasmatic magnetic fields making pmtics of Matter.
Note: It is considered at all times in the universe all magnetic fields and plasmatic
magnetic fields are in dynamic and in the state of motion, as magnetic fields in essence
are always attracted or interacting with other magnetic entities, thus they are always on
the move towards or repulsing from one magnetic field to another. This is how the
motion of Matters and fields are maintained in the universe. This continuous dynamic
mixture of different magnetic fields strength become part of a localized or universal
pmtic soup(s).
This interaction and interlocking of these pmtics initiates and creates the first step of
interactions between two packs A and B plasmatic magnetic fields (Fig. 7 c). This
interlocking, leads to the creation of the very first initial fundamental magnetic fields
set, or the first initial Magravs, what is called the initial configuration of pmtics needed
for initial seed of the plasma (Fig. 7 d and e).
The interaction of at least one plasmatic magnetic fields of each pack that is initiating,
and starting the initial weak Magravs forces of a Matter of a plasma, this is the first
step for the interlocking of the two packs of A and B, of pmtics forces in respect to each
other.
From this point on, the first plasmatic Magravs force, essential for the seed of the first
Matter of the plasma, is set to start and operate (Fig. 7 e). That is to say, the first
gravitational field (G1 in Fig. 8 B) and the Magnetic field (M1 in Fig. 8 B) forces can
be considered to be created in between these weak pmtics packs.
It is appropriate to consider that the interlocking of the two dynamic fields, due to their
40
interaction and attraction, are bent inward or become overall to be spherical in shape
(Fig. 7e and Fig. 8 A).
Fig. 8: The creation of the seed of the plasma.
For ease of explanation, all the initial plasmatic gravitational fields (Fig. 9 field G1),
and all the plasmatic Magnetic fields (Fig. 9 field M1) from now on in this disclosure
are denoted as G1 fields (Fig. 10), or what we call Magnetic and gravitational fields
or Magravs and considered these to be the seed of the pmtics of the Matter
components’ of the plasma.
Fig. 9: Initial gravitational fields and Magnetic fields (Magravs) of the Matter components of
the plasma.
At the same time, the remaining pmtics in each pack of A and B, due to the dynamism
and Magravs in the vicinity of this seed, these will be kept around the seed G1 as one
dynamic pack SET P1.
The collective Magravs force of the seed of Matter will be known as G1 (Fig. 10) and
the remaining pmtics magnetic fields of Pack A and B as initial set of the Matter
component of the plasma is denote as SET P1 (Fig. 10).
41
Fig. 10: Set P1, the initial pmtics of the Matters Magravs’ components of the plasma.
Note: It has to be remembered that the pmtics in G1 are not produced and connected to
a source of a solid magnet, but these forces were made by magnetic fields and were
detached from their source of creation, some times before, hence, the use of the term
“plasmatic” for these magnetic fields. The term “plasmatic” refers in this book to a
“collection” of dynamic magnetic fields, and not to the state of a plasma in its common
term use, which for example refers to a state of dynamic protons.
Nevertheless, the remaining plasmatic magnetic fields of the two packs A and B are not
matching in strength and hence they cannot lock into each other, these being pmtics
A2, A3, A4, A5, and pmtics B2, B3, B4, B5.
Therefore, the initial dynamic pmtics interaction of the two packs making up the G1,
possessing dynamic Magravs force, become the Matter component’s of the upcoming
plasma.
In the open spaces of the universe, the SET P1 due to its dynamism and motion,
naturally and eventually will come across another pack of pmtics, like the pack C.
The interaction between magnetic fields of the SET P1 and pmtics of the pack C will be
different in respect to the initial interaction of the packs A and B.
In this set of interactions between all the fields and initial Magravs force of the SET P1
and the pack C, several steps can take place instantaneously, simultaneously or over a
length of time.
The first step is that, some of the magnetic fields strength in the pack C (C1, C2, C3, C4
or C5) could be similar to certain magnetic fields strength as in the G1 of the SET P1.
The addition of new plasmatic magnetic fields does not necessarily increase the strength
of the fields of the G1, but it just adds to the density of the compact pmtics in the G1,
and hence increases of the mass of the G1 only.
Creation of the Antimatter of plasma
The second step is that the stronger field of the SET P1 interacts with similar fields as
42
in the pack C and as they are stronger, they would create a much stronger Magravs
strength set. This, leading to the creation of a new Magravs zone, near the initial
Magravs forces of the G1.
Due to its higher pmtics strength, this new Magravs system denoted as the G2 (Fig. 11)
and it would have a separate distinctive characteristic. The new Magravs set possesses a
much stronger field due to its stronger pmtics, which initiated its creation. This new
and stronger Magravs will exert forces on the G1 (Fig. 10), this making the pmtics
constituent of the G1 a denser environment as the seat of the Matter (solid, liquid, gas)
components of the plasma.
Fig. 11: The pmtics of the second Magravs.
Hence, this new interaction of fields creates a separate and stronger Magravs zone G2
(Fig. 13) adjacent to the G1 (Fig. 13) and in the same environmental plasma condition
as G1. This new Magravs G2 (Fig. 11) is independent and interlocked to the initial
Magravs of Matters of G1 but it will not interfere with the operation of the G1.
In fact, the Magravs forces within the G2 (Fig. 12) and its surroundings become the
seed of another Matter in the same environment.
Fig. 12: The Antimatter Pmtics and Antimatter pmtics Magravs.
This new and stronger Magravs force, due to its stronger plasmatic Magravs
interactions and its transparency, become what is known as the Antimatter part of the
43
plasma (Fig. 12 G2).
For clarity, the new stronger magnetic fields interaction between the SET P1 and the
pack C, and creation of the Magravs force of G2 (Fig. 11), becomes part of the SET P2
(Fig. 13).
Where, now this new set includes the G1 the Matter and the G2 the Antimatter and the
remaining pmtics of the three original packs. Where, the weaker Magravs of the G1 and
the stronger Magravs of the G2 co-exist next to each other, and are interlocked to each
other by the original three pmtics fields in the original packs, which they originally
shared (Fig. 13). Through overall Magravs of the two Matters in respect to each other,
these two Matters’ Magravs keep the rest of pmtics of the original three packs together
and around them.
Fig. 13: Set P 2. This set includes pmtics and the Magravs of the Matter, the Antimatter and
residual pmtics of 3 original packs.
This interaction of two different plasmatic Magravs sets of different strengths is similar
to the plasmatic Magravs set forces operating in independent celestial bodies of the
solar systems the like of the Earth and the Sun, where, the Earth can be considered to be
the G1 pmtics Magravs and the Sun the G2 pmtics Magravs of the set.
Creation of the Dark Matter of plasma
The third step of the same interaction of the pack A, B and C pmtics, is from the other
residual fields of these packs. Where some of the residual magnetic fields will generate
a new Magravs force environment, the like of the G3 (Fig. 14). The G3 gravitational
field force is a part of the same set of the same plasma environment as the G1 and the
G2.
This new Magravs force zone of the G3 is created through the same process as the other
44
two Magravs, with a difference that the outward Magravs strength created by G3 are in
magnetic fields strength balance with the overall pmtics strength created by the G1 and
the G2 and other pmtics within the environment of the original three packs of pmtics.
This G3 is independent from the magnetic fields of other two Matters of the plasma. But
these sets overall Magravs are near equal or are in balance, in respect to the pmtics of
the overall enclosure of the plasma and of all the three original packs and the two
gravitational sets of G1 and G2.
Fig. 14: The schematic and pmtics representation of Dark Matter.
Hence, even though this region of the plasma possesses Magravs forces, but it appears
to be void of external magnetic fields, or this region appears to be void of a
magnetosphere. Where, in the interaction of the G3 Magnetic fields with its surrounding
magnetic and Magravs of the G1 and the G2 of the same environment, these fields of
the G3 fail to create a visible and distinguishable magnetosphere for the G3 set with
other magnetic fields in its surrounding environment. Therefore, as there are no
interaction between the overall balance of the Magravs of the G3 with its surrounding
pmtics, thus no visible or may be very little detectable light due to the interaction
magnetic fields of the G3 with its surrounding pmtics are produced, that these could
create light that could make this new gravitational centre to be detectable. Which this
light can confirm the existence of another internal gravitational fields of another Matter
in this region of the plasma.
Even though there would be a gravitational field force in this region of the plasma,
which confirms the existence of another Matter in this region of plasma. However, the
G3, due to the balance external Magravs interaction with other fields around this region
with the lack of stronger external magnetic fields to create more profound detectable
light in comparison to the G1 and the G2 magnetospheres within the plasma, makes this
region around the G3 darker in respect to the rest of the plasma environment (Chapter
7).
Nevertheless, this region possesses pulling field forces or gravitational field forces but
will not be as visible or detectable as the rest of the plasma, or will be darker in
comparison, due to a lack of the stronger magnetospheric interface (Fig. 15 SET P3).
The G3 gravitational field force region, due to its dark appearance, becomes the Dark
Matter component of the plasma (Chapter 14).
45
Fig. 15: Set P3 interactive gravitational fields of a Matter, Antimatter and Dark Matter.
In the past papers (36) and the Dark Matter chapter, Keshe Theory of creation of Dark
Matter considers’ and explains’ that “Matter which possesses both Magravs, but where
the overall Magravs strength are in balance or near balance in respect to its
environments pmtics strength, so much so, that these regions do not create any or create
only a very little magnetospheric visible light zone through the interaction of their
pmtics (Chapter 7), that the Matter cannot become detectable or become visible in
respect to its surrounding environment at specific given time and position, hence the
Matter Magravs magnetosphere appears to be darker in that part of given environment,
hence the term Dark Matter” is used.
These interactions and principles of how Dark Matters are generated have been
explained and discussed in detail in the paper titled “The creation of Black Hole” (13),
“Creation of Dark Matter” (36), “The rings of Saturn” (39) and further in different
following chapters in this book.
We consider the creation and appearance of the Dark Matters, Black Holes, Dark Spots
on the surface of the Sun and Dark sections of the rings of the Saturn, are all to be due
to and through the same fundamental principle of the interaction of equal plasmatic
Magravs strength forces in their given specific environment at a specific duration of
time as in the G3 (13, 14, 17, 18, 24, 36).
Nevertheless, the Magravs forces of the G3 will be interacting with the rest of the
plasma Matter’s field’s forces. The G3 pmtics released partially will feed the plasma’s
of other components of Matters for their motional energy and in keeping the
gravitational field forces of the G1 and the G2 intact and overall to keep the plasma as
one integrated system (Fig. 15).
Creation of the torus field force
The fourth step: Further on in this process of interaction of three original packs of
46
pmtics, and due to the dynamic characteristics of the other three Matters Magravs, soon
some of free pmtics left in the overall initial three packs will come to be positioned in
the centre of three Magravs forces of the G1, the G2 and the G3, and becomes the
interlocking force between the three. The free pmtics become a dynamic swirling
compact of residual of un-matching pmtics field strength and behave as a partial sphere
of rotating magnetic fields forces to be known as the F1 (Fig. 16) part of the plasma.
Fig. 16: The spherical torus field force.
These free F1 pmtics, due to not being able to find equal magnetic fields strength
partners to establish themselves as a Matter condition phenomenon, this portion of the
interacting fields become void of central gravitational field forces.
As the G1, the G2 and the G3 are in continuous motion, and as these three Matters lose
their energies and momentums, due to their long-term dynamic activities, they come
close to this inner field force region of the F1 and in contact with its pmtics forces. This
is the point where, the three Matters of plasma gain momentum from their interactions
and encounter with the dynamic magnetic fields forces of the F1 (Fig. 17).
This dynamic pmtics region in between three dynamic Matters can be compared to an
empty spherical torus shaped field force effect (F1) (Fig. 17), as the field forces turn
inwards, without any central gravitational field forces strength, and without any
matching pmtics to generate any viable internal gravitational field force for the creation
of any Magravs to lead to the creation of any Matter types.
In practice, the conversion of the pmtics of the F1 into energy, partially allows the
balanced dynamism of the whole plasma to be maintained.
Fig. 17: Spherical torus shaped pmtics made by interaction of different strength residual pmtics
of the three original packs.
F1’s are considered as a natural process and phenomenon in the plasma and in the
47
universe, with the content of larger order of magnitude difference in pmtics strength in
their constituents.
This dynamic spherical magnetic fields force region of the F1 in plasma or in space,
void of central gravitational field forces, is commonly called a Wormhole, and its
operation of its field’s forces in motion as Wormhole effect.
It has been hypothesized in the past by scientists that such a Wormhole can be used for
inter-space travel with extreme speeds of motions near the speed of light.
We consider that these dynamic magnetic fields regions can be used to increase the
speed of any object, which comes in touch with their dynamic magnetic fields. In fact
the fast journey of the object through the F1, will not necessarily lead the Matter to
anywhere rather than giving a turbulent fast ride within the structure of the plasma.
In case of wormhole in a galaxy, the object will have a fast speed travel without much
control in speed and dictating the point of final destination of where the object might
end up.
These are points in space that acceleration for motion for other Matters of the plasma or
physical matters can be obtained, by using the dynamic pmtics forces of the F1 in
plasma or space, where these forces happen to exist. Finding these points in space are
much easier than ever thought before (Future publication).
Initial structure of Matters of plasma
Fig. 18: Set of interaction between the three Matters and the F1.
Even though each of the three Matters are separate and operates independently from
other Matters within the plasma, it is possible that from time to time the magnetospheric
48
envelop of each Matter comes in touch with other magnetospheres of Matters of the
plasma and creates a common interface in the region for the window of time of the
interaction (Fig. 18 shaded areas).
It is important to note that plasmas can possess several G3’s and F1’s of different
pmtics strengths in its overall entity for some time, individually or simultaneously, at
different time in its life cycle.
Transition-zone pmtics
The new overall interaction of all three Matters and all fields of all pmtics of all three
Packs, as one entity, leads to the creation of the initial Matters and Forces of the plasma
(Fig. 19).
At this point, there could be other pmtics of the three original packs within the structure
of plasma that could not link or be part of the components of the three Matters and the
F1, these free leftover pmtics literally float in the plasma and over time, they become
the feeding pmtics for one Matter or another and the interlocking magnetic fields forces
of part of the other Matters of the plasma.
These loose pmtics in-between interfaces of Matters are the dynamic plasmatic
magnetic fields transition zones, which we call “the energy transition zones” (Fig. 20,
the field arrows), in the overall structure of plasma. The magnetic fields in these
intervening gaps among the Matters are fields that are mutually shared by all Matters in
the plasma, when there pmtics strength comes to their level; these residual pmtics are
considered more as a mixture of magnetic rays than pmtics.
Fig. 19: Initial Matters and forces of the envelope of plasma.
They are in the plasma, like intermediating or interface zones in between two or more
49
Matters of the plasma at the same time.
Now that all the plasmatic magnetic fields of the three original packs are considered and
counted for and used up, now we consider that the full set of the G1, the G2 and the G3,
loose pmtics in the transition zones and F1, create an overall integrated independent
Magnetic field and gravitational field of their own to keep the integrate of all pmtics of
the three Packs A, B and C, together as on entity. Where this new entity becomes to be
known as the “Initial Fundamental Plasma”.
Initial Fundamental Plasma
Fig. 20: Keshe Model of the Initial fundamental plasma.
I call this dynamic concept the Keshe Model of “The Universal order of creation of
Matter”.
We consider the Initial Fundamental Plasma to be similar to the construction of the
Neutron (Fig. 20).
Figure 21 gives the conceptual presentation of complete plasmatic magnetic fields of
plasma, of “The universal order of creation of Matters”. This model represents the
pmtics structure of the Initial Fundamental Plasma, where the G1 is the Magravs of
Matter, the G2 is the Magravs of the Antimatter and the G3 is the Magravs of the Dark
Matter.
It is considered that Initial Fundamental Plasmas always have an internally balanced
magnetic fields environment, as one observes in the plasma as in the solar systems.
50
Fig. 21: Keshe Model of the pmtics of Matters of plasma.
At the same time initial fundamental plasma maintains an overall and external Magravs
created by Matters and all pmtics, which are within the confine of the plasma too. Thus
the internal balance magnetic fields of the neutron does not mean that it does not
possess Magravs in respect to its outside environment. But due to the existence of
Magravs of its component structure the initial fundamental plasma maintains an
independent magnetosphere in respect to its surrounding environment.
When, contemplating on discussing about the proton or the neutron as a plasma, one has
to talk about the whole of the plasmas’ components, namely, the Matter part (what has
been considered as the matter part of the nucleus of the atom), the Antimatter part, the
Dark Matter part, the spherical torus magnetic fields and the transition magnetic fields
parts. These are all together the components of one plasma and have to be considered
as one package and entity.
There cannot be a plasma condition, where all three Matters do not participate in the
existence of the plasma.
Decay of initial fundamental plasma
At the point in the cycle of the life of an initial fundamental plasma, when the shared
magnetic fields of the transition zones, or pmtics of one of the Matters of plasma are
partly exhausted and the Magravs balance among or in the Matter fields are disturbed
and the Magravs binding forces are unbalanced, then the initial fundamental plasma
disintegrates to its substructure of new balanced Magravs of the same Matters for the
initial fundamental plasma to find a new balanced combination within its own Matters
and fields within their given environment.
51
This process of splitting of the initial fundamental plasma to find new and smaller
balanced plasmas for Magravs of Matters and fields balance, I call this process the
decay of the Initial fundamental plasma.
The decay of the initial fundamental plasma always leads to the creation of at least two
new balanced and smaller initial plasmatic magnetic fields plasmas of the same
configuration, with, one plasma which possess more of the Matters and is larger, and
one plasma which is a smaller and holds less of the Matters and pmtics of the original
initial fundamental plasma. Nevertheless, the two new plasmas and their contents have
to keep the overall balanced structure of the initial fundamental plasma. This happens so
that both plasmas can survive within their environment as one entity.
The outcome of the decay of the initial fundamental plasma into two new components
is considered to become the creator of the new proton and the electron of an atom. This
new balanced pmtics entity, or so-called atom; itself has to have an overall balanced
Magravs forces operating within it, for the atom to keep the integrity of the original
initial fundamental plasma.
The decay of the initial fundamental plasma leads to the splitting of its content into a
proton and an electron simultaneously (Fig. 46 diagrams 1 to 8). Nevertheless, at the
same time as the new plasmas’ component reposition and rebalance during this process
of decay, this leads to the release of some residual pmtics or magnetic fields, which are
not needed for or by the two new entities for their respective parts of their Magravs
positioning (Chapter 18).
The release of the unwanted fields for the balance interaction between the two new
plasmas, leads to the release of the magnetic fields packs as different rays or energies
from the splitting of the initial fundamental plasma. This release can be in any form like
a mixture of rays, pmtics, sound energy packs and so on.
I consider this process of the decay of the initial fundamental plasma of the contents of
its three Matters and fields to be a new fundamental universal principle, where in larger
scales of order of magnitude; it is called the nuclear decay of atoms.
In science at the present, scientists consider that elementary particles are quarks and so
on, but now we know that quarks themselves are further made-up of basic magnetic
fields and their interactions. Where, collections of magnetic fields in a group, as
dynamic plasmatic magnetic fields, and their interactions with other dynamic plasmatic
magnetic fields, leads to the creation of the Matter(s). Where, the mass of the “quark” is
produced by the interaction of these plasmatic magnetic fields through the principle of
the creation of gravity as has been explained in Chapter 1.
Secondly, what is at the present called the spin of the quarks now we understand is the
natural dynamic motion of the Matters created in the plasmas’ environment, through the
interaction and Magravs positioning of the dynamic Matters of the plasma.
Thirdly, what is considered by the present science, as the colours of the quarks, are in
reality the different contents, of different plasmatic magnetic fields strength interactions
leading to the creation of gravity and Magnetic fields with their overall interaction
52
effect in respect to their environment pmtics, which leads to the creation of the
magnetosphere of each Matter of the plasma, these being the magnetosphere of the
Matter, the Dark Matter and the Antimatter in the magnetic environment of the plasma
or the neutron, the proton or the electron.
This means that the quark cannot be considered as an “elementary particle” as it has
sub-components and is made of magnetic fields itself.
Thus, I consider the new “elementary particle” to be of the “magnetic fields” origin,
which this itself explains why one sees all sorts of effects, like the present quarks,
bosons and the spin of the dynamic Matters of the plasma, and so forth. Where, these all
can now simply be explained as being due to the interaction of different magnetic fields
strengths, which makes up the structure of the Matters of the plasma and the other
magnetic fields, which are within the structure of the plasma.
Even in the largest scale, this initial fundamental plasma decay model is what
cosmologists see in the galaxies as the collapse of stars (which the star is and can be
considered to be the initial fundamental plasma) and its re-emergence as new smaller
components of star or solar systems. By the same principle, the release of energies for
the star to find its new balance through its star decay always leads to releases of vast
amounts of unwanted matters, Matters and energies and creation of sub-components but
still with its Magravs forces.
This decay of initial fundamental plasma is discussed in more detail in Chapter 15.
53
CHAPTER 4
Matters’ of plasma and their transition of states
There is conclusive evidence to show that plasma possesses energy, and maintains
specific magnetic behaviour, and that plasmas can and do generate their own Magnetic
fields and gravitational field forces.
Research done by a number of institutes around the world indicates that the plasma of
Matter is accompanied by a second Matter constituent called the Antimatter. Some
institutes (6, 7, 8) claim that they have separated and have managed to contain the
Antimatter.
In other sections of science, scientists refer to what is called the Dark Matter, and
observations of virtual matters.
The world of science has failed to consider the creation of all these three states’ of
Matters (Matter, Antimatter and Dark Matter) as constituents, and as of one process, in
the chain of initial progressive process of creation of the three Matters and as the
content of one plasma in the universe.
This failure has been due to the lack of understanding that the Matter, the Antimatter
and the Dark Matter components of plasmas are all created simultaneously and as one
integrated dynamic plasmatic magnetic entity.
It is fundamental to understand that one of these Matters’ does not exist without the
others within the overall structure of the plasma. Then through this process, it becomes
easier to understand the operation of Matters, matter and fields, plasmas, atoms,
molecules, solar systems and galaxies.
One can now translate this new understanding of how plasmas are created and operate
into how larger celestial objects are created, and operate in their given environment
collectively. In other words, we translate the knowledge of the operation of electrons
around the nucleus to the operation of planets around their stars.
To understand the relationship and construction of the plasma with more clarity, every
effort in this book have been made to go through stage by stage, how Matters of
plasmas are considered to be connected, and appear to inter-transit from one state of
Matter to another within different environments without loss or gain of any of their
plasmatic magnetic fields strength.
In the matter world this is like the inter-change between states of matters, from solid-toliquid,
liquid-to-gas, and vise-versa.
Where in the matter world the state-of-matter is magnetic fields’ forces dependent, and
in the state-of-Matter it is magnetic fields’ strength dependent.
54
The phenomenon of transition from one state of Matter to another is a regular
occurrence in dynamic pmtics processes in the spans of the universe (Fig. 21).
All components of Matters of the plasma or any Matter or matters in the universe are
connected to each other through the interaction of their pmtics, and their pmtics
strength, which are the constituent and the creator of their Magravs.
Thus, as each Matter gains or losses some of its pmtics, one Matter component of the
plasma will become or can become the component of another Matter of another plasma
or field at “a given point in motion of pmtics” (time) and at a given point in its space.
For example, Matters of plasma can interchange from one Matter to another due to their
motion of dynamic pmtics or what is called energy levels changes in respect to a given
environment pmtics strength.
All Matters can appear as different Matter by just changes of the environmental pmtics
strength too. For example the same plasma or Matter by just passing through another
region of different pmtics strength. This is the process what we call transmutation, but
in this case the transmutation is done by the environmental condition and not by the
internal Matter pmtics strength change.
Matter can appear as different Matter, for example Dark Matter can appears as Matter
by simply entering into a new pmtics environmental condition. This is how Dark Matter
suddenly appears as virtual matter.
For example, Dark Matter in a given environment of plasmatic magnetic fields
strength by entering into a new and stronger or weaker pmtics strength configuration,
instantaneously, becomes visible Matter in respect to its newly entered environment
(Dark Matter to Virtual matter). I call this the phase of transmutation of Matter(s), so
this is the unveiling or occurrence of a new state of Matter from the same old Matter in
a different outfit.
Secondly, Matters can change their status and behaviour from Matter to another for
example from Dark Matter to Antimatter or Matter, by simply gaining from or losing to
a part of their plasmatic magnetic fields strength to other Matter(s) or pmtics in respect
to their given environment.
If Antimatter Magravs strength reaches an environment pmtics strength that its overall
Magravs strength becomes equal and in balance with its new environment pmtics
strength level, then the Antimatter can become and behave as the Dark Matter entity in
respect to its new given environment (Fig. 22).
On the other hand, for example as the pmtics strength of the components of Antimatter
reduces or as Antimatters interact with other Antimatters of different Magravs strength,
these Antimatters lose enough of their Magravs strength that one or both Antimatters
come to a new balance of plasmatic magnetic fields strength. Where, these balances can
be in their internal and external Magravs, then these Antimatters Magravs strength can
55
come to a level that the new strength of the former Antimatter become to be in the
pmtics strength level of the Matter, or change to the Dark Matter field strength level
status in respect to the same environmental condition.
Fig. 22: Schematic Keshe model of interconnection relation between different states of Matters.
This is what we call the Keshe Theory and principle of the transition of Matters, that
is to say “the transition from the Matter to the Antimatter or the Dark Matter and in
reverse, and the transition of the Dark Matter to the Antimatter and in reverse, is a
normal condition of transition of the Matters” (Fig. 22 and Fig. 23). These figures
showing in a simple and new way how and the connections by which interchange(s)
between the states of Matters in the universe are achieved.
Keshe principle of transition of the Matter states’ that, “the plasmatic magnetic fields
strength of the environment in which the Matters operate in, dictates what the Matter
appears as or presents itself as, in that given environment” or on the other hand “when
one Matter gains or losses enough of its plasmatic magnetic fields strength that the
Matter Status, characteristic or behaviour becomes of other Matters of the plasma status
and behaviour or characteristics within the same given environment”.
Therefore, Matters can change from one Matter to another by increase or decrease in
their pmtics strength or they can appear as different Matter as they enter different
plasmatic strength environment and conditions.
That is to say, the Matter can become to have the characteristic of the Dark Matter in a
given environment pmtics strength, and by the same measure, the Antimatter can lose
enough of its pmtics to become Matter, and so one. The schematic transitions of state of
56
the Matters are shown in figure 22 and figure 23 of the Keshe model of transition of
Matters.
Fig. 23: Keshe universal Model of the plasma transition of plasmatic magnetic fields and
Matters.
With the use of simple pmtics plasma dilution reactors, which have been developed by
Keshe Foundation through its Keshe Technology development sector, the principle of
transition of Matters have been tested and results have proven to be in line with the
theoretical consideration.
Where, in these nuclear-based reactors, Matters can be allowed to go from one state of
Matter to another and then allowed to return to their original state of Matter. This new
method of transition of Matters brings about a new way and technology of producing all
man’s material needs for motion, energy, creation of new matters and so on.
For example, effects and properties of transition of Matters (Fig. 23) can be used to
make physical Matter to have no magnetospheric boundary as Dark Matters do in a
given environment, so that the Matter behaves like the Dark Matter in characteristics. In
these environments, the Matter will become translucent dark or the centre core behaves
as becoming invisible in respect to its surrounding environment, without any change in
the property of the physical Matter or change in its gravitational field strength or
position in space of the Matter.
As the Matter with this property presents no effective magnetospheric condition in
respect to its surrounding environment due to the lack of /or little interaction between
the pmtics of the Matter and its environment, then the Matter now can behave as Dark
57
Matter and move without friction and freely within the same environment.
Utilizing this state of the Dark Matter effects around an aircraft or spacecraft, this
condition will give the craft frictionless motion and higher speeds and possible
invisibility in the same environment (Chapters 13).
The technology of transition of Matters has been tested-out over years by the Keshe
Foundation, and several systems were designed, developed and manufactured and used
to achieve the formation of original magnetic fields plasmas to prove the correctness of
these principles, and indeed the effect of transition of Matters were proven to be correct.
The implication and application of the use of transition of the states of Matters are so
immense and profound, that one needs to know, for example, where the Matter will
end-up in, and in what state of Matter in respect to its environment, one will appear as.
That is to say, one has to know if for example, going from Matter to Antimatter, where
in the strength fields of Antimatter, one will end-up in. Vice-versa, when one can go
from Dark Matter into a Matter condition zone, one has to know in what state of matter
(gas, solid, and liquid) one will come to ends up in.
Through the operation and control of these reactors, one needs to know where the
system state of matter and magnetic condition will end-up. This could be in liquid seas,
or in the middle of a solid Matter or in the middle of deserts. Without being prepared for
these parameters through the operation of systems, which can facilitate such a transition
behaviour and characteristic, the use of Matter transition can have catastrophic
consequence, not only for the system, which produces it, but also for the occupants of
possible crafts using this type of transportation in the spans of the universe.
By the understanding of the principles of creation of the initial fundamental Matters
within the initial fundamental plasma, through the interaction of the initial fundamental
particles, a number of unanswered questions in the world of science can be answered.
For example, in the universe the total quantity of plasmatic magnetic fields and the
related energies are to be considered constant. Therefore, in the totality, no matter,
Matters or magnetic fields will ever be lost or gained in the universe. Pmtics of different
strength start existence at one strength level and they consolidate to become stronger, or
lose their field strength through division and collision to become weaker in strength.
Nevertheless, pmtics in their different strength fields can never be destroyed or lost.
Therefore, pmtics simply interact, divide, and interlock to produce different Matters and
conditions like forces, motions, heat and compactness for them to be matters to be
visible to the eye of creatures, according to their positions, and so on.
Pmtics in their interactions with others of the same can only move from one state of
Matter to another depending upon the condition(s), which prevails at a given point in a
given time in space. Thus, the Matter can go from the Dark Matter to the Antimatter and
vice-versa, and the Matters to the Dark Matters and vice-versa and so on.
58
Therefore, the theory and the discussion that universe one day will run out of matters
and energy and then there will be nothing as has been promoted by some scientists in
the recent past is anything but a fallacy.
By the same principle, we call the pmtics in motion as the energy of the pmtics. These
pmtics in motion can release and can lead to creation of the same Matters as they were
created-out of, and can have the same capability. That is to say, for example, the energy
of the Dark Matter can change into energy of Matter, or part of the matter, and the same
applies for other states of Matters.
In understanding, the principles of “the universal order of creation of Matters”, one
can utilise the transition of states of Matters and matters to take full advantage of
universal Matters and matters pmtics and their energies.
Through the permanent interaction of all dynamic pmtics of different scales of strength,
there will be no end to the universe, as the universe moves through its different pmtics
strengths field interactions and repulsions. Where, these will lead to eternal motion of
the universal pmtics forces and creation of new Matters, matters, forces and new
condition for them to cooperate within the universe. Thus, there never has been a Big
Bang and there will never be a doomsday scenario for the universe as a whole, the
universe will be forever in equilibrium in its overall universal order of pmtics.
The pmtics of Matters will transit from one state of Matter (Matter, Dark Matter, and
Antimatter) to another state of Matter. In addition, from one state of matter (solid,
liquid, gas) to another state of matter.
Where, these changes will depend on the properties and forces of the states of plasmatic
Magravs and their strength in respect to each other. Similarly, pmtics from strength of
fields of Matter will transit to pmtics of different pmtics strength of Matter, in these
processes of transition, plasma releasing dynamic pmtics in motion as energy.
The real size of the universe will never change; that is to say, the universe cannot
expand into a space if the space for its expansion was not there to begin with. Where,
from our point of view we only observe a small fraction of the whole, which we observe
that fraction expanding. The observed expansion is relative to the position of the
observer in respect to a given position in the universe, for example what will be a red
shift observation of one at one end of the universe, this will be blue shift to an observer
on the opposite direction of the motion of the same entity. In the paper titled “Creation
of magnetic fields” it has been explained that the blue shift of light is created when
pmtics are compressed, and the red shift is created when the pmtics move away from
each other, or when pmtics are opened up.
In the real world of the universal order of creation there is no room for the principle of
singularity. Except, if, we would call, a large pmtics, that covered the whole of the
universe singularly by itself. Then all that has happened, is that the original single
plasma has gradually disintegrated to smaller and weaker strength fields, which their
interaction has lead to the creation of what has been seen and is in the present in the
short time of the life of man on the Earth. Then, such original singular plasma, which
59
covered the whole of the universe, had to gradually to disintegrate to smaller strength
fields, which their interactions have lead to the creation of all events, Matters and
matters in the Universe.
The transition of state of Matters principles will be discussed in full in future
disclosures.
60
CHAPTER 5
Definition of Energy Through pmtics
The initial components and construction of plasma are due to the existence of initial
dynamic plasmatic magnetic fields.
For a magnetic field to be able to be detected or its existence to be confirmed, the
pmtics has to leave the confines of the boundaries of its containments, this being the
boundary of Magravs of the Matter or the plasma.
It is important to keep in mind that the pmtics do not possess or show field force unless
they are in motion.
The energy possessed by a plasma can be define as “the total plasmatic magnetic fields
forces of all its constituent Matters and fields in motion, in respect to the original
position of the plasma in a full three hundred and sixty degree spherical direction’’.
This is an important factor, as up to this point, scientists have measured and calculated
the energy of the Matter component of the Matters of the plasma. Where, in calculating
the true energy of the plasma, one has to calculate the energy of all Matters (Matter,
Antimatter and Dark Matter) and the other components of the dynamic plasma.
When the magnetic field has left the Matters’ or the plasmas’ boundary, at this point its
existence and the content of the pmtics strength of all Matters pmtics’ released can then
be confirmed as energy. This is shown in (Fig. 24), the magnetic fields in the Matters.
The pmtics constituent constructions of individuals Matters of plasma are not energies
in respect to other Matters while they are within the boundary of the plasmas Magravs’
forces. These are shown as the magnetic fields inside the Matters on the left of image
(Fig. 24) but are only forces (these being the like of Magnetic field or gravitational field
forces) in respect to other Matters and pmtics.
When the field leaves the environment of its Matter or the plasma, it is at this point that
it can release its domain pmtics to other plasmas in regions or combinations of field
interaction zones. These are shown as field forces A at the boundary of the plasma in
figure 24.
As the plasmatic magnetic fields, moves further from its original plasmas’ boundary
(field B in Fig. 24), the plasmatic magnetic fields uses’ its energy to overcome other
Magravs in its environment. Hence, as the plasmatic magnetic fields moves further
away from its mother plasma, the less energy it will have to transfer to other plasmas as
it comes into contact with their pmtics.
Thus, energy transfers from one Matter to another Matter through one pmtics strength
and the measure of the pmtics possessed at the point of the contact with the second
Matter, this is position and distance dependent, from the point of departure to the point
61
of arrival.
Fig. 24: Schematic presentation of relationship of pmtics and energy in respect to their Matters.
The total Energy released by the Matter or plasma is the total of pmtics forces that the
plasma can release and transfer, and that and what measure of the pmtics can be
absorbed by all components of other plasmas in its environment.
62
That is to say, the same proportion of magnetic fields forces by Matter, Antimatter and
Dark Matter and other fields of plasma are released and the same proportion of all
energy fields are transferred to the all recipient plasmas and Matters and pmtics.
The total energy of Matter is said to be the total pmtics that Matter can release as it
disentangles all the components of its initial fundamental magnetic fields, or what is
known as its’ “initial fundamental particles”, which the plasma and of the Matters of
plasma were made up of, at the point of their inception.
Thus energies released by the plasma or the total energy possessed by the plasma is in
fact, the total collection of initial fundamental magnetic fields of all the component
constituents of the plasma, which disentangles from their Matters or plasmas and are in
motion in the direction of the encountering other pmtics components.
Pmtics absorbed by some plasma’s can be only a part of the total pmtics in motion, or
energies that have been released by the initial fundamental plasma, and are not
necessarily considered to be the total energies that a plasma possessed or has released.
Energies released by plasma are said to be “the total initial fundamental pmtics
released by all components of that plasma” passing its Magravs boundary.
Multi-plasma atoms’ release more plasmatic magnetic fields, due to their total sum of
the plasmatic magnetic fields released by all their participating plasmas (protons plus
neutrons, and electrons).
The principles of creation of Magravs forces, gives us an insight that “energy” can
simply be defined as “pmtics, once released, through the dynamic Magravs
characteristic boundary from the plasma or Matters, that these released pmtics can exert
or pass a part of their released pmtics to another plasma, for the new Matter or plasma
to maintain its existence and/or maintain constant normal magnetic fields strength
and/or increase its magnetic density of the same pmtics strength condition to their
ground base levels, in their given environment” (Fig. 24).
Measure of a mass
One of the central unsolved questions in the world of physics is how the mass of the
Matters or of matters are created, and how they can be calculated.
Through the Keshe theory of Mass, the creation and the measure of the mass of an
entity can be defined to be:
“Due to the interaction of at least two magnetic rays, magnetic fields, or plasmatic
magnetic fields, which the outcome of their interactions leads to and creates two field
forces of a pulling field forces called the gravitational fields force and a pushing field
force called Magnetic fields force, whereby the interaction of the gravitational and the
Magnetic field forces with each other, this interaction of two field leads to the creation
of a given magnetic fields strength balance between the two field forces, where, the
63
measure of the magnetic fields difference of the interaction of these two field forces of
the gravitational and the Magnetic field forces, is the measure of the Mass of the entity
which the two original magnetic fields have created.”
The outcome of the interaction of the fields balance is creation of the mass of the
Matter, components’ of the plasma (Fig. 25), or mass of the matter (solid, liquid or gas).
Fig. 25: Mass
That is to say by the Keshe law of measure of the mass of any entity, this being Matter,
plasma, atom, matter, planet, star, etc states that:
“ Mass of any entity =
Measure of the total gravitational fields strength forces of the entity
- (minus)
Measure of the total Magnetic fields strength forces of the entity”
Through this definition and understanding it becomes clear that the gravitational field
forces are always predominate and stronger as all entities possess mass, otherwise their
mass would be negative.
64
Thus mass is the measure of the difference between two or more magnetic fields after
their interaction, and NOT the measure of strength before interaction.
Where, the measure of the magnetic fields before interaction is their “forces” of their
fields, and after the interaction of the magnetic fields the outcome of the balance
between the gravitational and Magnetic fields that is generated, becomes the mass in
respect to a given fixed position of the central Magravs.
The creation of Magravs always is accompanied by the creation of a Magnetosphere
and the creation of the mass of any entity in the universe, and all these four forces are
created instantaneously and simultaneously.
That is to say, “the Initial Fundamental four forces of existence of an entity that are,
the Magnetic fields, the Gravitational fields, the Magnetosphere field and the Mass
field forces, are all the outcome of the interaction and interlocking of two or more
mainly matching in strength magnetic fields or plasmatic magnetic fields, irrespective of
the size of the entity, this being Matter, matter, an atom or a star.
This is the reason why the mass of any object, which is created by any two magnetic
fields strength, is independent of any external forces and factors, like gravitational
fields forces of other objects or entities. The instance the two magnetic rays or magnetic
fields interlock, to generate the first Gravitational fields as an entity, at that moment the
span of the Magravs of the two fields forces involved in the original fields are not as
individual fields, but they become an independent entity in respect to their
environments’ fields forces. That is the reason why the Mass of any entity, like the
Matters, are constant and independent and irrespective of the environmental Magravs
forces which the entity exists and operates within.
That is the reason why the Mass of spacecrafts of the future, or the Mass of planets like
the Earth are independent of their environmental conditions. That is to say, the strength
of the interaction of the two original magnetic fields and the span of the fields they
produces that created the Magravs decide how much mass the interaction of the two
fields will carry and no other factors.
This is the reason why, Man will be able to make crafts that can carry any payload by
the use of Grapos nuclear reactors Magravs strength, as the payload of these systems
and the strength of Magravs that these systems generate, creates independent
environment Magravs forces as long as the boundary of the magnetosphere of the
Grapos can cover the physical boundary of these crafts. Figure 25, in its design,
explains’ this concept fully. That is why the two magnetic fields have to be equal in
strength before they can create the initial four field forces.
If two unequal magnetic fields in strength interact, the two create the gravitational, the
Magnetic, the magnetosphere and the Mass, and the lowest strength field, which
dictates the maximum level of the strength of the four fields that the Matter can have.
The stronger magnetic field residuals of these types of unequal magnetic field strength
encounters and creation of matters become the tail magnetic field of the entity, and
65
this tail is the cause of the creation of the coiling effect of these kinds of masses. Where
and if the two unequal magnetic fields strength cannot create a mass, the same
interaction leads to the creation of the coiling of the two fields and to what is known as
the coiling of the magnetic fields, this effect is partially the cause of the swirling of the
F1 torus field zones in the plasmas, and its larger counterpart, the rotation of
Wormholes, as these regions in the universe are created out of unbalance Magnetic field
strength interactions and interlocking, this be it in the plasma or in the universe. In so
many ways in knowing the strength of two magnetic rays, magnetic fields, plasmatic
magnetic fields and so on, which are about to interact and to create the initial Magnetic
and gravitational fields of an entity, one can tell what would be the outcome measure of
the mass of the entity they will create.
Einstein has related the mass of matter to its energy through the general equation of
relativity.
As explained above, the mass of an atom or plasma itself is made of a collection of
dense pmtics strength and their interaction with each other.
Thus initial fundamental plasmas always have the same mass irrespective of the
Magravs of their environment.
By the same measure, the Atoms of the same elements are always made of the same
number of initial plasmatic magnetic field’s sub-components, of neutrons, protons and
electrons.
Atoms of the same elements always have the same total plasmatic magnetic
gravitational fields pull and Magnetic field push in respect to all their internal
components, irrespective of the environmental plasmatic Magravs that the atoms might
be in. This becomes the total mass of an atom, as mass is an expression of measurement
of the total enclosed pmtics interaction within the fields of confinement of the plasma.
In considering the general equation of relativity
E = m . c²
The energy for the mass of Matters of the plasma, accordingly will be
E = m(M) . c²
That is to say “the total pmtics released in motion by the Matter of plasma (once they
have left the boundary of the plasma) (Energy), is equal to, the total balance after
interacting pmtics strength of the Matter components of the plasma (Mass) which the
plasma is made of, multiplied by the square of the maximum speed that pmtics can
travel in the matter environment (speed of light)”.
Considering that, pmtics of different strength can travel different distance from their
point of release with different speeds in different Matters, Matter and matter mediums.
Then it is correct to say that the pmtics of the Matter, once it has left the Matter
66
Magravs of the plasma, this pmtics of the Matter will travel with a different speed than
the plasmatic magnetic fields of the Antimatter of the same plasma, or be it the pmtics
of the Dark Matter component of the same plasma, in the matter environment.
The Antimatter has and is made of different pmtics strengths, by virtue that it has been
created initially by stronger fields, then its speed will be different and higher than that
of the pmtics of its Matter component of the same plasma in the same environment.
By the same principle, the faster field of the Antimatter carry more energy or more
powerful energies than the slower pmtics in motion of the Matter component of the
same of plasma.
Alternatively, in reverse, as the Antimatter possesses more power or energy than the
Matter, then for the same volume of Antimatter as Matter in the plasma; the Antimatter
pmtics must move faster than the pmtics’ of the Matter, in the matter medium.
The Fermi National Accelerator Laboratory – or Fermilab, in USA (6, 7) – considers a
small amount of the Antimatter, once released from the Matter of plasma; it can deliver
more energy than its Matter parts of the same plasma. They are considering and
working on the principle as; they can burn the Antimatter to release its energy so that by
the time the Antimatter reaches the state of matter energy, that they can harvest its
surpluses energy.
Through the Keshe principle of conversion of energy, the fundamental universal
conversion principle follows the path that the Matters convert to matters through their
dynamic pmtics in motion and forces, or what is refer to as the energy of the Matter
magnetic fields forces, as these energies are transferred to the constituent pmtics’
of matter.
From what I call “The fundamental universal conversion principle” follows that “the
pmtics of the Matters’ like of Antimatter slow down, through interaction with other
magnetic fields, so that their energy can be absorbed and converted to Matters’ pmtics
strength levels, that become useable in matter environment and appears as the matter
(solid, liquid and gas)”.
By the same principle, the matter can be converted to Antimatter through the same
method in reverse. Where, these processes are not much different for both paths of
conversions.
Only the state of pmtics strength and the effects of the environment, which dominates at
a given point and at a given motional position (time), that will dictate what state the
dynamic pmtics in which the state of Matters, the matter manifest itself as, and what
matter will appears in the line of sight by given tools of detection at a given point in the
universe. This dictates if pmtics strength will appear in state of matter as solid, liquid or
gas, or will manifest itself in one of the state of Matters, as Matter, Dark Matter or
Antimatter.
67
CHAPTER 6
The total energy balance equation of Plasma
The energy balance equation or general equation of relativity (E = m.c²) gives the
relation between the tangible part of Matter of the plasma and its constituent energy.
The mass of an atom or collection of plasmas of its components, themselves are made
of a collection of densities of pmtics strength of different Matters and their interactions,
in respect to each other within their respective initial fundamental plasma.
Fig. 26: Schematic of the fields of all components and of the initial fundamental plasma.
In considering the plasma, the general equation of relativity can be written in its real
terms of its constituent components and their interactions and effects. Thus, this
equation as has been said can be defined in respect to the Matter components of the
plasma in the following manner.
That is to say “the total pmtics released in motion by the Matter of the plasma (once
they have left the boundary of the plasma) (Energy), is equal to, the total balance after
interacting pmtics strength of the Matter components of the plasma (Mass) which the
plasma is made of, multiplied by the square of the maximum speed that pmtics can
68
travel in the matter environment (speed of light)”.
Knowing the new composition of the plasma, then the total energy of the plasma has to
be in its totality of all its masses of all its Matters and not just its Matter component.
Therefore:
K (the total energy of plasma) = [energy of the Matter + energy of the Antimatter +
energy of the Dark Matter + energy of the spherical torus-shaped field force effect +
the energy in the inter binding between the other parts in the transition zones of the
plasma].
K= [E (Matter) + E (Antimatter) + E (Dark Matter) + Ecf (centre spherical torus pmtics) - Etr (pmtics within transition zones)].
Where, total general equation of relativity for the whole of the components of the
plasma can be written in the following form.
K = EM + EAm + EDm + Ecf + Etr
Or:
K = [(The total components of constituent pmtics of the Matter) x (the square of the
speed of pmtics in the Matter medium or the speed of light) + (The total components
of constituent pmtics of the Antimatter) x (the square of the speed of pmtics of the
Antimatter in the Antimatter medium) + (The total components of constituent pmtics of
the Dark Matter) x (the square of the speed of pmtics of the Dark Matter in the Dark
Matter medium) + The total energy components of constituent pmtics of spherical
torus-shaped field force effect + The total components of constituent pmtics of the inter
binding between the four other parts in the transition zones of the plasma].
K=M (M) . c²(M) + M (Am) . c² (Am) + M (Dm) . c² (Dm) + E(cf) + E(tr)
Note: Capital M indicates here a mass of Matter.
When for example an apple is measured using the present measuring tools and methods,
the figure attained is only for the mass or the weight of the Matter part of all the
plasmas’ of atoms of the whole apple.
As a representation, one initial plasma of an atom in the whole construction of an apple
with it’s Matter, Antimatter, Dark Matter, and other pmtics are shown on the right hand
side picture of figure 28. Where, the tangible apple as matter represents the total Matter
components of all the pmtics of an apple is shown on the left picture of figure 28.
69
Fig. 27: The pmtics of all components and of initial fundamental plasma.
The total weight or mass of the plasma has to be the total weight and the total mass of
all the components pmtics and all of all the plasmas of Matters of the initial
fundamental plasma.
Fig. 28: Newton’s apple has different types of pmtics and Matters.
Note: When the Matter is part of the plasma, this is denoted as Matter (G1 in Fig. 26,
Fig. 27 and Fig. 28) and when the same is considered as tangible matter, it is noted as
matter (Apple in Fig. 28), of an atom or an object.
By the same measure, if one has managed to separate the Antimatter of the plasma from
its other constituents of the Matter and the Dark Matter of the plasma to confine the
Antimatter in separate container as the Fermilab has claimed. The question to ask is
that, what is the weight or the mass of the balanced leftovers of the Matters, (or Matter,
Dark Matter and residual pmtics) of the plasma? By the laws of physics, one cannot
have something (Matters/Energy) out of nothing. One cannot have mass of Antimatter
component of the plasma, when its mass is not calculated in the overall mass of the
70
plasma, or the leftover mass of the Matter and the Dark Matter of the same plasma must
be less than before the Antimatter was taken out.
On the other hand, the question is that, is the present used methods of measuring the
weight and mass of the plasma, measuring the total mass of all the Matters of the
plasma? Alternatively, does one has to break the present numbers of mass and weight of
each Matter, up to its sub-weights and sub-mass of the Matter (Fig. 26 and Fig. 27 G1),
the Antimatter (Fig. 26 and Fig. 27 G2) and the Dark Matter (Fig. 26 and Fig. 27 G3)
of the plasma. Further, the Magravs of the Matters of the plasma in conjunction with
their own Magravs and other pmtics in the plasma create their own additional
gravitational and Magnetic field forces, their own additional mass, as well as the
individual masses of the Matters of the plasma. Thus the total mass of the plasma has to
be more than the total mass of individual Matters of the plasma.
As Fermilab has separated the Antimatter components of the plasma, then, the question
to ask from them, is that, if the mass of the matter of the plasma they hold still has the
same mass as before without the Antimatter in it? So, what is the mass or the weight of
the Antimatter that has been separated?
This applies the same to the Dark Matter components of the initial fundamental plasma
too.
As has been said before, the total weight or total mass of the plasma is and has to be the
total weight and total mass of all components of the Matters of plasma. This includes
the masses or energies of the magnetic fields force of the F1 and the residual fields in
the initial fundamental plasma.
Thus, there is a fundamental error in the present methods and technologies of
measuring the weight and the mass of the plasma systems as a whole.
That is why suddenly one can see strange results from the Antimatter component of the
plasma of the same mass or weight in the matter environment.
If, the total dynamic pmtics of the initial fundamental plasma, would have been,
measured correctly from the beginning, then there would have not been such an
ambiguity and mystery arising from the sudden hidden energy sources called the
Antimatter, or the powers of the Dark Matter of the plasma.
The fact is that, the Antimatter and the Dark Matter possess plasmatic Magravs forces
and that is why, they are called the Matters, as they possess mass and energy.
Hence, if there is a gravitational field’s force of the Antimatter or the Dark Matter
components of the plasma, then these Antimatter and Dark Matter have to have mass
and they have to have weight in respect to the other Matters in the plasma and in respect
to their environments pmtics, which the plasma is in, at given time. Therefore one needs
the measurement of both of the mass and the weight of the plasma as whole as an entity
as well as all the individual masses of each Matter too.
Then, the same as with the atomic mass and atomic weight of an atom measurement
71
phenomenon of today’s science, there is a need for a new scale of measurements, and
new measuring tools to be brought about and developed for the true and total pmtics
measurements of the constituent Matters and fields of the Initial fundamental plasma.
By this new total weight measurement, then the ambiguities in the present plasma
physics and nuclear physics will be sorted.
That is to say then, where and when one gives the measure of the mass or the weight of
the plasma, then at this point, one has to give the mass or the weight of the Matter, the
Antimatter, the Dark Matter and the rest of components of the plasma in a given
motional position, and the position in the life of the plasmas independently, for all
components of the plasma, and one measurement for the plasma collectively as the
whole needs to be given too.
The reason for stating the position and motions of the plasma is due to the fact that, the
plasmas having dynamic characteristic components, plasma itself as a whole is a
dynamic system too and continually gains or losses pmtics from or to its surrounding
pmtics environment respectively. Therefore, the total pmtics of plasma, in different
frame of motion (time), will be different, from one point to another in a given space.
In the future measurements, one has to be clear about all measurements of the Dark
Matters as well as the Matter as well as the Antimatter components, as well as all
magnetic field components, the likes of the F1 or maybe several F1 configurations in
any given pmtics of the initial fundamental plasma. Therefore, there is a need for
correct figures for the mass, the weight and the energy of the initial fundamental
plasma, because such data are needed for in-depth research and developments of various
kinds of applications in Magravs positioning systems using components of Matters of
plasmas as the Matmags, for future space travel.
Another point to consider is the Matters environment in which the weight or mass of the
plasma is carried out. That is if, this is carried-out in the Matter plasmatic magnetic
fields, Antimatter pmtics strength, or Dark Matter pmtics strength environment.
Similarly, the plasmatic magnetic fields’ strength in which the measurements are taken
should be considered. This being, in what fields strength in the Matter, the Antimatter
or the Dark Matter field strength or their respective pmtics energies measurements are
taken place.
This is the true nature of the complexity of the relationship with the mass, weight,
energy and their interactions in the world of Matters. These cannot be so simplified with
one equation of relativity with three simple denotations, if in the future scientists strive
to achieve the universal method of producing energy and motion.
The space travellers of the future will come truly to understand that a small error in the
measurement of all matters and Matters components, the environmental magnetic
plasmatic strength and so forth, can land them in strange and peculiar environments,
which these were not planned for or expected. These small errors can end them up in
new conditions and positions in the galaxies, which could be nice for experimental
purposes, but not necessarily good for the health or the life of the passengers of these
72
future crafts using Matters Magravs positioning systems (Chapters 22 and 23).
It is possible that due to miss-calculations, one part of the systems of the future crafts,
or even the reactors of crafts, which are creating the conditions for motion or energy,
will experience different environmental and Matter conditions than the rest, of the craft
or the reactor. As, for example, the same system can land in the border of two different
pmtics strength environments, or, in a different plasmatic condition than was originally
planned, because of the miscalculation of the Dark Matter Magravs strength.
A physical comparison of the two state of Matters can be for example, considering a
cube of sugar, half-submerged in a hot liquid, like tea, where, half of matter of sugar is
in the solution of the hot liquid and the other end of the cube being between the fingers
of the dipper, in solid state.
Therefore, the question emerges, of how does or can one put the original components of
the sugar cube together to get back to the first state of the solid cube, in its original solid
state and shape.
The rearranging Matters through the understanding of the Matter energy balance will be
the solutions for these kinds of mistakes.
The misunderstanding and potential pitfalls with space technology of the future will be
with the miss-calculation of the loading of matters as the “Matmags”, and the control in
the reactors of crafts of the state of Matters transitions will be interesting.
Nevertheless, the travels and space ventures of the future through miss-calculation of
energy balance and wrong Matter Matmags loading will not be without its problems and
sorrows, as have been experienced in the short lifetime of the space explorations of
today for men whom have dared to test the limits of space explorations.
Who dares, in the space traveller of future, may succeed to have a taste of the pleasure
of the unseen in the universe! Our hope is that they come out of these journeys much
wiser, but not necessarily less darer than before.
73
CHAPTER 7
The creation and speed of light
One of the possible ways that light in the universe is created can be through interaction
of pmtics’ of the plasmas. The speed of light is not considered to be the ultimate speed
of Matters. We will discuss how, the interaction of pmtics of the flight systems using
Magravs positioning reactors would lead to the creation of light around such a system
in the atmospheric conditions like that of the Earth.
Understanding the basic structure of the initial fundamental plasmas, the rationale that
the speed of light is the ultimate speed of travel of any Matter becomes questionable.
The phenomenon that the speed of light is the ultimate speed of travel of any Matter(s)
or matter(s) is an assumption that has a clear flaw in its concept and cannot be correct
for all states of Matters in the universe.
In the iron-based magnets of the solid state of matter, the magnetic fields flow is in one
direction, out off the North Pole and their return through the opposite South Pole.
The question that needs to be asked is that, what is the speed of the flow of the magnetic
fields force from one pole to another in solid state of matter?
For ease of understanding let us consider two packs of dynamic plasmatic magnetic
fields strength of the pack A and the pack B (Fig. 29), in the path of collision with each
other.
The pack A and the pack B can be considered to be of the plasmatic magnetic fields of
the plasmas, solar systems or galaxies. The other assumption is that the pmtics strength
of these two sets considered not being equal. These two sets of pmtics are supposed to
be the mixture of the pmtics of gravitational and Magnetic fields of their respective
Matters or objects in each pack.
In considering three snapshots a), b) and c), the motion of the two packs A and B in a
given space of time and pmtics strength of the environment area of the D in respect to
each other.
a) As the pack A and the Pack B are in motion in space and heading towards each
other and these two fields are set to collide with each other (Fig. 29).
74
Fig. 29: Two unequal pmtics packs heading for collision.
b) Further, in the process of their motion, the two pmtics collide with each other
(Fig. 30).
Fig. 30: Two unequal pmtics packs colliding and releasing lower order of
pmtics strength as light (C).
c) Further, in the process of the interaction of two original pmtics of A and B, the
two fields separate (Fig. 31) and carry on in the universe with some of their fields
being released during the collision.
75
Fig. 31: Two unequal pmtics packs after collision moving away from each other.
Considering the point (b) of impact and collision as in figure 30, as there is no physical
matter in these zones, only the pmtics forces can collide and interact.
The collision of the two plasmatic magnetic fields due to their frictions with each other,
this leads to separation and production of fragments of pmtics, which some will be of
slower plasmatic magnetic fields strength than the two original pmtics of the two
original packs.
In case of physical matter, it is normal that when two matters collide head-on, they slow
down and some parts of their matter are sheared off and released as fragments.
Through the collision and the interaction of these two packs of pmtics with each other,
and the friction between them, these cause separation and fragmentation of some of the
same pmtics from the two original pmtics of the two packs. The collision in between
two sets of magnetic fields causes some of the pmtics to slow down. In the case of
pmtics collision, these slowed down fragments of original two packs of pmtics are
slower, and possesses weaker strength pmtics compared to their original two pmtics
strength, which were involved in the collision.
We can assume that the original two pmtics plasmas speeds of travel have to be much
higher by order of magnitude than the fragments that are created by the collision and
interaction of the two packs of magnetic fields forces.
In other word, when two pmtics are colliding with each other, the outcome is partly
slowed down fragments of pmtics as the residuals of this collision. These slowed down
plasmatic magnetic fields fragments of the collision of the two stronger plasmatic
magnetic fields, are slowed enough to appear as, and to be of light magnetic spectrum
within the matter magnetic fields strength spectrum of the matter detection zone.
76
Nevertheless, one can say that, when the two pmtics of A and B collide, the outcome
are residual pmtics fragments of the collision, which some of their slowed down
magnetic fields fragments created due to their friction and collision, leads to the
creation of slower pmtics strength in the range of visible light (Fig. 30 field zone C).
Where, this visible range of the magnetic wavelength is part of the overall universal
order of magnitude of the magnetic wavelength spectrum fields.
In the universe, when two or more plasmatic magnetic rays, fields, plasmas, of Magravs
collide with each other, some of the residual pmtics fragments produced by their
collision will be slowed down to magnetic rays or plasmatic magnetic fields strength
levels, which the strength of these magnetic rays or magnetic fields are in the range of
magnetic fields strength spectrum of the visible light. In other word, the outcome of the
interaction of two or more magnetic rays, magnetic fields or plasmas of Magnetic and
gravitational fields (Magravs) is the production of light.
This being considered as “one of the prime methods by which visible light is created in
the universe. These being the residual of slowed down weaker magnetic fields strength
fragments of pmtics released by the collision of two or more pmtics of Margraves of
plasmas with each other”.
The speed of pmtics fragments, which has slowed down due to a head on collision of
two pmtics plasmas, cannot be faster than the original two pmtics plasmas themselves
that have caused it to be produced.
Thus, the speed of the light, which is created by interaction of two faster fields’ head-on
collision, as a fragment and slowed down field, cannot have a faster speed and more
pmtics strength than the fields that have caused its creation due to their collision.
For example, by the slowing down of the two faster pmtics of the Earth and the Sun that
have not been visible, after collision with each other, and slowing down, they create the
slower plasmatic magnetic fields’ strength and slower speed magnetic fields in the
range of the speed of visible pmtics as of the daylight.
It is correct to accept that “the pmtics, through their collision, have to slow down so that
they became slow enough that they become in the range of the slower wavelength in the
visible light pmtics wavelength spectrum”.
It is obvious that a slower fragment cannot be faster than the fields that have caused its
creation. Therefore, “The speed of the light is not and cannot be the ultimate speed of
motion” when itself is created by interaction of faster or stronger plasmatic magnetic
fields.
In universal order of magnitude of the speed of motion, I consider “the speed of light to
be somewhere in the lower end of the overall universal magnetic fields speed
spectrum”.
Thus, the speed of the light is only the fastest to human methods of detection and not
necessarily true in other levels of universal order of motion.
77
It can be said that the speed of the light is “the ultimate speed that can be attained by
pmtics in the Matter components of the plasma”.
Another, fundamental point to realise is that “the speed of travel of light is different in
a Matter environment than the Antimatter environment and even in the Dark Matter
environment”.
Similarly, it is correct to say that “the light created by the interaction of the Antimatter
pmtics plasmas and the Dark Matter pmtics plasmas, they have different speeds than
the light created by the interaction of Matters’ pmtics plasmas”. These faster speeds of
magnetic fields than the pmtics of the light spectrum are not detectable by the present
tools in the scientific state-of-the-art technology. But their effects and power and
strength has been seen and observed in the reactors, which have been built and tested
for lift and motion in the past years.
Considering the collision of two pmtics like those of the Earth and the Sun, where the
Earth’s Magnetic and gravitational pmtics (Fig. 32 field B) being made through
interaction of magnetic fields of Matters in the inner cores of the Earth (Chapter 1), and
the Sun’s Magnetic and gravitational pmtics (Fig. 32 fields A) being made by the
matters, in the cores of the Star. (In this case, we do not consider the pmtics of Matter,
which are released by interaction of matters pmtics on the surface of the Sun).
An example of the creation of the light through the interaction of pmtics:
As the pmtics of Magravs produced and released by the Sun, reach’s’ the boundaries of
the Earth pmtic of Magravs, these two pmtics of Magravs collide with each other at the
edges of the Earth’s upper atmospheric levels.
Fig. 32: Interaction of three different types of pmtics strength (A, B, C) and the resulting three
residual fragment pmtics (D, E, and F).
78
Where, these interactions leads’ to the creation of the pmtics interface, or the
magnetosphere of the planet. Where, this magnetosphere of the Earth is partially
produced at the same time in respect to the other surrounding pmtics of Matters and
other plasmatic magnetic fields (Fig. 32 field C) in the solar system as well as the
pmtics of the Sun.
Through the pmtics plasma interaction principles, the pmtics of the Magravs of the Sun
interaction with pmtics of Magravs of the Earth leads to the creation of new residual
slower rays and pmtics strength in the light spectrum (Fig. 32 field D), where, the
overall effect of these pmtics fragments of light generated, leads to the creation of the
daylight on the Earth, in the interfacing sector of the Earth with Sun’s pmtics only.
The light generated in the sector of the planet, facing away from the pmtics of Magravs
of the Sun, in interacting with the weaker pmtics of the Dark energy of space around it,
due to the weaker plasmatic magnetic fields’ strength of these pmtics of Dark energies
in space (Fig. 32 field C) and the same constant pmtics strength of the Earth (Fig. 32
field B), in this sector, weaker strength pmtics residuals (Fig. 32 fields E and F) are
created and released, thus, the appearance of the darker sky or the night light.
Thus, the interaction of the same pmtics of Magravs strength of the Earth (Fig. 32 field
B) with the stronger plasmatic magnetic fields of the Sun (Fig. 32 field A) leads to the
creation and release of more powerful pmtics strength residual fragments in the light
spectrum (Fig. 32 field D), hence the daylight. Similarly, the interaction of the same
pmtics of Magravs of the planet (Fig. 32 field B) with the weaker pmtics of the Dark
energy (Fig. 32 field C) in space, away from the Sun’s plasmatic magnetic fields, leads
to the creation of weaker pmtics strength residual fragments, hence weaker lights or
dark night light and creation of the translucent plasmatic darkness (Fig. 32 field E and
F) light of the night.
As the Earth’s reach a more Magravs pmtics strength balance and equilibrium with its
environment’s plasmatic magnetic fields’ strength, thus the darker that part of the
atmosphere it appears to be (This principle is described in Chapters 12 and 13).
Through the same principle of interaction of and collision of solid matters of the cosmic
dust and the pmtics of the Earth, the northern lights in different colours are created.
Where in this case, the light created is due to collision of the matter pmtics and pmtics
of Magravs of the Earth.
It is not correct to consider the speed of light to be the ultimate speed of motion, for any
pmtics of Matters environments existing within the universe. Similarly, it is conceivable
that pmtics can fuse and that their pmtics can increase in strength and consequently they
can increase their speed too. (Paper: Creation of magnetic fields).
In principle, the speed of light is not only achievable by the reduction in pmtics of
higher order of magnitude pmtics strength, but conversely it can be achieved from the
addition or adhesion of the strength of lower order of magnitude pmtics strength too. By
the same measure, the pmtics of the light can be integrated, to create their stronger and
faster speed of motion, with new and faster pmtics from their interactions too.
79
The pmtics strength and the speed of plasmatic magnetic fields is environment
dependent and there are no limits in its lower or higher orders of magnitude. Generally,
as long as plasmatic magnetic fields can interact, they can add to pmtics speed or lose
their speed.
The limitation of speed of travel to plasmatic magnetic wavelength of light is the
restriction that Man has forced upon himself, purely due to lack of his understanding of
the true construction of Matters of his universe.
The present limitation of the speed of the light for motion is very much similar to the
earlier century’s hypocrisy and lack of knowledge of Man, with the belief that the Earth
was flat and at the centre of the universe.
The pmtics become visible light to the human eye, purely due to the fact that human
eyes are adapted through their protein molecular pmtics strength chain, for them to be
able to interact and recognise them. This range of the plasmatic magnetic wavelength is
translated for the human brain to be the visible light for humans to be able to see and
function. Where, this visible range of the magnetic wavelength is part of the overall
universal order of magnitude of the plasmatic magnetic wavelength field’s strength and
not necessarily its ultimate speed.
Thus, “if the human proteins pmtics strength had a different chemical chain, that is to
say, if the protein chain did not have hydrogen, oxygen, carbon and nitrogen in its
composition, then man would have had different overall pmtics strength in his protein
and the universe would have been visible to man in a different range of plasmatic
magnetic wavelength field’s strength spectrum”.
This phenomenon of the protein chain pmtics strength of creation is explained in more
detail in the book to be published, titled “The universal order of existence (9)”.
Further, in this book we will talk about new nuclear-based systems, which have been
developed for them to be able to make use of the creation and control of pmtics of
Magravs strength for motion. We have called these systems GRAvitational POsitioning
Systems (GRAPOS). From, tests and what we have seen and observed in the past years
in proof of pmtics creation and control, the following can be discussed in respect to the
interaction of the pmtics of the Grapos Magravs and the pmtics of Magravs of the Earth.
Using Magravs positioning reactors, the interaction of the Magravs generated by these
reactors with Earths’ Magravs, these interactions of the two of Magravs, by their natural
phenomenon of creation and interaction of pmtics, these Magravs interaction of the
Grapos reactor and the planet, always leads to the creation of light around these systems
in planets’ atmospheric environment.
Crafts using Grapos for lift and motion in their movement and travel in pmtics plasma
of Magravs environments, like the Earth’s atmosphere, these systems generate pmtics
fragments of rays of light and appear to be like moving bright lights in the skies
(Fig. 33 disk 3 and 4).
80
Fig. 33: Visualisation of Magravs positioning systems (1, 2, 3 and 4) within Earth atmosphere.
The effects of the interaction of the four different Grapos and their different pmtics
strength and lights they produce around these systems, due to their of Magravs strength
in respect to the Earths’ pmtics are demonstrated in the figure 33 disks 1, 2, 3 and 4.
The brightness of these lights in sky is due to the pmtics of Magravs strength of
Grapos’ in respect to their environment pmtics of Magravs of plasma strength of the
Earth, and these lights are balance pmtics strength dependent. Lights around these
crafts are produced by the same principles and are similar to the way light is created by
stars.
Another example of the Magravs positioning reactors to be used in future craft systems’
is, in creating a balanced Magravs strength in respect to the Earth atmospheric plasmatic
magnetic fields’ strength, so that there would be not much field strength difference and
hence nearly no interaction between the pmtics of the system and the Earth. Thus, no or
very little light created around these systems as is shown in figure 33, with disks lights
1 and 2. So the system or spacecraft in a given position and time in the Earth
atmospheric condition can become dark translucent in respect to the Earth pmtics
strength. This giving the impression that, the system has disappeared from the sky, in
fact, the system has created its own balance plasmatic magnetic fields’ strength
condition of dark light in its environment in respect to its environments Magravs
strength, while the system still is/or can be keeping the same position in atmosphere. By
being able to adjust the Magnetic and gravitational field’s strength of Grapos reactor(s),
these crafts can change their visual appearance in the Earth atmosphere, from dark to
81
bright light and deemed-light and so one. Four different Magravs strength of Grapos in
Magravs of the Earth are shown in figure 33 and figure 55 in disks 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Man can and will travel several times faster than the speed of the light in the future.
This will be of his own choosing and limited by his technological advancement and the
limitation of understanding of his own tangible existence.
The speed of motion, due to the interaction or gravitational pull of the planets and stars
of destination, in pulling the crafts equipped with Grapos towards them is beyond the
present technological ability and comprehension of the scientific world, but in time this
will be as easily and manageable as daily atmospheric flights of today. Which these
crafts can travel several times faster than the speed of light.
The other scenario of collision of pmtics around the Earth could be that when the two
field Magravs of the Earth and the Sun collide, and their overall field interactions can
lead to the creation of faster pmtics than that of visible light. This again is the result of
the amalgamation of two pmtics strength forces from two celestial objects.
Theoretically this is not possible around the Earth as most of the fields of the Earth are
outward going and crossing the path of the pmtics of the Sun, and these fields would be
carried away and out from Earth’s atmosphere and not inwards. Therefore, any
amalgamation of two pmtics of the Sun and Earth has to be inward so that Earth’s
atmospheres can generate the daylight.
This phenomenon of the addition of two fields to create light in the case of the high
speed of the plasmatic magnetic fields of the Sun and the Earth is not a common
possibility, or there is so very little of it.
By the pmtics theory, in the case of an atom’s structure, pmtics of Magravs of the
constituent Matters of the electron interact with the pmtics of Magravs of the proton.
This creates the fuzzy light around the electron fields in motion, which makes it
dimensionally easier to detect the presence of the electron than its nucleus. This fuzzy
light being similar and created through the same principle as to the interaction of the
pmtics of Magravs of the Sun and the Earth, as was explained.
Considering the interaction of the pmtics of matters on the surface of the Sun: The
lights which can be observed from the surface of the stars is primarily due to the
interaction of the pmtics of the gravitational and Magnetic field from the centre of the
star and their interaction with the Magravs of the plasmas on the surface of the star,
where this interaction of the two fields leads to the release of pmtics in the visible light
spectrum. The intensity of the light of the stars is in principle due the strength of the
gravitational and Magnetic fields generated in the centre of the star, as the pmtics of the
hydrogen plasmas on the surface of the Sun are considered to be constant.
We consider the pmtics received by the fields of the Earth from the pmtics from the
matters from the surface of the Sun to be small and to be a fraction of the power of the
pmtics released due to the gravitational and Magnetic fields from the centre of the star
which reaches the planet Earth. The only time when the pmtics of the materials on the
82
surface of the Sun has any effect on the interaction with the Earths’ gravitational and
Magnetic fields is when there is a surge in the volcanic eruptive activities on the top
layers of the materials on the surface of the Sun. These eruptions cause the release of
large quantities of physical material of plasmas into the solar system.
83
CHAPTER 8
Dark Light phenomena
In the previous Chapter we explained that the visible light is created through the
interaction of Magravs and the light created due to the difference in strength of
Magravs. Opposite to this, must be the interaction of balanced Magravs strength where
the weak or balanced Magravs fields strength, which leads to the creation of a type of
night light or dark light at nights.
The point has reached in physics, that these balanced pmtics Magravs strength
conditions needs to be considered on their own, where the Dark light phenomena can
be introduced as part of the science of physics.
“This Dark light phenomenon, with Dark light intensity, can be said to be created and
be due to the near to, or balanced, equilibrium in pmtics strength reached, or that can be
achieved, through the interaction of two or more pmtics forces in respect to each others
in a given environment”. Where, the intensity of the darkness is pmtics strength balance
dependent (Fig. 36 zone C).
The level of measurement of this darkness is not field strength dependent, but plasmatic
magnetic fields strength balance dependent of one pmtics in respect to another pmtics.
That is to say, the interacting pmtics environments can possess any magnetic strength,
but in all cases, when the two pmtics strength are near equal, then the darkness
phenomenon of the same dark intensity prevails and the same type of dark light
phenomenon occurs, irrespective of the original pmtics strength involved.
If this phenomenon is fully understood, just as man has developed night-vision tools,
equipment can be produced that can view Dark light plasmatic magnetic fields strength
balance in respect to different pmtics strength. Then the universe would be full of new
objects that have never been seen in light energy matter conditions.
What a wonderful world would one be in and see, through these tools and machines,
Men of vision would take pleasure and treasure by looking through from such a
machine.
84
CHAPTER 9
Relation between Gravity and Light
Through the pmtics theory principles, as gravitational fields are made of interaction of
pmtics, and the light being itself made of pmtics, it is inevitable that entities made of the
same, will interact with each other.
From previous chapters, it is clear that the light is made of the lower order of magnitude
pmtics strength in the overall pmtics strength spectrum in the universe. The light in
essence is itself moving dynamic pmtics and that by the principle of this definition light
is energy. Alternatively, it can be said that the light possesses energy.
We consider that light is a made of pmtics strength of a lower order of magnitude in the
overall pmtics strength spectrum in the universe.
At the same time as has been explained, “Gravity and gravitational fields’ (Chapter 1)
are themselves made of interaction of at least two similar pmtics or at least two similar
magnetic rays”.
It is understandable that, any gravitational field’s forces, as an entity, in essence are
made of interactions of pmtics. Thus, gravity can and will effect any other entity in
possession of pmtics, or entities being made of pmtics, like light. The light and the
Magravs (known as gravitational fields) are both made of the same magnetic entities; it
is normal that they have interactions and attractions in respect to each other’s position.
Fundamentally, it is not correct to say that light is gravitational dependent.
But, it is correct to say that, “the attraction and interaction of the light rays in respect
to, and from, another collection of plasmatic magnetic fields like gravitational fields
(Magravs) are position dependent”.
In classic physics, the behaviour of the light has been said to be gravity dependent.
Through the new understanding of the creation of Magravs, this cannot be correct. As
the light and gravity are made of the same magnetic fields of different strength, thus
they can have near enough the same speed of motion in matter magnetic field strength
medium.
In the case of light rays, when the ray comes in the vicinity of, or in position in space
that it can be within a field of, or be near to or in the catchments area of a collection of
Magnetic fields or gravitational fields (Magravs), these two entities’ magnetic fields
interact.
Thus, light is not gravitationally dependent, but in fact the attraction of light is position
dependent from a pmtics of any Magravs area.
85
Thus, the stronger the Magravs of an object are, the stronger the pull.
Following the new principles of magnetic field interactions, the stronger pmtics of
Magravs strength of the Matter, the Antimatter or the Dark Matter will exert their
gravitational magnetic field forces on the weaker magnetic field strength of the light
rays. Hence, the stronger pmtics of heavy matters and the stronger pmtics of stars, the
Antimatter and the Dark Matter, pull weaker magnetic fields like light pmtics towards
themselves.
So that the visible light will move slower as it will be pulled towards the gravitational
force of these stronger, Magravs like stars and Antimatter zones and as it interacts with
their pmtics forces.
Light has a different speeds in the Antimatter, the Matter and the Dark Matter due to
their magnetic fields strength, very much like as it has slower speed in liquid than in air
in the matter environment.
The difference between matter environment and the Antimatter and the Dark
Matter environment is very much in that the former is pmtics compactness and
density dependent, as in the latter it is pmtics strength dependent.
Thus, light, by the principle of its construction from pmtics, will be pulled and travel
slower in other state of Matters and near large and stronger plasmatic Magravs strength
of objects like stars, through the magnetic fields interaction principles or the
gravitational pull of one stronger magnetic fields in respect to the weaker magnetic
fields of the light.
In physics, this has been said to be like the effect of the bending of light when it passes
a planet or star in possession of gravitational field forces. The principle of bending of
the light, or gravitational lensing in vicinity of, for example, stars is purely due to the
interaction of the pmtics of the light with the plasmatic Magravs forces of the star.
It is important to notice that in positions in space, where the Magnetic fields of the star
supersede the gravitational fields’ strength in respect to any given ray of light, the light
ray as well as being able to bend inward due to the gravitational pulls, it can also be
reflect away from Magnetic fields forces too.
By the same principle, it is now understandable, why and how for example in strong
gravitational fields like black holes areas, even light appears as to get absorbed into
them. This being due to the fact that Magravs strength in the centre of the black holes in
these regions are so strong, that due to their magnetic fields strength they gravitate the
magnetic fields of the light inwards or what they call in common terms “absorb” the
light. This attraction is simply a gravitational pull of stronger Magravs strength of
Matters and matters in the centre of a black hole in respect to the much weaker
magnetic fields of the light.
Most certainly, gravity and its field strength is not warp dependent or gravity is not
caused and is not created because of a warping of the matter in the plane of time and
space, as has been discussed in some fields of present physics.
86
Fig. 34: Warping path of a weaker Magravs system towards the stronger Magravs system.
Note: Definitely the warping is not the creator of the gravitational fields, but the
warping shows the path of the motion of the one gravitational field downward or
toward onto another gravitational field.
That is to say, one weaker gravitational field can be attracted towards another stronger
gravitational field G2 (Fig. 34), so that the path of the direction of the motion of the
weaker gravitational fields G1, towards the stronger, could make the warp like path
(Fig. 34 path W) in a given plane of time. This is the warping effect of a weaker
gravitational field in respect of a stronger gravitational field and this is the warping
path of attraction.
Therefore, warping of the matter is not the cause of the creation of gravity in the matter
87
of the weaker gravitational field strength object, but in fact the warping is only an
indication of the path of the attraction and motion of the weaker gravitational fields
towards the stronger gravitational fields.
Celestial matters in possession of Magravs, through their internal pmtics and their
attractions and interaction and nothing else, can generate the majority of their own
gravitational fields in the universe. At the same time, the motion of two objects in the
possession of their own gravitational fields can set and start different gravitational fields
of one object in respect to the other. That is to say, when two stars in the universe come
into each other’s catchments zone, the catchments envelope creates its own gravitational
pull, separate from the internal gravitational pull of the stars themselves. That is in fact
the operation of two original pmtics Magravs being cascaded by the bigger one outside
them. The interaction of the two stars, in trying to find their position, causes the
swirling effect first and then the warping effect type of motion of the weaker stars’
gravitational fields towards the stronger pmtics gravitational field.
External motion of matter does not necessary create gravitational fields inside an object,
but the path and speed of the motion of matter indicates the strength of the pull of one
field towards another and the direction of the path of the attraction.
There are no planes of references for this warping, as the original point of the reference
of the interaction of the two pmtics magnetic fields in respect to each other comes from
where, they first come into touch and start the first fields interactions; this becomes the
plane reference point for the path of the attraction of one gravitational field towards
another (Fig. 34)
In fact, the theory of warping creating gravity is as far from reality, as gravity being
time dependent.
Maybe it is right to say, “In time, once two Magravs come in contact with each other
and stay interlocked, the two fields might merge into one, this time of merger is then
pmtics Magravs strength dependent”.
As has been explained, Matter is one of the three parts of the Matters of the plasma.
Thus, the same interaction between the three gravitational pulls of three Matters within
the structure of the Matter (see Chapter 18 and 19) causes the warping and motion of
Matters in respect to each other within the plasma.
In fact, any magnetic and pmtics entity, at all times of its existence, is gravitating or will
have gravitation towards one or another magnetic ray or pmtics or Magravs in its
regions and is warping towards one point or another in space at any given frame of
time. That is to say, there are no regions in space in the universe, which are void of
magnetic rays or pmtics, and their gravitational interactions and attractions in respect to
one field or one Magravs or other.
Nevertheless, there are different magnetic fields strengths, which in one form or
another, are gravitated to one or another magnetic fields regions in the universe, in
respect to their proximity of distance from a ray or a pmtics.
88
Maybe we can say “that gravitation in respect to time, is dependent on the position in
space and pmtics strength of the any two entities, and that in time, for example light
being in essence a magnetic field in origin, it will be effected or attracted or gravitated
to another magnetic field or collection of fields, and that these magnetic fields can
already possess gravitation in respect to each other.
Thus light rays in given point in space will come in touch with other magnetic fields,
which they will gravitate towards each other, for them to merge, where this merger will
take a certain given duration.
Thus, the light rays and other pmtics strength have a direct effect on the rate of
attraction of one field to another. Thus, speed of attraction is pmtics strength
dependent”.
In real physical terms, the light itself can be or become one-half of a gravitational field
set, so not only is the light getting attracted towards another Magravs system, but also in
this process, the light becomes part of a second magnetic field of a gravitational set
itself in respect to the first gravitational field. Then this light pmtics becomes part of a
plasma magnetic field, which this is, a new set of a light field and the first gravitational
field interaction, and this itself becomes another Magravs system like.
The other important point to consider, is the time it takes for the light ray to reach or be
attracted into or by a gravitational field, zone or area. This interaction and attraction, is
both gravitational field strength, and the light ray’s magnetic fields strength, dependent.
That is to say, stronger gravitational magnetic fields, pulls rays faster to themselves
than a weaker gravitational magnetic fields.
Thus, the time, that it takes for a light ray to get attracted into the gravitational field
zone is gravitational field strength dependent and not time dependent, as the strength of
the pmtics of the light of the matter is considered to be constant for all states of Matters.
Then for different Matters (Matter, Antimatters and Dark Matters) in the universe, there
should be different frames-of-reference of duration or time. As the light created in the
matter environment will have different speed in the Antimatter and Dark Matter
magnetic fields spectrum environments of stronger pmtics strength regions. While the
light created by the Antimatters and the Dark Matters pmtics, interactions have very
different speed than the light created by Matter pmtics interaction. Secondly, the speed
of the light from Dark Matters and Antimatters are much faster than the speed of the
light of the Matter state or in matter state pmtics’ strength levels.
Some notes about light
- The frequency of the light wave is created on the same basis and due to the same
principles as the change of the polarity in the stars, for example the Suns’ eleven
years half shift in polarity change (12, 18). - By the same principles, the alteration in the extreme points known as maximum and
minimum points of return of the waves are Magravs positioning balance dependent,
89
and not as what has been assumed, electromagnetic field based, as electrons
themselves are made of plasmatic magnetic fields. - The pmtics as rays, as they enter or come in touch with an atom or an object that
they can move or cause motion in the penetrated atoms, electrons of matter or
Matter or in their initial fundamental particles, because the matters or Matters
components are similarly made of dynamic pmtics, thus, when a pmtics comes in
touch with another pmtics, these pmtics interact and collide with each other. Thus,
the outcome is a transition of pmtics from one entity to another. - The transition of pmtics takes place when the plasmas of Matters come into contact
with the initial fundamental plasma of the Matter and they transfer their plasmatic
magnetic fields strength from one to another. Usually this transfer is from the
stronger to the weaker field strength directional of flow.
90
CHAPTER 10
The Antimatter
In the world of science, the Antimatter has been considered and said to be the largest
source of energy for the future of the energy, space and motion technology.
In the structure of the initial fundamental plasma, I consider that “the Antimatter is the
main component of the whole structure of the plasma and it is the carrier of the largest
amount and strongest of dynamic pmtics strength in the plasma, which Antimatter can
release the maximum and the larger amount of pmtics strength in the full spectrum of
pmtics of energies from the plasma”.
To understand what the role of the Antimatter is in the overall construction of plasma,
we can simply look at the larger scale of the same type of entity and its effect in the
universe. In the universe, the large-scale plasma conditions are said to be the like of the
Stars, or the Suns’ in their solar systems.
Where, the Antimatter part of the plasma is the same as the Star of a solar system, and
it is the holder of the main quality and quantity and the possessor of the strongest
pmtics strength of all Matters of the initial fundamental plasma.
I consider that, the Antimatter is the source of the energy and the central
gravitational point of the plasma as a whole. The Antimatter is in fact the Star of the
plasma, thus it is as the Sun to the solar system. In fact, there is nothing “anti” about
this Matter component of plasma in the universe.
This is the reason why, in being able to free them from the sub-components of the
Matter and the Dark Matter of the plasma, the Antimatter appear to be such a fantastic
new source of energy.
As the Antimatter was made initially from the stronger magnetic fields strength in the
plasma to start with, hence it holds the real fundamental source and the supplier of
pmtics to all matters in the plasma. It can be said that pmtics released by the Antimatter
are the platform for the change for almost everything that is made in the matter world.
91
That is to say, “that Antimatter is the source, where pmtics are positioned to start the
change from stronger pmtics strength level in the plasma components, and transfer more
of pmtics strength of Matters to matters”.
It is the pmtics of the Antimatters, which are transferred in most parts‘, from one
plasma to another, which, causes energy transfer from one molecule to another or one
cell to another.
We have used these Antimatters pmtics strength effects in the recent past in our
reactors, the pmtics interactions of Antimatters were utilised to create the Magravs
forces needed for the Magravs positioning of these systems in respect to another
plasmatic Magravs of another object, this being like the Earth’s Magravs.
Through tests, it has been proven that the presence of the Antimatters and its strong
plasmatic magnetic fields that it provides for the creation of Magravs in the reactors is
the main reason why, we have managed to lift and move large masses through the
gravitationally positioned principle.
In Grapos test reactors, which have been developed and tested for lift and motion, the
operativeness of pmtics strength of the Antimatters have been proven to be in line with
our theories, where if the pmtics of the Matter were used in these reactors, the Magravs
created by pmtics of this Matter would not haven been strong enough to cause the
motion or lift of the system.
The scientific world is using accelerators (6, 7, and 8) to slam the plasma into a wall of
matter, for the plasma to open and to release its Antimatter sub-components.
In present technology, scientists are trying to understand how to gather and harvest the
power of this Matter. It is however crucial to understand that, “one does not burn the
Antimatter as fuel, as it is assumed by the present scientific world in this field and as
Fermilab (6, 7) is considering”.
Nevertheless, there is an easier and smoother way to achieve this separation, and that is
just to dilute the plasma (Chapter 21), through this method, it will be easy to release the
Antimatter from its plasma.
Once the scientific world has a full understanding of how to separate this Antimatter
from its plasma, then they will understand that one does not need to burn this Matter as
fuel to create motion and energy. But, they simply have to learn to use the effects of
the interactions of the constituent pmtics of this Antimatter in conjunction with
other Antimatters pmtics of other plasmas or Matters pmtics to achieve lift, motion, and
for creation of energy, as has been done in the universal order of motion and creation of
energy for billions of years.
92
CHAPTER 11
The Antimatter energy
Antimatters are known to be the sources of vast amount of the strong pmtics. The
strong fields of the Antimatter are considered to be the major sources of the energy
supplied into their respective environment for Matter-to-Matter, and from Matter-tomatter
through their pmtics. The strong pmtics, once released by the Antimatter, and
these pmtics in being in motion in their environment, they become to be called the
energy of the Antimatter.
These pmtics by essence of their origin and strength they are, and become, strong
energy field sources and reservoirs of energy in their environment. Where, some of the
pmtics within the Antimatter are used to maintain the integrity of the Matter and the
plasma itself.
At the same time, some of the pmtics of the Antimatter are equally reduced in strength,
and these changes and reductions in their strength of some of the pmtics strength of the
Antimatter overall constituent pmtics, these pmtics are allowed then to escape the
gravitational fields of their Antimatter pmtics Magravs.
These released pmtics from the Antimatter, become the Antimatter pmtics in motion
(energies) due to the strength of their plasmatic magnetic fields’ forces. These pmtics
can travel much further from the Matters and plasma, to transfer their energies to other
pmtics in their environment.
These released fields become the Antimatter pmtics in motion (energies), which, due to
the strength of their plasmatic magnetic fields’ forces, these pmtics can travel much
further from the Matters and the plasma, for them to transfer their energies to other
pmtics in their environment.
Due to the fact that the Antimatter itself is originally made of the stronger pmtics, the
Antimatter will let go of pmtics in stronger and wider spectrum of magnetic fields
strength. Thus, the Antimatter releases a full spectrum of pmtics strength forces. That is
why they are more powerful and covering a wider range spectrum of energy levels as
they slow down.
In essence, the Antimatter itself starts from a combination of interactions of stronger
pmtics bases, and hence has more to lose of its slowed down fields and it has more to
attract due to its stronger Magravs too. At the same time, it covers a larger domain as its
pmtics can spread further.
In fact, the energies that are released by the Antimatter look to be, and basically are
stronger than other energy fields around them, purely due to the fact that they start their
life from stronger pmtics strength base in their environments.
93
CHAPTER 12
The Dark Energy
The principles of creation of the Dark energy as an outcome of normal interaction of
pmtics are discussed. The similarities of the Dark energy and force, which are created
around Black holes, are in principle of the same origin.
In the dynamic environments of the universe, changes happen due to various
conditional factors like motion, compression, turbulence, temperature, and so on, that
can individually or collectively lead to concentration or motion of pmtics (energy).
These changes in environmental conditions can lead to the manifestation of Matters like
the Matter, the Antimatter, the Dark Matter, atoms, stars and galaxies and so on. This is
the common fundamental base for the creation of Dark energy and creation of Dark
Matters (36) and any dark objects like the Dark Matters, the regular appearance of dark
spots on the surface of the Sun and stars (12, 13, 14), the appearance of Dark spots in
the galaxies known as Black holes (13), the Dark Rings around Saturn (17) and so on.
The creation of these conditions and matters can all be explained through the following
interaction of normal dynamic pmtics in the universe.
By pmtics theory, the Dark energy is said to be the collection of balanced and
equilibrium pmtics strength forces in motion in respect to their environments pmtics
strength, this being in any given environment, in deep space in the universe or in the
centre of an atom and so on.
The universe always possesses equilibrium pmtics strength in its total energy balance,
hence the universe possesses more environments which are in pmtics balance strength
and hence the existence of vast-spans of the universe which energies are in motion, but
due to their balance magnetic fields strength in these regions of the universe, no light
through the interaction of various magnetic fields are produced to confirm the motion of
the pmtics in that region.
It is important to note, that in the universe only the difference in magnetic fields
strength is the cause of creation of visible light from the human observation point of
view. Where there is balance and equilibrium in the environment, no lights through
interaction of magnetic fields or pmtics are produced. This doesn’t mean that there are
no magnetic fields or pmtics in motion (energies) and that nothing is present in that
region of the universe. In fact the darkness of dynamic environment of the universe
confirms the existence of the balanced magnetic fields strength. Beholding the truth, the
darkness of the universe confirms the existence and motion of balance and equilibrium
of magnetic fields strength, and not the lack of the existence of magnetic fields in
motion (energy).
We have defined Energy as: “pmtics forces in motion”. Therefore the Dark energy has
the same definition, where in this case, these are balanced or near balanced pmtics
94
strength forces in respect to their environment pmtics field forces in motion.
The universe always possesses equilibrium pmtics strength in its total energy balance,
hence it possesses more environments which are pmtics balance strength and hence the
darkness of the universe.
Steps in the creation of Dark Energy
To explain the phenomenon of creation of the Dark energy in more detail, let us
consider two equal pmtics environment zone A and B in figure 35. These two fields’
zones can be for example pmtics from two galaxies in motion in the universe or two
pmtics in the span of a plasma.
Before the interaction of the two field zones, pmtics of each zone are interacting with
their respective environment, which creates their own boundaries of their field strengths
through their magnetosphere boundaries, in respect to their environmental pmtics (zone
A with zone D, and zone B with zone D).
Fig. 35: Two equal pmtics strength entities moving in each other path.
Lets assume; a) The universal magnetic fields are always in rotational motion as of D
(Fig. 35), and b) The two pmtics of the A and the B are in motion in directions shown.
Through their motion and the environmental forces, the two fields zones come to be
partially in contact and interact with each other. (Fig. 36)
As segments of pmtics of the zones A and B collide (Fig. 36), and as their interacting
pmtics are similar in strength, then there are no differences in field strength for the two
pmtics to create the magnetospheres condition (14) or no residual pmtics or very little
pmtics fragments are produced from the interaction of these two pmtics zones. Thus in
the interaction of two fields and due to balance in their pmtics strength, this interaction
zone C of fields does not lead to creation of pmtics fragments in the light magnetic field
spectrum leading to the creation of pmtics of light (Chapter 7), to make this region light
95
to show the existence and occurrence of collision between two equal magnetic fields
strength zones.
Fig. 36: Two equal pmtics strength entities moving in each other path colliding and creating a
temporary Dark energy zone (zone C) due to their interaction.
Thus in respect to the surrounding environment the colliding of two pmtics in motion
and the lack of production of pmtics fragments strength in the bandwidth of the light in
this section of colliding pmtics, this creates the appearance of being dimmer or darker
zone (Fig. 36 zone C) compared to its two original zones magnetospheric condition in
respect and in comparison with their surrounding pmtics.
In the region of C of figure 36, due to the balance in pmtics strength and the creation of
very little residual pmtics fragments, this area has a darker appearance in comparison to
the rest of the region which one can observe with the rest of the two zones of A and B in
the overall region of the D environment. Nevertheless, the energy of the pmtics in
motion of the two pmtics zone of A and B exist and they can be measured, as the two
pmtics of A and B move on, this confirms the existence of energy in the dark zone C,
where in fact there are no sources for such an energy field to justify their existence in
this darker appearing region.
Thus, in the case of the Dark energies zones in the universe, most of the time, one has to
look at the overall picture of the interactions of the package and area, rather than to the
local zone where the darkness and dark energies appears to be and where pmtics in
motion as energy fields are present.
Further on, as the two fields zones A and B are dynamic entities and they are pushed by
the forces in the bigger picture of the zone D, the Dark zone C, figure 36 disappears as
two zones of A and B move away from each other.
Thus, the interaction and creation of the zone C, figure 36 is a temporary phase as the
two field zones separate and carry on in their own path and the Dark energy zone C in
figure 36 disappears, as there never was a Dark energy zone in that part of the zone D as
96
whole (Fig. 37 fields A and B).
Fig. 37: Two equal pmtics strength entities moving away from each other after their collision.
Therefore, Dark energy zones in the universe are not necessarily a place where there are
void of Matters or magnetic fields, but the darkness itself confirms the existence of the
balanced pmtics strength in motion in respect to the majority of pmtics strength forces
in that given environment, which pmtics in these areas are in balance and in equilibrium
in strength with each other in a given point and a given window of motion of fields
called time in the span of the universe.
At the same time, these sudden Dark energy regions in space are temporary conditions
in a given specific time and specific position from a specific point of observation.
On the other hand if one is inside such a zone not necessarily means that one is in the
Dark energy zone. In some cases of dynamic solid gravitational fields of matters in the
centre of these energy zones, due to the interaction of the Magravs of the Matters and in
level of Dark intensity translucent, inside these Dark energy zones one can have bright
zones as being near a star zone.
It is obvious that most of the universe appears as dark, even though pmtics always exist
in these areas of the universe and are essential components of its structure. This by itself
means that the universe is in pmtics strength balance and equilibrium within itself.
The Dark Matters do not all possess the same pmtics strength and therefore the Dark
energies are not all of the same magnetic or Magravs strength, in respect to other pmtics
strength environment.
By the same measure, the Dark Energies in the universe do not all possess the same
pmtics strength, as their strength is pmtics strength dependent in respect to the
environment pmtics strength of their appearance.
97
In the case of the Dark Matters as sources of the Dark energies, these Dark energies are
produced through the initial pmtics interactions in the centre of the Matter, and hence
the energy they produce as their overall outward Magnetic fields and inwards
gravitational fields, are always in balance in respect to other pmtics in their given
environment. Where this balance of pmtics strength gives the Matter the appearance of
darkness, or darker looking in respect to its overall given environment.
Some of the Dark energies have a Magravs source in their centre in the universe. Thus,
these types of Dark energies are part of a Dark Matter source, which are part of the
overall magnetospheric environment of the Dark Matter pmtics. These sources of the
Dark energies are the Magravs of a matter which in respect to its environment from a
given position in space, and due to the equilibrium of the pmtics of the Matter and the
environment, cause the Dark energy zone, from that specific point of observation, as
that given zone of pmtics interaction appear to be darker than the rest of the
environment surrounding it.
98
CHAPTER 13
The Dark Matter
According to the Keshe pmtics Theory of Dark Matters “for an entity to be considered
as a Matter, the entity has to possess both Magravs pmtics forces, so that not only the
Matter can maintain its Magnetic and gravitational fields, but at the same time the
Matter can maintain a balanced pmtics magnetosphere magnetic fields forces strength
zone and a magnetic fields mass, for the Matter hold on to its constituent pmtics for it to
exist, with the difference with the Dark Matter that the magnetosphere created through
the overall interaction of its Magnetic and gravitational fields forces strength of the
Matter and the environment pmtics force strength that these two forces are in
equilibrium in strength, where the interaction of the pmtics of Magravs of the Dark
Matters’ magnetosphere and the environment pmtics field force in interacting with each
other, they do not create residual fragments pmtics that is in the light magnetic fields
strength spectrum level, that makes this Matter visible or detectable, hence the term
Dark Matter (Fig. 38 G3) (36).
At the same time the Magravs forces created by the same Dark Matter appears to create
a magnetospheric fields forces’ zone around the central Matter, which gives an
impression of an energy source that comes from a dark space in a given environment
without a visible material source and hence the use of the term Dark Energy (Fig. 38
C).”
The Matter is said “to be dark, as its effects can be seen or felt, but, it, is not made
observable to the line of vision or is undetectable through detection systems, which are
looking for signs of light as means of confirmation of the existence of the Matter”(36).
The Dark Matter can be defined in another way, that is to say:
“The Dark Matter (Fig. 38 Matter G3 field C) is the Matter that, by the interaction of its
internal initial pmtics strength, creates the Magravs effects and its external plasmatic
Magravs as the magnetospheric field effect for the Matter to exist. Nevertheless, it is
due to the overall balanced Magravs strength that are created by the Matter as the
magnetosphere of the Matter, being in balanced magnetic fields strength with respect to
its given environment pmtics strength, so that the interaction of the two magnetic fields
99
does not creates pmtics fragments in the light spectrum, where the Matter cannot create
detectable magnetospheric light.”
That is to say, the interaction between two plasmatic magnetic fields strength of the
Dark Matter and the second pmtics strength of environment does not create a visible or
detectable magnetosphere effect, which would be needed to confirm the presence of
the Matter in that given environment and in a given position, at a given point in time.
The Dark Matters effect of Magravs energies can confirm its existence, as the Matter
that appears as Dark or translucent Darker Matter, in respect to its given environment,
to the line vision appearance of the Matter, in a given position and time.
Fig. 38: The Dark Matter (G3), the Dark energy (C)
The Dark Matters can be, or, are made of stronger or weaker plasmatic magnetic fields
than the Matter, and the Antimatters components of the plasma.
The Dark Matters are Matters which appear as areas in the universe in possession of
Magravs forces but no or a very weak, detectable external magnetosphere in respect to
their environment at given point and a given window of transition of time, where the
confirmation of the existence of the Dark Matter is environmental pmtics strength and
position dependent.
If one could create the fundamental principles of the Dark Matter, by the use of Grapos,
with the production of balanced pmtics strength around the system, then one can travel
the spans of the universe with pmtics Magnetic field protection and more or less without
any friction, or resistance in the direction of the motion of the system, this allows the
system to achieve speeds far beyond the present knowledge of Man in the space and
aircraft industries (36).
100
The same effects of the creation of balanced pmtics strength in respect to the
environment can be used to make systems, that without moving; such system becomes
invisible to the line of vision at any point in atmospheric condition or in deep space.
The larger entities like of the Dark Matters in scale of magnitude are the black holes in
the galaxies, where a large gravitational fields zone is observed and no physical tangible
source for the large and strong pulling forces in that region of the galaxy can be seen.
These areas, which are usually and mainly in the centre of galaxies or on the edges of
turbulent boundaries of galaxies, as there are more Matters, matters, magnetic fields and
plasmatic magnetic fields on the move. Where the total balance of these fields, in
respect to their given environment, gives these regions an impression to have the
appearance of the darkness.
These dark regions with strong gravitational pulls are overall temporary events in the
bigger cycle of life of galaxies bigger picture of motion of pmtics and Matters (12, 13).
Sudden appearance of Dark Matter as Matter due to changes in fields forces in the
environment can be analogised like having a wet cloth that is dry looking. However, by
twisting and squeezing the cloth, out of nowhere, drops of water start dripping out of
the cloth. The appearance of the water drop does not mean that water was not in the
cloth, but in fact it means that the condition were not there to force the water to manifest
itself within the cloth.
The Dark Matter can become visible as Matters around their environment pmtics
strength changes. On the other hand, the Dark Matter can become visible Matter when
there is a change in the internal pmtics strengths of the Dark Matter, which the change
in magnetospheric strength of the Dark Matter, changes the magnetosphere pmtics
strength in respect to its environment pmtics strength and the Matter becomes visible.
That is why the Dark Matters are environmental pmtics strength dependent. The
appearance of Dark Matters, due to changes of their pmtics strength or environment
pmtics strength changes have been seen in the universe by scientists and they call these,
the Virtual matters or the Virtual particles (Chapter 14).
Dark spots on the Sun and Black Holes
The Dark spots on the surface of the Sun; These effects are usually seen on the dynamic
surface of stars, where large numbers of similar pmtics strength materials in motion
interact with each other, and hence there are more possibilities of having balanced
pmtics strength regions, as most of the matters are of the same structure of hydrogen
plasmas.
The main reason for the increase in the levels of the dark areas and dark spots on the
surface of the Sun, about every eleven years, is due to change of polarities of the
Magravs created by magnetic fields in the centre of the Sun. This increase is purely and
only due to one factor, this being that the creation of dark spots on the Sun is primarily
due to the interaction of pmtics of the matters on the surface of the star and the pmtics
of the Magravs from the centre of the star. As at time of polarity change of the star,
101
there are more chances of the interaction between two pmtics, which are made by the
components of the same matters (Hydrogen). Thus, there are more chances of reaching
Magnetic strength equilibrium conditions between the surface pmtics strength of the
matters on the surface and the internal Magravs’ fields strength created in the centre of
the star. Where at these points of balance zones of pmtics strength, no or very little
pmtics fragments in the spectrum of light are created, hence the reason why appearance
of the increase in the number of dark spots on the surface of the Sun during the polarity
changes of the star (12,13).
Thus, the dark spots of the Sun are natural outcomes of the balance interaction of the
pmtics strength of the overall Magravs created by the centre of the Sun in respect to the
pmtics strength of the plasmas of the materials on the surface of the Sun. Thus, as there
are more balance pmtics areas produced, a higher number of darker zones can be
observed on the surface of the Sun.
The darkness of Black holes in galaxies, and the Dark energy fields they produce in
their environment, are due to the same process (12, 13). Similarly, all Dark energies are
not necessarily connected to the central Magravs of the Dark Matters.
The Dark Matter and the Dark Energies appear and behave as dark regions, in respect to
a given magnetic fields strength environment, at a specific point in time and space, and
specific conditions from the point of observation. By the same principle, the Dark
Matter and the Dark energy will be a visible or tangible Matters or matters in a different
pmtics strength environment and even from another point of observation.
Therefore, state of the Matters, this being the Matter, the Antimatter, the Dark Matter
appearance and detection of their energies are totally pmtics environmental respective
dependent.
That is to say, “what is the Matter and the energy in one given plasmatic magnetic
fields’ strength environment can become the Dark Matter or the Dark Energy in
another pmtics strength environment to the human point of observation”.
In the universe, the Matters and the Matter energies or the Dark Matters, the Dark
energies, the Antimatter and the Antimatter energies change from one state of Matter
to another, or one state of Matter energy to another, purely due to the respective
Magnetic fields or gravitational field strength as of their environments pmtics strength
as these Matters and energies pass through them.
In the micro and macro universe, suddenly Matters and energies appear out of nowhere
and Matters and energies suddenly disappear into nothing. These appearances are all
pmtics strength respective environment dependent as the Matter or energies pass
through a given field at a given time in their immediate environment.
The universe is considered by us to be covered with the Dark Matters and the Dark
Energies. In general it can be said, where there are no faster or slower pmtics, or
differences in pmtics strength, interacting or for other pmtics of the same or different
strength to collide with, through these balanced pmtics strength regions, there are no
102
unbalance fields to create friction or to have an interface or to have residual pmtics
between the environmental and the moving pmtics, these regions in the universe give
the appearance of lack of Matter, or the Dark Matter or the existence of Dark energy in
respect to the given point and position in the universe. This means that the dark regions
of the universe are balanced in pmtics strength, and not void of pmtics. Hence as the
universe is magnetically strength balanced, therefore the universe, in general, appears
dark and empty, even though the universe has no regions without magnetic fields.
These types of darkness can be see-through and can be transparent through their pmtics
energies; I call these areas the “translucent Dark energy zones”.
This translucence state of position in a given environment is a state where, there is total
darkness but at the same time, there are pmtics strength field interactions that allow
enough light, in respect to vision and detection for one to confirm the lack of light.
This being the reason why, one can see or detect, other Matters or matters through this
universal Translucent Darkness light.
This light in the span of the universe is due to the interaction of very weak pmtics in
motion (energies) in the constituent universal pmtics soup. In fact, these dark regions of
their environment are where the pmtics are in balance within these regions.
As was discusses in the previous chapter, to the human eye protein pmtics balance set,
these residual fields of the two pmtics interactions, due to their pmtics strength balance,
appears as the Dark Matter and is like Dark energy zones in space. If humans would
possess another chemical pmtics protein chain, what are the Dark Matters and the Dark
energies by present means of detection, by viewing through different tools of vision,
then these areas will be as visible light regions of the universe, and may be in different
colour, for example in the Antimatter colours spectrum of the universe, or even in the
Dark Matter colours’ spectrum of the universe. Through the use of such tools, the
importance of the use and function of the Dark energy (Fig. 36) and the Dark Matter
(Fig. 38) will be soon grasped by men of vision, to see the true darkness. Where in the
colour spectrum of the Antimatter the colours are magnetic fields strength dependent
and these colours are not noticed by the human eye matter-based protein pmtics. The
same applies to the Dark Matter colour spectrum.
In the universal order of containment for Matters and energies, it is not far from the
truth to say that the state of Dark Matter is the same as gasses in matter state, that the
Dark Matters and Dark energies do not have self-containment.
That is to say, “As with gasses in a state of matter, Dark Matter fills all the environment
and space that is given to it, as it creates no effective magnetospheric interface boundary
resistance in respect to its environments’ pmtics strength forces.
The boundaries of the Dark Matters and Dark energies are dictated by the boundaries
occupied by stronger or weaker pmtics strength regions around them in their given
points in the universe.”
103
The forces of Dark energies can be confirmed only through their interaction with other
plasmatic magnetic fields in motion, in respect to the field of the Dark energies motion
themselves.
That is to say that the dark lights generated by the Dark Matters and Dark Energies
cover the whole of their given spaces, this being the space in-between different Matters
in the atoms structure or solar system or even galaxies, I call this principle of creation
of dark light strength difference of pmtics magnitude needed for creation of light, the
principle of pmtics magnitude.
It is very correct to assume that one atom of Dark Matter and its Dark energies can be
and/or is enough to span its balanced pmtics to cover the whole of a solar system, or its
bigger counter part galaxies or smaller spaces as the space in the pmtics Matters of one
tangible atom.
104
CHAPTER 14
Virtual Particles (Virtual Matters)
The existence of virtual particles, which appear out of nowhere, and have the
characteristics of real particles in essence, has been described in the Dark Matter section
of this book. The method by which these particles appear within their environment is
exactly how the Dark Matters do exist and appear in their environment, after their
overall Magravs, magnetosphere strength changes’ or due to changes in the pmtics
strength of the environment.
In fact the virtual particles are individual atoms’ or plasmas, or any Matters, of the Dark
Matters behaviour’ (Chapter 13, and reference 12), which when they come into new
pmtics strength environment which is different than their previous balance condition
pmtics strength environment with their Magnetic field and gravitational fields, then
these particles generate a new magnetosphere in respect to their new condition pmtics
strength environment, thus they create light due to their interaction of their plasmas
(Chapter 7) and so they appear as new matters or virtual Matter.
There is nothing new about virtual particles; these are like loose plasmas or a single
atom in the soup of the universal Magnetic and gravitational fields.
Thus, in simple way according to Keshe Theory of creation of Matters, virtual particles
are Matters and behave like Dark Matters. They are created from the interaction of at
least two pmtics, which leads to the creation of Magravs of the Matter, therefore what
scientists call virtual particles, these are real Matters, which due to the change in their
environmental magnetic fields strength condition, they suddenly appears as matter(s)
for a very short time, until they lose their pmtics strength or their environment pmtics
strength changes or as they move out of the environmental pmtics strength level or they
seem to disappear.
Virtual particles possess a magnetosphere and the light they create in their new
environment is due to the interaction of their pmtics of their magnetosphere with the
pmtics of this new environment, which makes them visible in that given point and given
time.
Note: When the (virtual) particle(s), Matter(s) or matter(s) is moving towards the
observer due to it’s compacting of pmtics, this creates the blue shift colour of magnetic
wavelength spectrum (Chapter 7). If the virtual particles are moving away from the
point of observer, due to opening of the pmtics of the environment, they create light in
red shift colour of magnetic wavelength spectrum. (This is described in the paper:
Creation of Magnetic field).
The virtual particles are actually individual nano-atom or plasmas or sub-Matters of
plasmas.
105
The Casimir effect
In present physics, virtual particles are related to Casimir effects.
First of all, the Casimir effect and the photon energy appearance in its setup of its
confirmation is always considered to be in a vacuum condition between two
conductive plates where, photons in between two plates are observed and electrical
charges are measured.
In fact, it is not important what vacuum condition level can be achieved in test
laboratory conditions, nevertheless still a number of pmtics, Matters, plasmas (electrons
and protons) and atoms could be left in the space between the two plates, which are
under observation.
As matters are made of plasmas of interacting magnetic fields of Matters, when the
space in between the plates is freed and void of most of its atoms and Matters, at this
point the leftover matters or Matters between the two plates are more free to move in
the newly created condition environment. Hence it is natural that these residual atoms,
electron plasmas, proton, can move really in empty space and can collide with the walls
of the matter of the two plates and due to their interaction fragments of pmtics strength
are released which these are in the range of the pmtics strength of photons.
So vacuuming the gap between the plates creates a new environmental plasmatic
magnetic fields force condition that allows a more free motion of leftover Matters and
atoms in between the two plates, where in fact the boundary of the magnetosphere of
one atom can occupy or expand the full span of the gap between the two plates.
Casimir effect measurement is a good tool to measure how many atoms and/or what
Matters are left in the gap between the two plates at a given vacuum level.
We have done experiments in plasma dilution reactors, which we have developed and
have seen the Casimir effects. In these tests, we have seen some serious voltages and
currents, but never photons. Which indicates that these voltages can only be from
Antimatter source in-between plates, as matter cannot produce these levels of voltage
and amperages.
In a number of tests we have created 30 mm gap between plates and the results have
been the clear indication that Casimir effect testing is good to find nearly the number of
Matters in between the gaps, and types of Matter which are left in between the gaps. As
Matter and matter create different charge levels than the Antimatter components of
the plasma.
We have created environments of 10 (-9, -10, -11, and -12) bar in our tests, and in tests
over 10 (-8) bars there was not much difference in voltage and current measurements
from both plates’ terminals. This indicating that it does not make much difference how
far one can vacuum the gap in between the plates, there are still some components of
Matters or matters will be present in the gap, which can move with more freedom than
before. Where this small number of matters or Matters in-between the plates can
106
transfer energy through the free motion of their plasmas in collision with plasmas’ of
matters of the wall and lead to the release of pmtics fragments in the strength of the
light magnetic field spectrum or a photon.
Van der Waals forces
In respect to the Van der Waals effect, this push and pull effect is now very clear and
easy to explain, this is to say as plasmas contains all Matters (Matter, Antimatter and
Dark Matter) and these Matters are all made from the interaction of plasmatic magnetic
fields, which leads to the creation of their Magravs, so that each Matter is like a
independent entity within the structure of the plasma, at the same time plasma
possesses its own Magnetic and gravitational field forces.
By the same measure, the atom, as an independent system, possesses its own Magravs
in respect to other atoms in molecules. The same, the molecules have their own
Magravs in respect to each other.
Therefore, what has been considered as Van der Waals forces of push and pull of
molecules, these are simply Magnetic and Gravitational field forces or Magravs forces
of one molecule in respect to any other molecule.
The Van der Waals force is in fact the pull (gravitational effect) and the push (Magnetic
effect) of the individual molecules in respect to any entity (atom, molecule) around
them.
107
CHAPTER 15
Interaction between Matters
Different Matters in their environment interact and create different conditions, and
state of Matters are similar to the state of matter, as one can mix liquid with solid and
gas with liquid in state of matter, the same can be done with different states of Matters,
like allowing the pmtics of the Matter to interact with the Antimatter and further the
Antimatter with the Dark Matter. As in the case of Matters, they are all pmtics strength
dependent, where these kinds of mixings of states of Matters allow more profound
effects to be developed. This kind of mixing between the state of Matters will open new
world of science to mans’ encyclopaedia of knowledge Matteorology (knowledge of
Matters).
The process by which, Matters are created and operate in respect to each other within
the construction of the plasma has been explained in previous chapters. These Matters
individually possess their own properties and create their own effects in respect to their
environment, both individually and in conjunction with each other.
What is important to understand is: What happens when these Matters interact or come
to collide with each other within the plasma or their environment?
What is the outcome of the amalgamation of the plasmatic magnetic fields strength of
different Matters with each other?
Let us consider some of the variations between interactions of different Matters.
Interaction of Matter with Antimatter
The Matter is composed of weaker Magravs strength than the Antimatter. In this case,
the Matter always gets attracted towards the Antimatter.
In the case of the plasmatic magnetic fields of the Matter colliding with the plasmatic
magnetic fields of the Antimatter, the Matters components will get absorbed into the
larger and stronger pmtics strength, by order of magnitude, of Antimatter.
What can be observed from this impact is the release of some plasmatic magnetic fields
residual as pmtics, like release of some lights or rays or magnetic residual. The content
of the dynamic plasmatic magnetic fields of the Matter or its energy is absorbed into the
environment of the Antimatter and gets mixed in within its structural magnetic fields
strength. At this point there will be no more signs of the Matters past existence.
Where, most of the rays released in this interaction are mostly due to the coming close
of the two Magravs of the two Matters, rather than the splashing of the pmtics from the
108
surface of the Antimatter.
This is like when a drop of water falls into a cup of tea, in this case, the drop of water
becomes part of the larger teas’ liquid.
Majority of scientists working in this field, are lead to believe, as the Matter and the
Antimatter collide, due to their charge balance after the impact, the content of the two
Matters disappear into nothing, except some residuals released as energy, gamma rays
or photons, then, in their opinion, there is nothingness left as these two Matters’ charges
balance each other out.
Such a belief and concept is against any natural laws of existence. That is to say, there
cannot be a position of total annihilation of both Matters, where there can be nothing
left at all after the two actual Matters in possession of Magravs collide with each other.
This nothingness of the two Matters after the collision of the Matter and the Antimatter
is a rash assumption and incorrect.
In fact, the Matter and so-called the Antimatter by their pmtics strength order of
magnitude in the matter world, is like the Earth slamming into the Sun, and then saying
that after this collision there is nothing left of the Sun and the Earth, except some
outwards splashing fragments of plasmas from the surface of the Sun. This is illogic
attempt at a scientific explanation for such a real physical event.
The Matters of the Earth would cause a small splash on the Suns’ surface. This splash
then releases some plasmas or gamma rays or photons from the surface of the Sun. Then
the plasmatic magnetic fields components of the Earth become part of the plasmatic
magnetic fields of the plasmas of the Sun. This is exactly the same incident as when
pmtics of the Matter collides with pmtics of the Antimatter.
In view of this principle in physics of the conservation for energy, nothing in the
universe is lost or can disappear. They just change their magnetic fields strength and
their compactness from one form and level to another.
Thus, collision of the Matter and the Antimatter create nothing but the Antimatter, with
more content of different plasmatic magnetic field’s strength of the Matter components
inside it. Therefore the outcome of this collision is mainly the Antimatter balance
remaining.
Interaction of Matter with Dark Matter
This follows the same principle as the previous states of the Matter and the Antimatter.
The content of the Matter then becomes the constituent Matter of the gravitational
centre of the Dark Matter. With the difference, that in this case the Matter will not have
to overcome any magnetosphere of the Dark Matter.
This interaction will be the same as seen in the universe matter dimension, where for
example Stars and cosmic matters disappear into a Black hole in the universe.
109
In some instances, this process can disturb the overall Magravs’ strength balance of the
Dark Matter in respect to its surrounding plasmatic magnetic fields strength. This
change can induce the production of slightly stronger or weaker magnetic fields strength
magnetospheric conditions of the Dark Matter in respect to its surrounding field’s
environment.
In these rare cases, due to the change and unbalance of the magnetic fields strength
between the new content and new Magravs strength of the Dark Matter, this new
stronger or weaker plasmatic Magravs strength, allows the creation of a new
magnetosphere field strength of the Dark Matter in respect to its environments pmtics
strength to take hold. Then, what was the Dark Matter in a given environment, can in
the same given environment, with a different and new plasmatic magnetic fields
strength, now create and possess a new magnetospheric field strength zone in respect to
the same environment’s pmtics strength and then the Dark Matter can become like the
Matter that is more visible.
This incident has been recorded by cosmologists a number of times. Where, out of
nowhere, Matters appear in the Dark spaces of the universe.
In fact, even changes in the tightness of plasmatic magnetic fields in the span of
universe, can unbalance the Dark Matter environment pmtics strength and make the
Matter visible.
This magnetic unbalance of the environment causes different balance condition around
the Dark Matter pmtics, and then out of nowhere stars appears in the Dark spans of
universe.
The interaction of Antimatter and Dark Matter
In the case of the interaction of the Dark Matter and the Antimatter, there are clearly
several scenarios, which are possible.
1) Scenario 1
This case is the most probable and is considered to be the norm. This interaction is a
collision of the giants of the Matters of the plasmas‘.
Assuming that this scenario of interaction takes place within the environment of an
initial fundamental plasma.
Considering the construction of pmtics strength of the Dark Matter and the Antimatter,
when, these two Matters of the plasma collide, the outcome is normally production and
release of new and balanced plasmatic magnetic fields environments. In this case, it is
considered that each of the Matter’s components of the plasmas keeps their pmtics
strength plasma status.
110
Due to the enormity of the quantity of the amounts of the two plasmatic magnetic fields
of the Antimatter and the Dark Matter amalgamation (denoted as A-D Matter), new
supersized, unstable giant plasma is initially created. This new plasma needs to reach
stability over the entity of the plasma as a whole for it to survive. Thus, the new super
giant plasmatic magnetic field has to find a new Magnetic and gravitational balance and
equilibrium within itself.
For the new giant plasma to reach the new equilibrium condition, the new plasma has
to, and always does, release its excess plasmatic magnetic fields into its surrounding
environment. The new released plasmatic magnetic fields have to be in balance by
themselves too, for them to exist and stay within the gravitational fields of the A-D
Matter.
This new release of excess plasmatic magnetic fields near to A-D will contain some of
the Antimatter, some of the Dark Matter and some other newly balanced interacting and
attracting weaker plasmatic magnetic fields of different strength in the Matter pmtics
strength level. These weaker fields are mainly from the leftover weaker fragments of the
collision of the two giant Matters. These new released small bundles of weaker
plasmatic magnetic fields strength themselves due to their proximity and their source of
origin, these usually bunch-up and become a new miniature plasma version of the
original initial fundamental plasma within the A-D Matter.
At the same time, this newly created mini-plasma still has to keep it’s own balance and
the balance of the whole of the original Matters pmtics and stays’ within the Magravs
hold of the giant A-D Matter mixture. This mini-plasma creates its own Magravs and
then this mini-plasma has to have a Magravs positioning in respect to its original initial
fundamental plasma. Thus the new mini-plasma is forced to take a new position and
new gravitational positioning in respect to its larger neighbour of A-D and it is at this
point that it is forced out of the A-D Matter plasma environment, but still in A-D Matter
Magravs catchments’ area, therefore this mini-plasma attempts to stay in the orbit of its
mother seed, and becomes the initial fundamental satellite plasmas’ of the original AD
Matter.
Further on with the same process, the A-D Matter mixture has constituents of two
unbalanced and un-matching plasmatic magnetic fields strengths of the Dark Matter and
the Antimatter within it, at some point, the two Matters plasmatic magnetic strength
fields separate and the balance returns’ to a new central plasma. By this time the central
plasma due to this interaction, finds itself with a new rotating satelliteing smaller
plasma.
It should be noted that pmtics of different strength never mix with each other, however
they can be influenced by each other.
The collision of the Dark Matter and the Antimatter, and creation of new satelliteing
mini-plasmatic Magravs rotating around the central plasma is the creation of the
electron from the interaction and collapse of theses two Matters of the initial
fundamental plasma. The interaction of the Antimatter and the Dark Matter of the Initial
111
Fundamental plasma leading, to the creation of a new central plasma and its satellite
mini-plasma, lead to creation of Initial Fundamental Atom (hydrogen atom). This is
what I call the initial fundamental decay of the initial fundamental plasma, or decay of
the neutron.
The collision of the Dark Matter and the Antimatter is usually due to unbalance or some
deviation in the plasmatic magnetic fields’ strength of one Matter or other within the
confine of structure of the plasma itself.
2) Scenario 2
This scenario happens usually when the F1 collapses altogether, sending the two giants
Matters of the plasma, the Antimatter and the Dark Matter, to collide head on.
In this case, there are two possibilities, which remains open to the new A-D Matter
plasmatic magnetic fields.
A) The first possibility is that the plasmatic magnetic fields of the Dark Matter
superimposes the Antimatter plasmatic magnetic fields.
By this process, the outcome will be a giant size plasmatic region of the Dark Matter
and energy in the plasma.
This new giant Matter, due to the interaction and amalgamation of the two sets of
plasmatic magnetic fields strength and their Magravs of its two separate Matters will
have large-scale gravitational pull system, with no clear magnetospheric zone boundary
in respect to interaction with its outside plasmatic magnetic fields strength environment
as before.
This will be a giant gravitational region that will have massive pulling effects, but its
core cannot be seen due to the lack of interaction of its magnetospheric condition with
its environment’s pmtics. Therefore, this region even possessing enormous amount of
gravitational field pull has no balance interacting Magnetic field strength or a balance
Magravs strength in respect to its surrounding pmtics strength. This Matter seems as if
it does not exist, or appears to be Darker than it’s surrounding. Around this area,
enormous gravitational pulls‘ can be detected, but the cause of all the pulling and where
the gravitational pulls is coming from are not clear and obvious. Where, this darkness is
purely due to the balance magnetic fields strength of the magnetosphere of this Dark
Matter and being too similar in strength in respect to its surrounding environment
pmtics strength to be able to generate the magnetospheric light.
Thus, this area is and looks like as a giant eating machine, which has a lot of energy and
gravitational pull, but no visible source to show for its Dark energy as was explained
before (36) and the Dark Matter. This condition is usually referred to as the Black Hole
effects (13).
In fact, the only way that one can say that the Antimatter is cascading in this case by the
112
Dark Matter, is by observation of the appearances of the interaction of the Matters
Magravs patterns of the magnetosphere of the whole structure from the outside of the
structure.
In these cases of cascading, where the two pmtics strength at the point of separation
between the Antimatter Magravs strength and the Dark Matter Magravs strength,
internal layers cannot mix due to their different magnetic fields strength, this interaction
between two different pmtics field strength at this magnetic interface, creates an
internal pmtics-interface zone. Where, this pmtics strength interface zone creates a
different zone gravitational and Magnetic field strength on the outside of the
magnetosphere surrounding environment of the cascading Dark Matter, and the position
of this zone on the outer regions of the Magnetosphere of the Dark Matters are in
position and in-line with its physical position of the pmtics interface in the
infrastructure in the centre of the cascaded Material.
This internal interface plasmatic magnetic fields zone can create ring-like zones around
the outer boundaries of the Dark Matter magnetosphere, where these rings are like
different colour or light intensity rings around the whole of the outer boundary of the
Dark Matter in respect to their environment pmtics. Where, the thickness and the width
of such a ring is equal to the thickness of the embedded Antimatter component.
The physical observation of these effects of the pmtics-interface strength can be seen in
the gaseous planets which have initial solid core centre, and where different pmtics
strength zones interfaces of different Matter layers are created internally due to their
internal pmtics interfaces, as each interface is seen as one ring in the extended
magnetosphere of the giant gaseous planets.
These type of magnetospheric rings are usually seen around the gaseous planets with a
embedded and initiated solid matter centre cores, and as a number of different layers of
the same or different gases are superimposed on top of each other over the life time of
the planet. Where the solid matter due to temperatures of its blanketing of gases has
become to be in the fluid state-of-matter and creates its own plasmatic Magravs forces.
Which the Magravs of matters core interact with the Magravs of the gases in different
layers, and/or gas-to-gas of different layers. Where, at the interface of each layer of
matters, different Magravs strength are generated and their regions and position of
pmtics Magravs strength balance are observed, as one ring related to that specific
interface, around the outside of these planets magnetosphere environment in their solar
systems. This is exactly how the rings of the Saturn and the Jupiter are created (17, 18).
In fact if one could count all the numbers of the dark rings of the Saturn, one should be
able to say how many layers of gasses the planets has in its constituent inner structure.
This is like counting the rings across cutting of the trunk of a tree to establish its age.
How these rings have come to be made and how layering of different gas layers have
been achieved by the planet Saturn has been explained in full in the papers under
reference 17 and 18.
These multi-layer gas rings actually can bee seen around some stars too, but these are
hidden within the intense light from the surface of the star.
113
The application of multi-solid core and rings in Magravs positioning reactor
When this principle is used in a Grapos reactor, this gives the system and craft a major
impenetrable multilayer magnetic shielding ring for protection from cosmic dusts or in
defence technology for maximum shielding from incoming asteroids on the path of
high-speed crafts (17, 18, 29, 33). Or these types of magnetic multiple ringing can be
used around a craft for submerging in deep liquid environments (29, 33). Where, the
craft using these systems become liquid-sealed and Magnetic field and gravitational
depth positioning, and temperature independent.
B) The second possibility, with this interaction is that the Dark Matter’s plasmatic
magnetic fields moves to the centre of the Antimatter’s plasmatic magnetic fields
region.
In this case, the Dark Matter plasmatic magnetic fields are superimposed and they are
cascaded by the Antimatter plasmatic magnetic fields.
Considering that this scenario happens in the environment of the initial fundamental
plasma and between its Dark Matter and the Antimatter components. In this case, again,
giant plasma of double layers of the Antimatter and the Dark Matter is created and the
new plasma will suck-in the Matter components and the electron or another pmtics
around it into itself as before.
Nevertheless, this interaction gives the impression of a sudden expansion of the
Antimatter as a bright Matter. That is to say that the magnetospheric zone of the
Antimatter becomes the total magnetospheric zone of the central plasma. Thus, this new
combination of interactions will have a new plasmatic Magravs strength of the three
Matters. These being the contents of plasmatic magnetic fields’ strength of the Matter,
then the Dark Matter and then the plasmatic magnetic fields of the Antimatter.
All these Matters again as previous scenario being cascaded this time by the pmtics of
the Antimatter. Where, the weakest pmtics strength of the Matter will be in the centre,
superimposed by the plasmatic magnetic fields of the Dark Matter. Then, these two
Matters are superimposed by the pmtics strength of the Antimatter on the outside.
The new giant combination of three Matters at this stage is a super plasma size, and this
is a temporary condition and is called the Nova state of the three layers Antimatter
cascading of the plasma.
Where, the Antimatter’s strong plasmatic magnetic fields strength are on the outside
and create enormous amount of light compared to when there was a balance state of the
initial fundamental plasma. This sudden expansion of the Antimatter due to ballooning
of the other Matters inside the cascade gives the impression of a sudden expansion of
the bright plasma, or what is called a Nova condition.
Sometimes in stars, due to the internal interacting dynamic plasmatic magnetic fields of
the plasmas, and through natural process of interaction like fusion or fission or nuclear
decay and generation of weaker fields in the centre of these objects, Dark Matters and
114
Matters pmtics strength conditions are generated and held in the centre of the star.
This generation of new Matters internally will cause the expansion and ballooning of
the volume of the star initially for a short time. Further on, at this point, as the content
of the new-cascaded plasma of Matters can push its boundary to limits beyond the
internal central gravitational strength pulls of its three different Matters, then the star
explodes in its environment.
This explosion leads to the total release of the internal plasmatic magnetic fields of all
its constituent Matters and pmtics inside the cascade. Therefore, these Matters and
plasmatic magnetic fields can again start new interacting conditions and environments.
Henceforth, the whole cycle of the creation of fundamental particles, then initial
fundamental Matters, plasmas, atoms and matters starts again.
This is in fact the normal cycle of the process of interaction and attraction of plasmatic
magnetic fields strength in their confined of their environment. There is nothing more
and nothing less to this natural cycle of regurgitation of plasmatic magnetic fields of
different strength and conditions that these create for themselves and the effects they
create to secure their existence.
That is to say, in the case of the plasma, this becomes the release of some particles,
which gets absorbed by the other atomic plastic structures around the plasma.
In the case of a star, this becomes an exploding star, which its constituent plasma after
disintegration becomes part of the soup of the galaxy and the content of the star gets
absorbed in, for regeneration of new stars and so on. In the case of galaxies, this is the
same; further on the same happens to universes and so on.
There is the possibility of another scenario for the same new cascaded materials,
and that is:
Once the Nova is created and it is not allowed by the external field force in its
environment to expand its boundaries beyond its combined internal Magravs’ strength,
it is at this point that, the internal gravitational fields of its three Matters interactions
starts to lock into each other and create one overall Magravs force in respect to their
outside environment.
This new overall plasmatic Magravs force, which is created due to the interaction of
plasmatic magnetic fields of the three layering and three different pmtics strength of the
three Matters (the Matter, the Dark Matter and the Antimatter) in conjunction with each
other [This is a similar principle to the systems of three internal layers for creation of
gravitational field forces of the planet Earth as explained in Chapter 1 (12, 18)], once
this new gravitational fields forces takes place and takes hold, and becomes operational,
then purely due to its interacting layering gravitational strength magnitude, and the span
of its coverage the Matters of the cascade will start pulling all three plasmatic magnetic
fields components of three Matters tightly to itself. This causing the retraction of the
matters of the Nova and hence contraction of the Nova. The Nova volume shrinks, in
response to the new created three layers interactions’ Magravs strength.
115
Thus, by the time all the Matters settle down to their new position, this new plasma will
be a condensed Matter of all sorts. As each Matter layer, due to their plasmatic
magnetic fields strength will hold onto their position within the construction of the
cascaded plasma. Once, the new matters settle into their new positions from the
previous giant Nova condition, this new plasma state of the three Matters will be a
fraction of its Nova size. Nevertheless, its size will not be equal to the total size of the
collection of all three previous Matters and its initial fundamental plasma size, but its
overall internal gravitational fields strength will be enormous compared to its past when
it was the whole initial fundamental plasma.
By the this stage the content of the outer layer is still active plasma with bright lights of
the Antimatter, but due to the new strong internal gravitational pull of the Matters, even
the light that is created through the interaction of plasmatic magnetic fields in the outer
regions of the Antimatters, interacts with the strong internal field of the cascaded
materials and converges inwards (Chapter 9). This giving the impression that the
plasma or the Star is dormant or dying, but in fact the systems has never been as
powerful and active internally as this in its whole existence even as plasma or as a star.
Interaction of plasma with plasma
Another possible scenario in interaction of collection of Matters as a plasma, is in
collision with another collection of Matters as a plasma.
Electron interaction:
i) For example, there is the possibility that the plasma of the electron can be fused into
the plasma of the central nucleus of its proton.
“I have called this interaction and fusing of the electron to its proton plasma the interatomic
fusion principle (37). I consider this method to be a simpler and more practical
to achieve fusion for production of energy, than the path being followed by the present
scientific world in fusion reactors technology in trying to fuse two large plasmas of the
proton, without any tangible success up to now after over fifty years of research and
development to attain any sustainable fusion cycle to produce usable energy for
domestic market. These systems being like of the Jet project (Tokamak) in UK and the
present upcoming ITER (Tokamak) project being built in the South of France at the cost
of over ten-billion US dollars investment with the final goals of only to produce for a
few milliseconds of energy within 10 year’s time.
The process of the inter-atomic fusion is shown step by step in figure 39.
116
Fig. 39: Schematic process of the inter-atomic fusion.
117
Where, initially by using Dilution plasma reactors (Chapter 23, Fig. 57), by feeding the
atom of hydrogen into this reactor cores (Chapter 21, Fig. 54), and then in allowing the
magnetic atomic structure to dilute and to open up in the soup of the plasma of the
reactor (Fig. 39 diagram 1) into its sub-components of electron and proton. At this
point the magnetic fields’ strength of the soup of the reactor is brought to the levels,
which now can be matching with the plasma of the proton pmtics level, for the reactor
fields strength to match the overall Magnetic and gravitational pmtics of the protons’
plasma. This is the magnetic field strength level of the binding of the plasma, which is
called the Coulomb charge barrier of the plasma. Which at this point, the Matters’ of the
electron are more free and can be gently Magravs positioned to join up in to the Matter
components of the proton.
This is the natural method of fusion in its basic form, where there is no need for the
huge magnetic fields forces to achieve what happens naturally in the universe to fuse an
electron of atom to its proton. The same process of fusion in the plasma dilution
reactors’ technology can be used for fusing Matters, plasmas or even atoms.
This inter-atomic fusion is done in a magnetic field environment of soft plasmatic
magnetic fields forces and at the same time in a similar magnetic fields forces strength
of the same atom environment of the two similar plasmas of the proton and the electron
of the same atom, where, in fact the magnetic fields of the outer cores of the reactor
performs a similar job as the magnetic rings of the Tokamak systems in providing the
containment magnetic fields. Where as in the plasma dilution reactors, at the same time
natural gravitational and Magnetic fields needed for fusion criterion is provided by the
operation of the fields in two cores of the reactor fields’ interactions with each other.
If scientists use this method of creation of Magnetic and gravitational fields forces in
the present Tokamak reactors’, to replace the solid coil electric magnetic rings, they will
achieve fusion in real universal conditions, fusion within natural gravitational fields
forces environment necessary to accommodate the fusing of any plasma at a fraction of
the present costs and in a very short time-frame.
With these soft magnetic fields in plasma dilution reactors, one can achieve more
rapidly fusion than using current induced enforcing magnetic fields rings. These types
of magnetic fields strength in dilution plasma reactors are similar to the magnetic fields
strength of the plasmas and atoms, and hence they can be manipulated much easier,
than, trying to force the plasmas’ of two protons.
In comparison, that is to say, to make an omelette, it is easier to mix the contents of two
uncooked eggs homogeneously as happens in plasma dilution reactors, whereas in
trying to make the same omelette, this time by boiling the content of two eggs first into
two hard boiled eggs, as Tokamak scientists have been trying to do for past fifty years
to make the fusion in reactors by hard balling the content of plasmas (by squeezing the
plasma with the use of external magnetic fields to a tighter, harder, smaller entity) and
then trying to fuse the two hard balls of plasmas to achieve the fusion process. Then
hoping, with increasing the speed of the two hard balls, that they can smash and fuse the
two smaller hard balls together. That is why the present path of Tokamak technology in
trying to achieve fusion is a sweet dream that will never come true.
118
In this inter-atomic fusion technology, smaller and weaker plasmas of electrons, which
are already within the structure of an atom, are fused into the Matters’ component of the
proton of its central plasma (Fig. 40). This is a more realistic and practical method of
fusion than the present, fusion technology in trying to fuse two large plasmas of
hydrogen’s protons together, and creating unmanageable heat, of several billions of
degrees. Where, the tools and materials to control and harvest the energy of such huge
temperatures, on the long term bases in small Tokamak reactors, does not exist within
the known galaxies in the universe.
Fig. 40: Schematic diagram of the fused proton and electron plasmas.
In these processes of dilution plasma technologies, when the electron plasma is
gravitationally positioned or encouraged to amalgamate its contents with the content of
the plasma of the proton, as the two plasmas approach each other, the interaction of two
plasmatic magnetic fields of the two plasmas will and can produce several scenarios,
which their effects can be harvested for production of different energy levels or
production of new materials and so many other purposes.
In brief two cases are discussed here:
a) If the strength of the pmtics of these plasma dilution reactors is set at a level, to be
just below that of the total balance of the pmtics strength (Coulombs barrier) of the
plasma of the proton, in this case, as the two plasmas approach each other, the initial
stages’ of the process of fusion starts, which this process begins and will be
119
accompanied with light and heat emission as in figure 39 – diagrams 1 to 5. This light or
heat from this process can be used for example for present state of art technology
turbine power generators directly. Where, the temperature of the interaction of the
systems can be set at the optimum efficiency temperature of the turbine. Hence,
operating these reactors in the same configurations as is done in the present fission
reactor technology power generators to generate steam to run turbines. With the
difference that these dilution technology reactors leave and produce no nuclear waste,
and heat can be generated at any level as per demand of the system.
In these reactors, the Magravs strength similar to the plasmas’ Coulombs barriers
charges can be created and controlled. In the dilution plasma reactors’ the magnetic
fields created through the soup of the plasma will create and maintain pmtics strength,
which can be similar to the magnetic fields barrier strength of the plasma of the proton.
Where, the strength of the pmtics field in the reactor will decide the strength of the
pmtics in comparison to the protons’ plasma Magravs strength. As the pmtics strength
of the reactor reaches more to the level of the Magravs strength of the plasma, then
there is less resistance and less friction between the plasmas of the proton and the
electron, when, they are brought together to fuse. Thus as the strength of the magnetic
fields of the plasma can be reached by the reactor operation, this allows less friction and
hence less heat to be produced by the interaction and by the gravitation of the two
plasmas of the proton and the electron to fuse. By being able to control the pmtics
strength of the plasma dilution reactors Matters’ soup of plasma, one can dictate the
amount and the rate of the heat release from the interaction of the two plasmas, thus one
can control the heat output of the reactor, if the production of heat is the primary
objective of the use of such a system.
In general, in being able to control the Coulombs barrier strength in respect to the
given environment of the reactor, one can vary this barrier magnetic fields strength in
the soup of Matters in the plasma dilution reactors.
Therefore there is no need even to fuse the plasma of the proton with the plasma of the
electron, and by just bringing them close to each there to create the right friction when
the Coulomb barrier is at the right strength, between the two plasmas, then the reactor
can generate a controlled heat-output, or any other rays that is demanded from the
systems’ operations.
Therefore by bringing the reactor magnetic fields strength to the level of Coulomb
barriers, one can bring into balance the magnetic strength barrier changes in the overall
mixture of the reactor to any level from, or to the Coulombs barrier magnetic fields
levels.
Where, the difference between the two, the reactor and the plasmas’ magnetic fields
strength, will decided the temperature output of the reactor when, the plasma of the
electron is gravitated to the plasma of the proton to fuse. The outcome of the bringing of
the two plasmas into each other proximity and the interaction of their Magravs, leads to
the friction between the two plasmas, and the release of pmtics in form of heat. Where,
the temperature of the heat released by this attempted fusion is directly controlled by the
pmtics field strength within the reactor and in respect to the variation level from the
120
Coulomb barriers’ pmtics strength level.
An example of this controlled heating of interaction pmtics in the natural world is the
like of when the pmtics of the sunlight in atmospheric condition becoming in touch with
pmtics of the cell of the human body. Where, as the pmtics of the proteins of the cell are
always constant, by varying pmtics strength of the direct sunlight, the heat released
from the interaction of these two pmtics, the human feels the increase in the pmtics
strength as heat of different degrees. The stronger the pmtics of the sunlight, the more
heat is produced from the interaction of two pmtics, thus the warmer one feels. This is
like walking from the shadow into the sunlight.
The phenomenon of heating during illness, happens due to the interaction of pmtics of a
bacteria within the blood protein pmtics, where as a blood cell comes in touch with a
stronger pmtics of the bacteria, the level of the interaction of the extra pmtics from the
structure of infection, in interaction with the blood cell, manifests itself as heat or the
increase in the body temperature (this is explained in detail in the paper: Universal order
of creation, to be published as a book), where the interaction and possible fusion of two
pmtics of the bacteria and the body cell leads to a release of heat, called “an infection”
temperature. This being the reason why the same pmtics of bacteria can have no affect
on some human bodies and the same infection can create high temperatures like 41°C +.
The reason being that the cell of the one with the high temperature has a lower pmtics
strength, thus the interaction of the two infection and the body Magravs pmtics creates
more release of fragments of pmtics as heat. When the temperature reaches a level that
the Magnetosphere of the human protein reaches its dilution point then the cell is destructured.
b) When the neutron is needed to be produced from the atom of hydrogen in space for
production of heavier atoms, one can follow the process from stage 1 to stage 8 of the
Fig 38. In this process the pmtics strength of the reactor are set to be nearer to the
binding Magravs strength of the boundary of the protons of the plasma, so that the
electrons’ plasma literally melts into the protons Matter structure and the matching
pmtics of both plasmas of the proton and the electron. Which these plasmas and their
pmtics were all of the same origin; this is amalgamation to produce new neutron type
initial fundamental plasma. This is the process of the decay of the initial fundamental
plasma in reverse, using the same original components of Matters pmtics of all three
matters of the plasma. Such a neutron can be added to the construction of the atomic
structure of lighter atoms to create gap(s) needed for Magravs positioning for the
protons of the nucleus to accommodate an extra proton and its accompanying electron
for production of even heavier atoms, for example for the production of carbon, oxygen
and nitrogen to produce protein base nutrition in deep space travels. Alternatively, one
can produce atoms of any matter from initial hydrogen atoms, through the use of the
same method of progressive accumulations of protons and neutrons in fusion in plasma
dilution reactors.
ii) The other condition is, when the plasma of an electron is attracted to the protons’
plasma, but does not get absorbed within its pmtics, due to their Matters strength
friction at the zones of contact of the two plasmas.
121
As has been explained in previous chapters, the electron is itself a plasma condition and
a collection of dynamic pmtics of Matters. Where through the method of its
construction and motion around its nucleus, this electron is always in proximity of other
electrons of the similar construction or it is in the proximity of larger plasmas such as
the neutrons or the protons of the nucleus of its atom.
The Motion of the electron around the proton is created due to the construction of its
internal Matters (Chapter 19). Similarly, it has been explained that the interaction of
two pmtics due to their friction lead to release of pmtics strength fragments of lower
strength of pmtics or rays in the electro-magnetic field spectrum of the light.
Now it is very simple to understand how light is released due to external factors. When
the electron of the atom is forced to come close enough to another electron or the
components of the plasma of its nucleus or a nucleus of another atom. So that, the
interaction of the two plasmas Magravs of the electron and the proton leads to the
release of lower magnitude pmtics strength fragments that, its pmtics strength are in the
light electromagnetic spectrum (It has been explained that when two plasmas interact
and collide; the pmtics fragments of their collisions always releases pmtics in the light
bandwidth)(Chapter 7).
This interaction and collision of the pmtics of the two plasmas does not mean
amalgamation of the two, but in coming too closed to each other, the two pmtics
strength touch and bounce off due to their dynamism.
Hence, as the electron has lost some of its pmtics due to the interaction and collision,
with the pmtics of the proton, so now being in possession of different Magravs strength,
the electron accepts a new Magravs positioning (Chapter 19) in respect to its proton
plasmas.
This interaction of the two plasmas creating the closeness or distance of the electron to
its systems’ central Magravs point, or what is called that the electron finds a new
ground energy level position after releasing some of its energies as light, this is then a
new Magravs positioning of the electron in respect its protons’ Magravs strength forces,
which is acceptable by both plasmas Magravs within the atoms structure after collision
between the two pmtics of the plasma of the electron and the proton or other plasmas in
its vicinity.
Thus when plasmas interact like the plasma of the electron and proton, this leads to the
creation of light in the majority of case.
122
CHAPTER 16
The fundamental difference between Inertia and Gravity
Inertia is said to be due to the total interaction of pmtics of Matter(s) of a solid object
without the central dynamic cores that can create Magnetic and gravitational fields
forces.
Inertia, through the new understanding of the structure of the plasma, can be simply
defined as “the pmtics and gravitational fields due to the Matter in the matter (solid,
liquid, gases) components of the plasma (Fig. 41 link F)”
Fig. 41: Interaction and connection between inertia of Matter pmtics of an entity (I and J) in
respect to another entity and their interaction (F and H) with magnetic field (C) and
gravitational field (D) of systems respectively.
123
Gravity is simply defined as ”the total pmtics Magravs created by all components of
the Matters (Matter, Antimatter, and Dark Matter) of the plasma (Fig. 41 link D and G,
and Fig. 42 Link G).”
Inertia is said to be due to a total collection of pmtics of the constituent Matter(s) of
atoms and molecules of an object, interacting and attracted with each other and any
other Matter(s) or matter(s) or Magravs.
The principle of inertia is applicable to the Dark Matters and the Antimatters as well as
the Matter components of the plasma in the universe.
As each atom is made of and possesses specific pmtics strength, these fields, in
interacting with each other in the state of matter (solid, liquid and gas), create their own
total Magravs by addition of the overall magnetic fields of all the atoms of the structure
of any matter. The structure of the matter could be made of molecules or an asteroid or
any physical object, which is void of gravitational pull, but in possession of pmtics
Magravs’ pull of Matter component of plasma, due to the construction of components of
its neutrons, protons and electrons of matters. These pmtics, in being interlocked with
each other, cannot create a dynamic Magnetic and gravitational pull or interactions
between the constituent pmtics of all the Matters of an object. Nevertheless, they create
gravitation in between the Matter components of the Matters of plasmas of the object.
In other words they have or create gravitation in respect to Matter-to-Matter
components of plasma, or this singularity Matter attraction or gravitation of the total
Matter of plasma, is called the Inertia.
As the Gravity is due to the overall dynamic pmtics strength of all Matters of an object,
which is in possession of at least two sets of dynamic pmtics in respect to other pmtics,
where, the interaction between two sets of dynamic pmtics, leads to the creation of
gravitational field forces and simultaneously Magnetic field forces for plasmatic
magnetic fields, or rays of magnetic fields, or the whole Matters of an object, this being
a planet or a star or others.”
In the case of larger objects with multi-core configurations like Earth, the multiple
pmtics forces of dynamic multiple-core objects are loose from each other. Hence, the
overall dynamic pmtics of their Matters can interact, creating much more active fields to
be brought into play. These being, the stronger magnetic fields constituent components
of the plasma; Matter, Antimatter, and Dark Matter, F1 zone fields and all other
transition zone fields to interact with each other within the plasma.
That is to say, that the collective free Matters of the plasma create a stronger pull or
gravitational forces than when the same independent are compacted and cannot be free
in a dynamic condition in matter (solid, liquid and gas).
Gravitational fields, due to their free motion and strength of interaction of their Matters
with others of the same, can span and reach further a field in the environment.
Gravitational field forces are always stronger and span wider in their given
environment, than their inertia of individual Matter counterparts, simply because
124
gravitational field forces of planets or stars are mainly created by all components of
pmtics of Matters of the plasma (Fig. 42), rather than the collective plasmatic magnetic
fields of individual types of Matters’ components of the plasma or the matter.
Planets’ and stars’ total pull is a combination of the gravitational fields and inertia pull
of all their constituent Matters and matters. These composite pulls are created due to the
dynamic plasmatic materials of their constituent Matters in the inner cores of these
objects in respect to each other, plus the total pmtics interaction of their matters.
Through tests, it has been proven; that the Magravs force strength of a dynamic object is
independent of temperature and pressure of their cores. Where, we do not consider this
to be the same for the inertia of the matter (solid, liquid and gas).
At the same time, Magravs of a dynamic object can vary as the strength of its Matters
pmtics constituent changes. Where, the inertia of the solid matter is always constant,
both in respects to the same initial given position.
It is considered that Matters, in general, possess Magravs forces due to their dynamic
construction of their pmtics.
As much as the universe has inertia field forces, in respect to Matter components of the
plasma, there is Antimatter inertia in respect to the Antimatters components of and
Dark Matter inertia in respect to the Dark Matter components of the plasma or the
universe (Fig. 41). In fact, a collection of the Antimatter and the Dark Matter can
possess inertia similar to the physical Matter conditioning of their environment.
Therefore, the same matter possesses separate Dark Matter and Antimatters inertias too.
By the same measure, it is to realise that there are Matter Magravs systems as are
Antimatter and Dark Matter Magravs systems in the universe. In understanding this
clarification, in the systems of attraction of Matters, reactors can be build which are
inertia dependent and not gravitational dependent.
It is important to note that; gravitational fields of planets and stars are all created by the
Matters components of plasma. This means gravitational fields affect all Matters of
plasma (Fig. 42), where inertias of certain Matters affect only that particular Matter
component of the Plasma. At the same time, it is clear that gravitational field reactors
can be produced in such a way that their gravitational fields can attract certain Matters
only.
These systems will be like laser systems with the advantage that the laser operation can
work in reverse, that is to say the system can send rays of a given pmtics strength as
well as attraction or gravitating the same rays and collection of pmtics towards or into
the system too.
These systems can or will have, single or multi-molecules pmtics gravitational settings,
that can be attracted to, or repelled by only specific pmtics strength, to or from their
environment.
125
Fig. 42: Interaction between the pmtics Magnetic fields (I) and gravitational fields (G) of two
Magravs systems.
Note: In fact the term used as “gravity” has to be explained as gravitational and
Magnetic field forces, as when an object is attracted by gravitational fields of a matter,
like the Earth, at the same time it is repelled by the Magnetic field forces of the object
too. Thus, when talking about gravity it is correct to talk about the overall Magnetic
and gravitational fields (Magravs).
These simple mono- or multiple-setting gravitational or inertia systems (Fig. 41 and Fig.
42) can be used for specific extraction of certain Matters, matters or materials from the
universal Matters or matters soup.
Such systems, will change the present industrial systems thinking that magnetic
attraction is only limited to ferrite metallic objects. Man has now the possibility to make
systems that can attract any matter through the development of these systems.”
These systems for example can be used, once set to appropriate pmtics gravitational
126
field strength levels, so that they can extract only the CO2 from air, or specific poison
from water, or rare metals from the Earth and space and so forth (31).
These reactor systems can be used for production of proteins for human consumption
and so forth in the future space travels (32, 34, and 38). The production of proteins like
matters, through gravitational plasma dilution mixing has been tested and different
matters were collected in several tests in summer of 2008. In these tests, the proteins
produced and extracted from the reactor cores caused the damage to the ancillary
systems of the reactor set-ups. These proteins layers were physically visible and
tangible.
Using the mono-Magravs systems (38), new matters can be extracted from other
environments, like nano-materials of all sorts. These systems can be used to produce
specifics matters too, matters like, uranium, hydrogen and so forth from the plasma of
the universe as the needs for their use arises.
Thus through the understanding of the principle of mono- or multi-gravitational and
inertia systems, reactors can be evolved that are gravitational to one object or one matter
or one Matter only. Through understanding of the interaction of the plasmatic magnetic
gravitational principles, reactors have been built, that have a Magnetic or gravitation to
plastic at one point, and by resetting its configuration becomes magnetic to carbon and
so on. Thus, mono-gravitational and inertia systems can be developed that have specific
magnetic attraction or repulsion to one Matter, matters or any Matters of the plasma that
can be expected of them through their pmtics strength operation setting.
On the other hand, the repulsion technology of the same Grapos can be used to send the
Dark Matter and/or its pmtics energy as the Dark energy of the same plasma of specific
pmtics strength into deep space for specific applications.
These types of gravitational lasers type reactors can be used for example in
communication systems, where the information packs, using mono-pmtics strength of
the Dark Matter and Dark energy can be sent through the system, so that the
information can be packaged in the Dark Matter-envelop and sent without resistance or
loss of energy, for it to travel with speeds beyond the speed of light to its destination
anywhere in cosmos. The speed of communication through mono-Magravs systems are
speeds which can be several times faster by order of magnitude than the present used
state-of-the-art communication systems with satellites and microwave technologies.
These speeds of transfer of information will be, by order of magnitude, faster than the
speed of light.
These GRavitational lASERS systems, that can be called “Grasers”, can be used for
example to avoid a head-on collision and destruction of crafts by an asteroid in the path
of the motion of crafts in deep space (33), or within atmospheric condition. The present
missile technology due to its slowness through development of these reactors are
obsolete, as once fired to protect the craft in space, for example from asteroids by the
time the missile will arrive at the point of destined collision between the spacecraft and
the asteroid, maybe it will be years after the craft has past that point.
These mono-gravitational or mono-inertia systems will bring to Man the realisation that
127
the time of making war-machines has come to its end.
As Man will come to understand, soon enough that using these mono-gravitational or
inertia systems against one another as tools of war will mean and will have only one
outcome, and that is a total wipe-out of the human race from the face of the Earth. The
men of war through this technology will come to accept peace not out of their pleasure
but out of the fear of their own demise.
The use and capability of the use of this knowledge and of the effectiveness of these
mono-Magravs systems lethality, has been the cause and the keeper of the peace in the
universe. No chance, will be given to the Man, to change the tranquillity of universal
peace by use of this technology.
Man through the lethal powers of these mono-Magravs systems will be taught an
unforgiving and painful lesson, if he ever tries to use this technology and knowledge to
carry on with his aggressive behaviours, as has been his habit for centuries on his own
planet. Then this will be the coming of the end of the term of the Man in the universe.
It is clear that any celestial object as the planets, stars and galaxies, are all created
through the attraction and interaction of these Matters and matters, their interactions and
their constituent plasmatic magnetic fields. These interactions and collections of
Matters and matters in respect to the plasmatic magnetic fields strength, which larger
objects possess by their order of magnitude, decides’ what will be in their part of their
environment. That is to say, the plasmatic Magravs created by the plasmatic magnetic
fields of Matters in the inner cores of the stars in principle will decide on the size and
the span of the dominion of its field in its environment. Then these Magravs strength
and their balances dictate what matters or Matters will be attracted to the atom,
molecule, planet or the solar system.
This principle of mono-gravitational plasmatic magnetic fields strength forces is the
main reason in the universe that why certain planets only retain one element in their
structure. For example, this is one of the reasons why the planet Saturn is mainly made
of helium on its outer layers as its main constituent matter (17). The reason being that
the initial Magravs of the interaction of pmtics of Matters and matters in the inner cores
of the planet has been set to be equal to the helium plasmatic magnetic fields strength of
matters in that part of solar system in the early life of the planet.
This mono-Magravs positioning field strength of the Saturn is one of the reasons, why
this planet, with its strong gravitational field forces, does not pull in and absorbs a large
number of asteroids from the Astor-belts. The other reason is that, mono-Magravs
systems possess very strong Magnetic fields too, which this is one of the reasons why
this planet can keep the matters of asteroids in check.
Alternatively, certain galaxies have more of one matter like hydrogen than the others
having nitrogen and so on. Thus, the pmtics of Magravs forces and their mixture with
the inertia of a planet dictates what matters are extracted from their part of their
environment, like the solar system or galaxies.
Thus, Magravs positioning reactors are not only for creation of motion and for
128
protection, but they will be the main tool for cleaning environments, collecting
preferred Matters, matters, etc.
129
CHAPTER 17
Plasma’s and Nuclear decay
The nuclear decay principles of an atom, is in general, considered to be on “the same
principles and methods and as the simple decay explained previously for the initial
fundamental plasma into a proton and an electron (Fig. 43)”.
For the initial fundamental plasma to reach the ground-level plasmatic magnetic fields
content condition, the plasma divides itself into two new and exactly similar structures
with different amount of mass of the same constituent plasmatic magnetic fields Matters
for the creation of a proton and an electron, and releases its unwanted pmtics as residual
pmtics or as rays (gamma or x-rays, etc)(Fig. 42). I call this process of the neutrons
decay “The initial fundamental plasmatic decay.”
Through the process of releasing of the exact amount of plasmatic magnetic fields from
the neutron necessary for the creation of a proton, an electron and the release of
energy or other rays from the initial fundamental plasmatic magnetic fields, this, in a
way, confirms that all initial fundamental particles of plasmas are always make exactly
of the same and similar plasmatic magnetic fields and the same configurationally
structure. This being another proof that initial fundamental plasmas in the universal
order of Matter are always made through and by the same Specific Entangled Plasmatic
MAgnetic Fields (SEPMAF) strength criterion and procedure, as has been previously
explained.
The principles of the nuclear decay of initial fundamental multi-plasmas of an atom, is
considered to be solely due to the re-balancing of the overall plasmatic Magravs
strength components for Matters of plasmas of the atom to maintain an overall
Magravs forces balance of all participating plasmas, in the construction of the atom.
These being the plasmatic magnetic fields of neutrons, protons, electrons and their
constituent Matters, their plasmatic magnetic fields of their Matter, Antimatter and Dark
Matter and their magnetic fields forces of each plasma.
For the plasmas of an atom to stay together and hold onto its constituent structure
plasmatic magnetic fields, some of these plasmatic magnetic fields in motion (energy)
are transferred to other plasmas, and in term, these plasmatic magnetic fields are said
to be used. At the same time, part of the initial fundamental particles fields of plasmas
are used for the upkeep of the integrity of the nucleus positioning and dynamism; As
part of the binding energy is consumed for holding the fundamental plasmas together.
As in this cycle of consuming pmtics reaches that enough pmtics have been used, that
the initial fundamental plasmatic Magravs of the plasma cannot hold onto their initial
gravitational positions in respect to each other. The plasmas making up the part of
participating neutrons or protons in the centre nucleus of atom, gravitationally
reposition themselves within the nucleus for the nucleus to find a new Magravs balance
and equilibrium positioning in respect to other plasmas.
At this point of magnetically repositioning of the plasma of the heavy nucleus, the
130
nuclei of heavier atoms split into exactly the same configurations of two or more new
Magnetic fields and gravitationally positioned balanced plasmatic strength
configurations (Fig. 43) of the plasma’s of neutrons to protons and electrons, and hence
split into two new atoms. This regular splitting pattern of heavier atom to two or more
light atoms is known as a controlled fission of atoms.
As the initial fundamental plasmas were all made of the same initial fundamental
particles of the same specific magnetic fields strength and interactions, in their
disintegration of denser nucleus atoms, they split and gather into two or more new less
denser atoms and of Magravs’ configuration, and their need for the new equilibrium of
collective plasmas of new atoms.
That is how the atoms are always spilt into exactly the same lower order of numbers of
neutrons, protons and electrons in the new nuclei for the overall new balance pmtics of
the two new atomic structures to be able to be kept.
Fig. 43: Schematic of a decay of pmtics and Matters of the Initial Fundamental Plasma
(NEUTRON), “the initial fundamental plasmatic decay”.
In principle the overall disintegration of all atoms heavier than Hydrogen, involved in
the collective pmtics of a given matter, the collective pmtics of the residual matters is
always constant, and of the same end-structure of new and lighter atoms.
The overall numbers of the plasmas involved in a structure of a given matter is said to
be constant, purely due to the fact that the overall rate of interactions and disintegration
of plasmatic magnetic fields are considered to take place at a constant rate. Hence, the
phenomenon that takes about the same time for the plasmas to reach a point of using a
given amount of dynamic plasmatic magnetic fields (energy), before they reorganise
themselves to a new balance condition. This reorganisation or rebalancing of overall
plasmatic magnetic fields of the components of nuclei, leads to the fundamental
principle of the nuclear decay nuclear of an atom.
131
This reorganisation of the new plasmatic magnetic fields balance in mass of matters is
in so many ways dependent on all of the atoms participating in the total structure of the
mass of the matter. This is irrespective of the number of atoms in the matter, these being
in the solid, liquid or gaseous state of matter.
The nuclear decay in some plasmas can be triggered and be due to internal changes in
the plasmatic magnetic field’s structural balance, or can occur due to changes in the
external environment of the initial fundamental plasma. These changes can be due to the
changes in the external equilibrium of magnetic fields forces or field strength of other
initial fundamental plasmas, or surrounding plasmatic magnetic fields adjacent or near
to the initial fundamental plasma.
This being why different atoms of a given matter decay at different rates depending on
their position within the overall structure of tangible matter. That is to say the decay of
atoms is environmental pmtics strength dependent. Which the environment can be
within the same matter construction of atoms, or the interface between the matter and
for example matters of air. Where each environment enforces different rates of use of
internal pmtics of different matters within the nucleus of that atom. This being the
reason why different rate of decay of atoms within matters are considered to have a
half-life principle. Where the half-life is, and can be pmtics strength environmental
dependent.
Interesting point to consider:
Does the reorganisation take place in the same position first and the same number,
which initiates the course of the decay in the rest of the mass?
Is the decay of an atom in a mass happening faster in the inner positions of the mass of
matter, or on the edges of the mass?
132
CHAPTER 18
Neutron-Proton, Electron-Atom
Through the new understanding of the method by which the initial fundamental
particles and their subsequent plasmatic magnetic fields interaction, leads to the
creation of the initial fundamental Matters (Matter, Dark Matter and Antimatter)
leading to the creation of initial fundamental plasmas or the Neutrons, the subsequent
degeneration of initial fundamental plasmas through decays further leads to creation of
protons and electrons of an atom, and their interactions and collections into molecules
and matters (solid, liquid and gas).
Fundamentally, initial fundamental particles interactions, leading to the creation of
different states of Matters and the creation of initial fundamental plasmas, where these
plasmas are considered to be in a total plasmatic magnetic equilibrium state (Fig. 44
and Fig. 45).
The Initial Fundamental Plasmas are neutrons in characteristic. Neutrons (Fig. 44 and
Fig. 45), in their construction, are considered as balanced dynamic plasmatic magnetic
fields environments.
Fig. 44: Schematic presentation of the overall Magravs of Matters and the fields of the Neutron.
Neutrons, due to the larger content of the three Matters and their F1, they create a
stronger gravitational pull between the Matters of the plasma, consequently their
133
overall Magravs of the initial fundamental plasmas are considered to possess more
mass, than the total sum of the masses of the individual proton and electron, from the
same plasma after its decay.
Fig. 45: Matters schematic diagram of the Neutron.
For the initial fundamental plasma to find its final balanced equilibrium plasmatic
magnetic fields force strength condition, due to different effects, the initial fundamental
plasma reduces its plasmatic magnetic fields balance to its ground-level magnetic
fields mass level (Fig. 46 diagram 7) for it to survive, hence the initial fundamental
plasma disintegrates or decays’ to its sub-Matter levels and fields.
The decay of the neutron
This process has been explained in previous chapters where, now we look at this
process in more detail.
The release and division of components of the initial fundamental plasma leads to the
release of two independent, yet at the same time interlocked, balanced plasmatic
magnetic fields environments plasmas (Fig. 46 diagram 8). Of these two new plasmatic
magnetic fields plasmas, one would retain more of the initial fundamental plasmas’
mass and be the larger of the two balanced plasmatic magnetic fields (Fig. 46 diagram
7). The second plasma will contain less of the pmtics of the initial fundamental plasma
and mass and would be smaller (Fig. 46 diagram 6). The larger of the two plasmas’,
would stay in the centre, due to its mass and Magravs strength would become the
proton of the atom (Fig. 46 diagram 8). The new smaller balanced plasmatic magnetic
134
fields released can be said to manifest itself as an electron (Fig. 46 diagram 8) of the
same atom.
Fig. 46: The eight steps of the Neutron decay cycle to a proton and an electron and then an
atom.
135
It is considered that the pmtics of the Antimatter components of the neutron start the
process of the decay of the neutron. As the Antimatter is the main and the strongest of
the Matters’ of the initial fundamental plasma (Fig. 46 diagram 1), in comparison the
Antimatter is the star in a solar system. Then the pmtics of the Dark Matter part of the
neutron plasma splits simultaneously as the total balance of the Magravs forces of the
plasma is disturbed (Fig. 46 diagram 1). This process is continued up to the point that,
due to the cycle of separation of more and more of the two pmtics of the Antimatter and
the Dark Matter, leads to splitting of the Matter part of the plasma (Fig. 46 diagram 4)
as the plasma tries to keep its overall stability and equilibrium.
At this point, the pmtics fragments of the Antimatter, the Dark Matter, the Matter, and
other pmtics within the plasma, through the dynamism of the plasma internal
environment, are brought close to each other and then merge to produce a small and
independent mini-plasma within the structure of the initial plasma.
Where this new embedded mini-plasma in the overall structure of the initial
fundamental plasma becomes the structure of the initial fundamental plasma of the
electron of the atom.
The plasma of the electron by this time is formed internally and has establishes its own
balance Magravs zone and hence its own magnetosphere (Fig. 46 diagram 5 and 6). At
this stage, the Magravs of the electron plasma tries to find and reach its own Magravs
positioning balance in respect to the leftover pmtics and Matters Magravs of the initial
fundamental plasma. At this point, as the two plasmas try to find their Magravs
positioning in respect to each other, the electron plasma is pushed out-off the
boundaries of the initial fundamental plasma (Fig. 46 diagram 7) environment.
At this point where the two plasmas find their Magravs positioning balance, this
becomes the gap between the proton and the electron, or the ground energy level for
the electron in respect to the proton’ of the plasma. From this point on, the foundation
for the final step of the making of an atom with contents of a proton and an electron is
reached (Fig. 46 diagram 8).
Therefore the new balanced fields of the original initial fundamental plasma now
becomes the components of the two newly balanced plasmatic magnetic fields plasmas
of the proton and the electron of an atom (Fig. 48).
From this point on, the motion and rotation of the electron around the proton is set to
follow, according to what is described in Chapter 19.
The similarities between the construction of the protons’ plasma and the electron
plasmas components of Matters, as both have started together quasi-independent life,
from the same initial fundamental plasma mother (Fig. 47).
136
Fig. 47: Schematic similarities between construction of a proton and an electron (components of
Matters).
Fig. 48: Pmtics presentation of Initial Fundamental Atom (hydrogen).
As the initial fundamental plasma splits into two balanced plasmas (Fig. 46 diagram 1
to 8), this guaranties the total balance of the integrity of the complete original initial
fundamental plasmatic Magravs configuration.
Thus, the splitting and decay of the initial fundamental plasma into the proton and the
137
electron (Fig. 48), called the initial fundamental decay, is a natural decay process as is
the nuclear decay of heavier atomic structures into lighter atoms. Where as the plasma
uses some of its pmtics to keep its position, motion and magnetosphere boundary, it
needs to break up to smaller atomic substructures that can guaranty its overall magnetic
and gravitational field structure, thus the term “decay of the atom”. This neutron
division, to the substructures of a proton and an electron, is for guaranteeing the
survival overall of what was achieved before for the creation of initial fundamental
plasma (Fig. 48).
This method of the Initial Fundamental Plasma Decay to the proton and the electron is
the reason why in atomic structures the number of the electrons and the protons have
always been seen to be in matching numbers, as there is no alternative way in nature
for the creation of proton and electron in the universe in general, however individual
electrons can be produced from the pmtics in plasma dilution reactors.
In the construction of higher atomic number elements (Fig. 49), for the total balance in
both Magravs of the nuclei and their respective electrons, these heavier atoms need to
have more of the balanced plasma components of neutrons.
Fig. 49: Schematic of pmtics of a complex atom (like Helium).
Note: Through this simple configuration (Fig. 49), one can understand why certain
chemical bindings and structure of some atoms and molecules of certain proton
combination interactions in a given environment become possible.
138
In fact, the neutron, due to its balanced magnetic plasma or neutrality, and at the same
time possessing its own Magravs magnetosphere, becomes the space gaps and space(s)
needed for Magravs positioning of protons, in respect to each other, as much as
magnetic fields equalisers or balancers in the construction of the nucleus of atoms with
more than one proton (Fig. 49).
In the heavier elements, due to the tightness of packing, if there were not so many
neutrons to create some magnetic and Magravs positioning balance gap, or what we call
gaps, then due to the protons gravitational pulls, part of the nucleus would most
probably clog-up, this being due to the interlocking of the Magravs of protons in the
nucleus of the atom. In the majority of cases, this clogging-up would most probably
lead to the explosion of the nucleus, due to repulsion of the fields or Magnetic fields of
Magravs within the construction of the nucleus in being too close to each other’s
proximity. On the other hand without the existence of neutrons as a gap the nucleus
would not be a gravitationally positioned stable configuration.
A configuration of the complex structure of the initial fundamental plasmas like an
atom of the Helium and the positioning of its neutrons, protons and electrons are shown
in figure 49. This shows the overall gravitational fields and Magnetic fields generated
by interaction of these individual parts, in respect to the dynamic Matters and the fields
each part produces both internally, and in their overall external boundary interaction of
the plasmatic Magravs of the atom.
By a close observation of the proton and electron’s Magravs balance, it is now clear
how the different electron orbits of heavier atoms come to be created. That is to say, as
the number of protons increases, the boundary of the Magravs of all protons in the
centre of the nucleus increases, thus allowing and accommodating the next orbit for the
motion and Magravs positioning of the next layers orbits of electrons. It has to be
remembered that protons are dynamic entities, thus not more than certain numbers can
revolve in the compact zone of a nucleus. So as the number of protons and their
equivalent electrons are added to the nucleus, more room is needed for the free motion
of these protons. Hence the only way a neutral zone can be created for the free motion
of these additional protons for the structure of nucleus to be Magnetically and
gravitationally in balance, is to add more balance neutrons to create an environment for
the free motion of the protons and their Magravs positioning.
Thus as proton number increases, and the volume of the nucleus increases to keep all
protons in motion, and hence more numbers of neutrons are needed. This is the reason
why one sees a larger number of neutrons in the nucleus of heavy atoms. The more
neutrons and protons are in the centre, the larger the magnetosphere of the nucleus
boundaries. Hence, the accommodation of more electrons in further distances locations
from the centre nucleus. Where all these electrons, protons and neutrons overall pmtics
Magnetic field and gravitational field have to be at all times in balance.
It is fundamental to understand that “ the negative field charge of any magnetic fields is
due to its Gravitational field strength or pull, and the positive charge of the fields due to
the Magnetic fields strength or push of the Magravs of the Matter, like a planet.
In electric field charge and current flow, its to be understand that the positive charge is
139
the flow of the Magnetic field push of the Magravs, and the negative charge is the
gravitational pull of the flow of the gravitational fields of the Magravs of the plasma
and its Matters content. This in a way explains the Resistance and the Impedance
respectively of the matters in the electrical section of physics. Where the impedance is
the measure of the gravitational pull of the flow of the pmtics in respect to the matters’
atoms and where the resistance is the measure of the Magnetic push of the flow of the
pmtics in respect to the matters’ atoms.
140
CHAPTER 19
Motion of the Electron around the Proton
The constant rotation of the electron around the nucleus of an atom indicates that the
electron and the nucleus of the atom constantly maintain an overall balanced Magravs
forces between and Magravs positioning, in respect to each other.
Within the structure of the initial fundamental plasma (the neutron), and through its subdynamic
Matters (Matter, Antimatter, and Dark Matter) and at the same time, with all
Matters of the plasma being in possession of their own independent internal dynamic
plasmatic Magravs forces, they all exert dynamic and varying levels of Magravs on
different constituent of Matters of plasma internally, which these field forces span
beyond the boundaries of the nucleus plasma itself individually and collectively.
The total effect of these dynamic forces, from the nucleus plasma (proton) (Fig. 50),
will affect the path of the rotation of the satelliteing electron around the nucleus.
Similarly, the plasma of the electron (Fig. 50) itself is made of the same three dynamic
plasmatic magnetic fields structures of Matters as of the proton in its nucleus.
The effect of these dynamic plasmatic Magravs of different Matters in the centre
plasma (proton) of an atom on the dynamic plasmatic Magravs of different Matters of
the plasma of its electron, and their collective effect of each plasma on each other, is
the reason why the electron does not have a constant and a defined path of motion
around the nucleus.
That is to say, the electron plasma by itself is in possession of its own individual
Matters’ (the Matter, the Antimatters and the Dark Matter) Magravs forces’ as well as
their collective plasmatic Magravs forces of all the Matters of the electron, and the same
applies to the Matters and the plasma of the proton.
As the Magravs of different Matters of the electron passes different Matter components
of the proton, each of the facing Matters’ Magravs forces within the proton and the
electron have to interact with each other, plus the electrons’ and protons’ overall
Magravs positioning in respect to that particular Matter in the proton and electron.
Which, this type of interactions and Magravs repositioning between the two involved
Matters of each plasma will keep on repeating on continuous bases as both the proton
and the electron are independent dynamic entities. As the ever-continuous Magravs
positioning between the two dynamic entities leads to the ever changing in position of
the lighter by mass (the electron) of the two entities, to move around the proton, hence
this chasing-up of the ever-repositioning movement becomes the “uncertain” position or
erratic motion of the electron around its proton.
This giving the electron in that given configuration of interactions of the Magravs its
pulled closer to or pushed further away from the nucleus. Then, immediately, the
electron has to finds its new overall Magravs balance positioning, in respect to the
141
proton.
Then, due to the dynamism of both plasmatic Magravs of proton and electron, other
Matters’ fields in the two plasmas come into play and face each other and their Magravs
of these two new Matters and overall Magravs have to interact again.
Therefore, the new facing Matter of the plasma of the electron Magravs have to find a
new Magravs positioning in respect to the new Matter of the proton’s Magravs and the
overall Magravs of the two plasmas.
Further on, again, as both the proton and electron are dynamic, the electron has to find a
new Magravs positioning, in respect to these new Matters facing each other from each
entity interactions, this change of Matters facing each other takes place on a continuous
basis, as different Matters and Magravs of both components and the overall structure of
each atom come to exert their forces on each other and the overall balance distance of
both the electron and proton position is to be maintained as every time new Matters in
each entity come to face each other. We call this the Magravs positioning principle (or
Magravs positioning).
The result of this continuous change of the Magravs positioning of the Matters of the
electron in respect to the Matters of proton and their overall Magravs, causes and
creates the motion of the electron around its nucleus.
The behaviour and interaction of the ever-changing of Magravs positioning of the
proton and the electron Magravs in respect to each other, leads to the creation of an
erratic, never duplicated path, and is the cause of the motion of the electron around
the proton.
That is to say, as the electron rotates around the proton, its position and distance in
respect to the proton changes, according to the overall position and balance of the
gravitational pull forces and Magnetic field push forces of all three components of its
Matters and their respective plasmas, in respect to the position of all three Matters
Magravs of the protons’ and overall Magravs of the proton.
Nevertheless, as the Matters, in the proton and the electron are both dynamic
themselves, the rotation of the electron around the nucleus is changing by the principle
of the Magravs positioning of the Magravs balancing. Where, this leads to the ever
motion of the electron around the proton of an atom (Fig. 50).
As the overall strength of the Magravs of both components of the atom are the same,
this leads to a minimum and maximum distance that can be attained by the electron
field strength, in its position in respect to and from its proton. This explains why an
electron appears to be moving erratically around the centre point, with a given
minimum and maximum distance from the centre proton. This minimum and maximum
is to be known as the amplitude (minus and maximum) of the distance of the electron
from its proton.
In fact, as the Matters dynamic components Magravs of the electron interact with the
combined dynamic Magravs of the proton, the electron, which is the less magnetically
142
dense of the two, has to try to find its position, in respect to all the components of the
denser magnetic fields plasma of the proton.
Fig. 50: Schematic of dynamic pmtics of Matters and fields of the proton and the electron and
their interaction of individual Matters and their overall plasma and Magravs, leading to Magravs
positioning and motion of electron in respect to its nucleus.
This continuous change in the Magravs positioning of the electron, in respect to the
proton, leads to the continuous rotational motion of the electron around the proton (Fig.
50)
In fact, one can conclude “the proton and the electron are made up of composite
Magravs of several different Matters by simply observing the erratic path of the motion
of the electron around the proton”.
In principle it can be said that the magnetic fields strength of any magnetic fields or
Matter is position dependent of the two parts of the fields from each other, which the
field has been released from. This is how magnetic fields strength in principle are
determined and created. (Paper: Creation of Magnetic fields).
For example, the interaction of the Magravs of the Dark Matter’s in the plasma of the
electron interacting with the Antimatter’s Magravs in the plasma of the proton and their
143
overall Magravs of the electron and proton plasmas in respect to each other, decides the
position and the distance of the Dark Matter of the electron in respect to the proton.
Universal Magravs positioning principle
The effect of the composite components of the proton and the electron’s Magnetic fields
and gravitational fields strength, changes the path of the electron as it approaches each
Matter of the proton. In composite nucleus, the overall fields’ strength of all the protons
of the nucleus dictates the distance of the electron from the nucleus.
All motions of objects and fields in the universe are due to the overall Magravs
positioning of one pmtics of one object or ray, and so on, in respect to another.
I call this dictation of position of an entity in respect to another entity, due to their
Magravs positioning distance, the “universal Magravs positioning principle” for
motion in the universe.
This Magravs positioning of Matter takes place within the constraints of Matters’
possessing their own composite pmtics Matters fields‘ strength.
Universal method of motion
In principle, “the continuous dynamic Magravs positioning of one dynamic single ray
or multiple Matters of multi-cores plasmas of an object in respect to another dynamic
single or multi-Matters of a multi-cores plasmas of another objects, leading to and/or
can lead to and cause the motion Matters, matters in the universe in respect to each
other”.
I call this method of continuous change in Magravs positioning of one entity in
respect to another causing motion in one of the two entities, “The Universal method of
motion ”.
Motions of atoms and their components interactions, the molecules, solar systems and
galaxies in the universe, are all based on the same simple universal method of motion.
The dynamic plasmatic Magravs of Matters within the constituent structure of one
entity dictates the position and direction and the path of the motion of one object in
respect to another dynamic plasmatic Magravs of Matters within the constituent
structure of the entity. Motion of components of atoms, motion of planets of solar
systems and physical contents of motion of galaxies in the universe are all based on this
principle.
The universal method of motion of any two gravitated objects in respect to each other is
based on the dynamic plasmatic Magravs strength interaction and attraction of all of its
complete composite components of Matters and forces within the object, irrespective of
the physical size of the system. All universal gravitational objects follow the same
144
principle of motion as an electron around its proton, the same as is for the motion of
Matters in the initial fundamental plasmas.
It is correct to say, “motion in the universe is totally and exclusively caused and is due
to Magravs strength positioning of rays, fields, matters, Matters electron, planet, stars
and galaxies in respect to each other”.
Thus from this point on it is clear that one does not need to burn fuel to create motion,
but use Matmags. However, one only needs to create the right Magravs strength within
any system to attain dynamic Magravs positioning in respect to another object, this
being, a planet, a star, a solar system or a galaxy for the system to be in motion.
This method of utilising the plasmatic Magravs interaction for the creation of Magravs
forces within a system, that brings about the motion of one object in respect to another
due to Magravs positioning, is to be known as the “Magravs positioning methods and
universal principle of gravitational motion”.
Thus, the Magravs positioning principles of motion are the future for the creation of
motion for automotive, marine, air and space industry.
Through this method of Magravs positioning, there is no need for the burning of fuel in
engines to move cars or use liquid fuelled jet propulsion systems to fly rockets into
space.
When speaking about gravitational or Magravs positioning, this means the collective
effect of gravitational field and Magnetic fields of one system in respect to another
object or plasmas, Magravs of planets or stars.
It is important to remember that in the universal order of motion, the plasmatic
gravitational field and plasmatic Magnetic fields, are integrated, thus simultaneously
they co-exist and one cannot exist and operate without the other.
In the universe the Magravs positioning of Antimatters in respect to each other and
their plasmatic magnetic fields does exist. Further, there exists the Magravs
positioning of the Dark Matter in respect to each other and their plasmatic magnetic
fields too.
The way the Magravs systems of the future will be set-up and operate will dictate in
which gravitational fields strength and dimensions the crafts of future will travel in.
In man-made systems using the plasmatic magnetic fields of the Matters that, through
their interaction with each other, create the Magravs needed for positioning: simply by
creating Magravs within a reactor, and these systems will, by trying to find its new
Magravs positioning balance in respect to the Magravs, for an example, in atmospheric
area of the planet, cause the motion of the reactor system in respect to the surface of the
planet.
The creation of motion through Magravs positioning can be used in an aircraft equipped
145
with gravitational reactors in respect to Earth, or with a spacecraft in respect to a
planet(s), solar system or galaxy.
Methods based on the Grapos principle for motions are the future for the creation of
motion in space, according and in parallel to the way the universe is operating for
millions of years for its dynamic existence.
146
CHAPTER 20
Molecules
The creation of plasma and the way its plasmatic Magravs interact to bring about a
balance in its overall plasmatic Magravs and their effect on each other, leading to
further interactions and balances in different atoms and their components in different
dimensions in atoms has been explained. This balancing and positioning of plasmatic
Magravs in between different atoms of different Matters brings about how the final
Matters, plasmas and atoms can be brought together, leading to how molecules are
come to be generated.
That is to say, for the creation of a molecule, it is necessary that the plasmas of protons
and neutrons of any nucleus of an atom, and atoms of different elements, need to have a
total plasmatic Magnetic field forces and gravitational field forces positioning balance
in a given environment so that these atoms can hold onto their total structure, for the
molecules to be created.
Thus, by the same principle a molecule or a cell can only be created where, the
Magnetic fields and gravitational fields positioning are in equilibrium in all its
participant atoms plasmatic magnetic fields (Fig. 51).
At the same time, the whole of the structure of the molecules’ plasmatic Magravs have
to find plasmatic Magravs balance in respect to their surrounding environments
Magravs for the molecules to be able to exist as an entity in a given environment. This
in fact, explains why certain atoms and molecules, in certain configurations, can never
exist in one environment, while they are prevalent in other environments, like planets,
or galaxies and why different pmtics forces and conditions can apply to the same
Matter, and Matter manifest itself as a matter in state of solid, liquid and gas.
Likewise, the same can explain why proteins of specific characteristics are created or
maintained by certain cells in one part of the human body and not in other parts of the
body (9).
In fact, if the same conditions of plasmatic magnetic fields are, or can be, maintained in
any part of the universe, one can reproduce exactly all the Matters known to Man
anywhere in the universe.
That is to say, when one can create the required balance and equilibrium environment in
the total and overall Magravs of the atoms participating in the construction of a
molecule, one can replicate and maintain any molecule. Therefore this explains that Van
der Waals forces of pull and push, merely can be known as the gravitational fields
forces and Magnetic field forces respectively operating between different molecules,
irrespective of their binding structure with other molecules or atoms.
147
Fig. 51: Schematic pmtics of atoms gravitational (Magravs) positioning to form a molecule.
In the industrial Magravs reactors of the future, one can produce as many atoms as one
needs by just absorbing the plasma from space or the environment, for any application
and purpose like the production of the hydrogen molecules, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen
for the production of proteins for food, air, water and so forth, by simply replicating the
Magravs of the preferred molecules and allowing their positioning and interactions.
In the future, by giving a standard chart of Magravs strength and prevailing magnetic
fields forces, temperature and pressure of plasma, atoms and molecules, one can
produce and maintain any atom and molecule anywhere in the universe.
148
CHAPTER 21
Plasma Dilution Technology
The Plasma Dilution Technology is the new approach for the use of new gained
knowledge for creation and control of plasma and its sub-Matters constituents Matters
and their fundamental elementary particles.
The new understanding and insight into the construction and the structure of plasma and
its constituent Matters and their magnetic fields, opens up new opportunities for the
creation of energy and motion, production of new materials, for medical uses and so
many other applications.
The plasma dilution technology allows the plasmas’ Matters components to be diluted
within a soup of Matters and their pmtics made up of exactly of the plasmas’ own
composite structure.
Through the specially designed nuclear reactors, conditions are created within the
structure of the reactor that the plasma is contained in a safe and secure way in reactors
cores configuration.
The operation of these reactors can be controlled so that they do not release any
radiation into the environment and they create no waste of any kind, this being the likes
of radioactive materials or CO2 waste, as has been the trend in the current nuclear and
energy production industry.
Through the understanding and creation of a parallel environments, similar to the
internal environment of the same weak plasmatic magnetic fields of the plasma itself,
plasmatic magnetic soup environments are produced in these types of reactors, so that
the plasmatic magnetic fields condition within the reactor cores matches the plasmatic
magnetic fields of the binding forces (Coulomb Barrier) of the initial fundamental
plasma, as the components of this plasma soup, this barrier is magnetically diluted and
soften, allowing the plasma to open through the operation of the reactors, for the
Matters of the plasma to become part of the dilution soup of Matters and fields forces of
the reactor.
A soup of weak plasmatic magnetic fields
These plasmatic magnetic fields saturated reactors will allow components of any plasma
introduced into the reactor to be loosened and, the Matter, the Antimatter and the Dark
Matter of the plasma, to be free to move within the structure of the plasma soup, which
has been created through specific setting and Matter combination. Matters once loosen
from other Matters within the soup of the plasma, these are then free for their
fundamental particles effects to be utilised to achieve any desired effects, like for fusion
and production of new matters, lift and motion.
149
Reactors that facilitate such a dilution of plasma I call Plasma Dilution Reactors (Fig.
56) and their process of dilution as the Plasma dilution principle and their knowledge
as the plasma dilution technology (Fig. 52).
Fig. 52: Plasma dilution concept and technology.
Further interaction of the constituent principle plasmatic magnetic fields of the Matters
of the plasma inside the cores of these reactors can create effects that can be used to
achieve desired outcomes from their interactions with other Matters or matters and
fields outside or inside the reactor’s structural environment and this is exactly the way
and the method that different entities in the universe function and operate to achieve
certain desired effects and production of Materials.
Diluting the plasma in the larger pmtics environment of the reactor is another option in
the nuclear world for achieving fission, fusion, production of new Matters, matters, for
generation of energy and motion.
150
Disentanglement
Through the Plasma dilution process, once the new plasma soup is produced in the
reactor cores, the weak interacting plasmatic magnetic fields soup interacts with the
binding fields of the components of the Matters of the plasmas which are further
introduced into the reactor cores, this allows the Matters of new plasma to disentangle
themselves from each other (Fig. 53), if this level of dilution of new plasma is required.
In this process of plasma dilution, the sub-components of the plasma are allowed to
loosen up from each other and not necessarily allowing the separation of all the Matters
of the plasma from each other.
Fig. 53: Dilution process of initial fundamental plasma within a soup of Matters.
Through this method, different components of the Matters and fields of the plasma can
be used for any purpose that the operator decides or that the system is pre-set to.
Hence, each sub-component Matter of the plasmas in the reactor can be separated from
the plasma in any quantities of individual Matter within the soup.
151
Fig. 54: Dilution process of initial fundamental plasma and atoms and molecules within a soup
of Matters and pmtics.
The plasma dilution technology (Fig. 54) replaces the present state-of-the-art
technology accelerators used for the separation of different components of plasma or an
atom.
The plasma dilution reactors for example can be used for the extraction of Antimatter,
instead of the presently used methods of slamming plasma at high speeds in accelerators
into specific pure solid metal matters to extract its Antimatter, by chance, every once in
152
while (6, 7 and 8).
In the same way, the plasma dilution reactors can be used in the fusion industry where,
present technology uses huge enforcing magnetic fields to force the fusion of plasmas.
With the plasma dilution method, the components of the plasma are opened up, in a soft
way, loosened, and then are allowed to be separated from other Matters in their
surroundings, and into their specific sub-components, interacting collectively in the
soup of the Matters for their use for any given specific purpose (Fig. 54), like for fusion
of Matters or matter.
These reactors even can be used for fusing components of two plasmas together. If the
Antimatter is needed to be separated from the Matter, this can be easily done, as by
creating a weak plasmatic magnetic field, around the plasma, then, the Antimatter
components of the plasma can be separated for the use of their plasmatic magnetic
fields properties and effects for example for the production of powerful Magravs forces.
Where, the rest of plasmas’ components are then left in the dilution soup.
When one has used these freed Antimatter plasmatic magnetic fields for their effects
they create, for the purposes that one needs, then the system-loading Magravs
configuration and parameters can be altered to change the dynamism of the reactor, and
gradually disassemble the dilution fields. Then the Matters of the plasma are allowed to
return to their original Matters’ components state of the plasma, and for the plasma to
return its atomic structure and so forth.
All these reactions can be created and controlled without the creation of unstable or
high temperature environments as is seen in the universal order of creation of Matters,
energy and motion.
At the same time, there is no need to hold on to certain Matters and to run expensive
holding systems for Antimatter as done for example by Fermilab at the present.
All these processes are carried out without any release of radiation or the production of
new radioactive waste.
These effects can be created at room temperature and within portable safe nuclear
reactors, which have been designed, developed and tested in the past few years.
There is conclusive evidence from tests, that the principle of the untangling of plasmas’
magnetic fields binding forces through plasma dilution technology is a proven
fundamental principle for the future of energy production and creation of motion for
space travel.
That is to say, that we have seen the effects that Antimatter in being loose in the cores
of the reactors to possess stronger fields and create stronger Magravs forces than the
Matter components of the same plasma. We have managed to lift and reduce weight of
reactor systems in respect to its environment, and we have create new matters, all at
room temperature, in the recent past through the operation of plasma dilution reactors,
as we have reported and applied patents for.
153
This stronger characteristics and effects of Antimatter are purely due to the fact “that at
the inception of the plasma, the Antimatter components of the plasma were created by
the stronger plasmatic magnetic fields to start with”.
Similarly, gravitational field forces of the Dark Matter components of the plasma can be
used through the plasma dilution technology for the creation of high-speed motion
without friction for crafts of the future in space technology, or these reactors can be
used for the extraction of poison from a substance like water or air.
In testing for the production of the Dark Matter principle, systems have been twisted in
their axel and damaged, confirming the enormous power of invisible, powerful,
Magravs of the Dark Matter.
In general, it can be said, “The future is bright, the future is plasmatic magnetic fields
based, through the production of controlled plasmatic dilution technology reactors”
154
CHAPTER 22
Matters and Magravs systems
The technology that uses the properties of the Matters of plasma to create motion and
energy, instead of the present use of matter, I have called the Magravs positioning
Systems Technology.
The fundamental difference between the Matter gravitational technology and matter
propulsion and energy systems can be explained in simple way.
matter propulsion technology
The present matter propulsion systems in burning fuels have to fight and to overcome
Magravs of the planet for lift and motion. This we see in the rocket propulsion space
technology of today.
In the matter systems, like the propulsions systems, power stations and cars use the
fundamental principles of burning matter to release its energy and convert this energy
from one form to another to create motion and energy. This technology has always
delivered limited energy, and due to its bulkiness of mass and weight of the fuel that
have to be carried by systems to achieve their objectives, these systems are payload
dependent.
The matter system uses the Matter part of plasma, the weakest and least energetic part
of the plasma. By their nature as has been seen in the past, matter systems create
different type of waste, like CO2, nuclear waste, and so on.
Matter gravitational technology
The Matters Magravs system uses the properties of the all Matters in the plasma to
create motion, lift and energy without destroying the characteristic of the Matters, and
the system works within and through the Magnetic field and gravitational field of its
environment to attain position and motion, one can achieve more working within than
fighting against the Magravs of the planet.
In the present state-of-art technologies, always the matter components are considered
for their physical action and reaction, and not their Matters field’s components.
Matters used in the Magravs systems, uses the properties and interaction of all the initial
fundamental particles properties of all Matters within the components of the
fundamental plasma, “Matter, Antimatter and Dark Matter”. There is no need to “react”
as in the matter processes, since the system works’ within and is part of the same
155
magnetic fields base system and works through the universal natural forces. Therefore
there is never a need for reaction for motion, as the system always magnetically
balances itself in respect to other magnetic fields forces.
These reactor systems are developed to function in the same way as the interaction of
the initial fundamental particles leads to the creation of Magravs for the motion of
Matters through the Magravs positioning principle in the universe.
In these systems, there is no destruction of Matter, since the system can use Matters
pmtics properties for the enhancement of Magravs positioning, for the creation of
motion and energy and so forth.
This method of the use of Matters creates heat, if it is needed from a system.
As it has been observed, stars create massive heat to create vast amount of energy and
Magravs forces, through tests it have been proven that the creation of motion and
energy by the use of Magravs forces, these systems creating effects which are
temperature independent.
Used in the atmospheric conditions, the Grapos, through the principles of the creation of
plasmatic Magravs within the cores of the reactor and their interaction with the
plasmatic Magravs of the planet, this interaction of these two Magravs, leads to creation
of a magnetosphere around the systems. Where, the interaction of plasmatic Magravs of
the system and the planets Magravs always lead to the creation of light around the
system. This light being created through the principle of interaction of two plasmatic
magnetic fields as was explained in Chapters 7 (Fig. 29 and Fig. 31). This is exactly
how the magnetosphere of the Earth is created in respect to the Magravs interaction of
the Earth and the Sun, and the same principle as for the creation of the daylight as seen
around the Earth.
The magnetosphere created around the Magravs system, can be a spherical or oval
bright light in shape depending upon the speed of motion and protection chosen by the
operator.
In the Universal systems like stars, their Magravs forces are fixed by their initial
matters’ contents in their inner cores at the point of the inception of the star, and the
magnetic fields strength they generate for the production of their Magravs strength,
once the strength of the Magravs is set for the stars, these cannot be changed arbitrarily
to achieve different Magravs strengths for the stars.
Whereas in the Grapos reactors’ developed for the motion of crafts, the Magravs
parameters of these reactor systems can be changed and manipulated according to the
position, speed, energy and so forth, as is desired of the system by their operators.
In these systems, the reactor-operator dictates the Magravs strength of the system,
therefore he decides the speed and the position of the craft at any position in space in
respect to another Magravs system, the like of the Earth surface or a given distance
from the moon or galaxies.
156
Interesting enough, all these effects of motion are achieved even though the system uses
the same fundamental methods and Matters as in the cores of the planet or star that the
systems is operating within or aiming for.
Fig. 55: Representation of interaction of four different pmtics strength of gravitational
(Magravs) positioning systems (Grapos) in respect to Earth pmtics Magravs (1, 2, 3 and 4).
Note: Figure 55, numbers 5, 6, 7 and 8 show that the position of clouds in respect to
Earth are pmtics Magravs strength dependent, and not size or volume dependent.
Thus, wherever the Magravs principles reactors are used for flight in a system, like in
atmospheric condition of the planets’, the natural outcome of the interaction of the two
pmtics Magravs of the environment and the reactors Magravs is the appearance of and
creation of natural light around these flying systems (Fig. 55 light regions of 1, 2, 3 and
4). Thus, the same Magravs positioning systems can be used, to produce lamps that can
create light for years without needing to burn any fuel or consuming electricity.
Simultaneously, in a dense plasmatic magnetic fields environment, like the Earth, when
the Grapos are used for motion and lift, due to the interaction pmtics Magravs, of the
Earth and the system, these systems will produce their own magnetosphere around
them. This magnetospheric light intensity is reactor Magravs’ strength dependent and
through the principle of interaction of two pmtics of plasmas as was discussed before,
these magnetospheres will cause the creation of bright light around these systems in the
157
Earth atmospheric condition. As the brightness of the magnetosphere around the system
in respect to its surrounding pmtics strength will be dependent on the strength of the
plasmatic magnetic fields that are created by the Magravs positioning reactors, and in
respect to the systems’ position, considering that the plasmatic magnetic fields of the
Earth is constant.
Thus, the confirmation of systems using Magravs positioning technology for motion in
dense atmospheric condition like the Earth will be the appearance of bright moving
lights (Fig. 55 lights 3 and 4) in the Earth atmosphere or any given atmosphere or
medium in the universe. In dense atmospheric conditions, these Magravs systems will
be appear to be a shining bright light floating in air, either with high speeds or seated
stationary.
In some literatures, systems that use Grapos for motion and appear as bright lights from
an unknown source in the skies have been called, the Unidentified Flying Objects, also
called UFO’s (Fig. 55 lights 1, 2, 3 and 4). Now that the method by which these bright
lights in the sky are produced, their operation understood, and known, these crafts are
not Unidentified Flying Objects no longer.
Nevertheless, in reality, it is now interesting to see who are the users of these systems.
Whoever are the users’ of these Magravs systems, this does not necessarily means that
they are more advanced in scientific level than the human race in its present scientific
and technological evolution. However, this simply means that they have managed to
harvest the principles of the plasmatic magnetic fields, and the constituents of Matters,
some time before the human race.
Now that the technology and the principles behind the plasmatic Magravs positioning
fields are open to the human race, it is not hard to see that interaction with users of these
bright lights will be inevitable and will only be to the Mans advantage, to help man to
reach new levels of understanding about his universe.
In tests, the effects and bright light created by use of these reactor systems, which have
been developed and tested for weight reduction and lift, has been noted.
The operation and interference with the radar and radio frequencies, through tests
running of these Magravs positioning reactors have been videoed and recorded in
August 2008. This confirms the origin of the motion of these systems to be on a
plasmatic magnetic fields basis, as the system’s Magnetic field operation interferes with
radio waves, which radio waves are magnetic fields based entities.
NASA has done tests on these types of magnetospheric condition and motion system,
on a miniature scale, in advance concept projects known as MINI-magnetospheric
plasma propulsion project called M2P2 (40). They have achieved this by using the
argon gas up to this stage. They hope to be able to finance the project to reach helium
and then the use of hydrogen as base-material in years to come. They may then use
plasma of hydrogen atoms later as they progress in gaining knowledge in 30 to 50 years
and having the budget. However this is still one of the theoretical approaches for
NASA.
158
Fermilab (6, 7, and 8) is looking for the Antimatter as the “fuel” for propulsion systems
of the future space programs for NASA. If they redirect their attention into the
properties and the effects of the Antimatters that they have gathered by now, they can
achieve the same results as have been seen and tested in the recent Magravs systems
reported on our Foundation web site and patents that have been applied for.
Through the understanding of the real forces in operation of the universe, the Magravs
positioning reactors are simply years ahead of their time.
Our Magravs positioning reactors are not in a mini-scale dimension as NASA’s project
has tested and envisages at this moment in time, but these are in several sizes, which
can create controllable size magnetospheric conditions, as the operator of these simple
systems sees fit the purpose.
In the near future, these Magravs systems will replace the propulsion systems that have
been used for space explorations and air travel.
The advantage with the Matters powered Grapos is that these systems create a
magnetosphere around the reactor system. This is the same natural magnetic protection
barrier for the future spacecrafts as the magnetosphere around the Earth has been,
protecting man from space debris and cosmic radiations for billions of years.
These systems’ magnetosphere protection capabilities can be used to protect the craft in
deep oceans from water and the crafts to be used like the submarines of today, with the
difference that these systems magnetosphere will allow these crafts to reach the deepest
parts of oceans floors without any problem, as they can reach any depth in liquid planets
in the universe.
The magnetosphere generated by Grapos will create magnetic shielding at Matters’
level of the plasmas that can be used to pass through materials like ice without melting
their matter(s). But simply by diluting the ice Matter(s) at plasma levels as in the plasma
dilution reactors. In these conditions the crafts will appears as the craft will come out of
nowhere and with no holes indicating the position of the exit from the ice by the
spacecraft. If observed from the distance these crafts will be like bright lights shining
and jumping out from the ice-covered sea-surface.
These plasma dilution Magravs positioning systems, by the use of Matters, will be the
only solution for plasmatic saturation, once these crafts will pass and go through cosmic
dusts as they temporarily disentangle the Magravs of atoms and plasmas of these
cosmic dusts by just diluting the components of the Magravs of the Matters of cosmic
dusts with the Magravs of the craft protection magnetosphere, and the craft passes
through the dust matters as if they were not there.
159
CHAPTER 23
Matter Pmtics in reactors for lift and motion
The utilisation of the Magravs forces of dynamic multi-core systems, in respect to each
other, for the purpose of the creation of lift and motion is discussed in this chapter.
In multiple cores dynamic plasmatic dilution Grapos that have been developed and
tested at room temperature, these systems have proven to have the capability to produce
different plasmatic Magravs forces strength as strong as those of a hot centre core
object, like the Earth.
Using the principle of the creation of dynamic plasmatic Magravs forces within the
structure of a multi-core reactor, the system can be caused to find its own position in
respect to the environment of a planet or any Magnetic field and gravitational field
forces in space.
In developing and achieving the Magravs positioning of these systems, in respect to the
planet’s Magravs forces, on the surface of the planet, leads to the reduction of the
weight of the system to start with. Once the two plasmatic magnetic fields of the planet
and the system reach the total balance or equilibrium, the zero weight of the system,
in respect to the planets gravitational fields at a given point and the position, is
achieved.
From this point of total equilibrium any further change(s) in Magravs force strength of
the reactor in the same direction and configuration as before, this leading to and causing
the free lift and motion of the reactor system, in respect to the planet.
Principle concept of upward or separation motion
The upward motion of the systems in respect to the planetary fields or any other
Magravs systems is simply due to the fact that the Magnetic field of the planet and the
Magnetic field of the system is of the same polarity. Thus, the two similar Magnetic
polarities repel each other, hence causing the upward or separation motion of the
system.
It is fundamental to understand that: In the Magravs positioning reactors “The
repulsion of two objects or moving away from each other, like moving away form
the surface of the Earth, is totally due to interaction of the two pmtics of Magnetic
fields forces of the systems and of the planet.
Whereas, any closeness or gravitation of the reactor system in respect to the planet
is controlled by the pmtics of the gravitational fields between the system and the
planet in respect to each other.”
160
This is how Magravs positioning reactors, in possession of dynamic cores, create up or
down (lift and descend) motion in respect to another Magravs of an object, like the
Earth.
In these systems by changing the strength of any of the gravitational or Magnetic fields
strength within the reactors of a system, this system, necessitates the finding of a new
balance position between the system and the planet’s Magnetic and gravitational fields.
By changing the parameters of the reactors and for the reactor to find a new balance
between the systems’ own Magravs and the planetary Magravs, this causes the motion
of the system as it tries to reach the newly desired balanced Magravs force position, in
respect to the planet Magravs.
This is the universal method of creation of motion without burning an atom of any
matter, and this is exactly how all the celestial objects find their position and motion in
the ever-dynamic environment of plasma of an electron in an atom, solar systems,
galaxy and universes.
The motion of the system is purely due to the phenomenon of Magravs positioning, of
one system in respect to the other(s).
Simple, portable, plasma dilution nuclear reactor systems, can produce the required
Magravs forces within its reactor cores on a continuous repositioning criterion bases
that can cause the motion of the Magravs positioning system (Fig. 56).
In these Grapos, the individual pmtics released in the central core (Fig. 56) in their
interaction with the compatible and matching pmtics’ strength of other pmtics in the
same core can then collectively interact with the same collection of pmtics created in
the other cores of the reactor (Fig. 56), and interactions and interlocking of the same
pmtics strength in different cores of the system leads to the creation of Magravs within
and around these types of reactors simultaneously.
By referring to figure 1, 2 and 3 in the early chapters, then it can be realised that, what
has been achieved in these dilution plasmatic Magravs positioning reactors (Fig. 56), is
exactly what has been going on in inner cores of planetary systems such as the Earth, to
create their Magravs for them to hold on to their components through their gravitational
fields, and at the same time to protect their matters from other celestial objects through
their Magnetic fields, and at the same time create positioning in respect to other
Magravs, at the same leading to creation of motion of the reactor. These reactors are
truly an all integrated system for flight and motion.
At the same time, these reactors during their operation within a craft system creates’
and maintains’ an independent internal gravitational field forces within the reactor cores
fields catchments’ zone. For example these properties and effects can be used to
maintain an earth, one-G gravitational field force within the confine of any spacecraft,
independent of the position and speed of the craft where, this position in the universe
might be.
These reactors in collaboration and simultaneous production of the Magnetic fields and
161
gravitational fields leads to the creation of a distinctive and separate magnetosphere
around the reactor or the craft which, uses such reactor technology, similar to the Earth
atmospheric magnetic field.
Fig. 56: The Keshe Model of Plasma Dilution and Magravs positioning reactor.
Thus, the Grapos are exact copies of the planetary Magravs producing systems.
Similarly, they utilise the same Matters inside them, and the same principle of
interaction to create Magravs between the systems and a planet. This being the same
principle as, between the Earth and the Sun field forces and the Earth, and the rest of
planets in the solar system and the same system principle as between electrons and
protons. (Fig. 57)
Therefore, by changing the strength of the Magravs strength of Grapos, these systems
can be positioned in any orbit or position around the Earth (Fig. 55, Fig. 56 and Fig. 57
c), in the solar systems or galaxies, with the use of Matters, rather than matters in the
system.
162
In other words, the balancing of two Magravs’ forces of the system, in respect to the
planetary Magravs forces, leads to lift or descend of the systems. This separation only
leads to a vertical up or down motion of one-system field in respect to the other
systems’ field. This means lift or descend of the system in a craft takes place vertically
and not a 360-degree directional motion of the system.
In current physics, scientists call this the anti-gravitational field forces needed for lift
and these systems are called anti-gravitational systems.
In reality, any motion of a system is not due to anti-gravitational field forces, but in fact
is due to the total balancing of the gravitational field and Magnetic fields of the two
systems of the planet and the Magravs positioning of a reactor, in respect to each other
in a given position.
For directional motion, the same principle as vertical lift is used with the difference that
in the directional case, the ratio of change between Magnetic fields and gravitational
field created within the system are utilised, as the two field forces in the reactor of such
a system have an opposite gradient of scale of strength with each other. That is to say,
the control of the creation of gravitational fields increases with the same increment as
the decrease in Magnetic field strength, within the interaction of the fields of the cores
of the system, in respect to the planetary field forces.
The same principle of Magravs positioning can be used in space for motion, in a
direction of motion towards or away from a planet, star or galaxy.
There is an alternative method of motion, which is by compartmenting each core of the
reactor. This is a highly advanced technology and needs a full understanding of the
creation and control of the magnetic fields’ strength of magnetic rays and Matters
mixtures and full control of the motion of dynamic Matters in a dynamic environment
of the reactor cores.
As motioned before, reactors have been designed, built, and tested to confirm the effects
of weight reduction and lift, and the results have proven the correctness of the principle
of Magravs positioning reactors, rather than the anti-gravitational field assumptions.
It has been shown that the system gravitational field and Magnetic field strength are
independent of the size of the system for the mass that they can lift.
In tests carried-out in 2008, a ten-kilogram reactor system was used to lift a 100-
kilogram weight.
In early 2009, the system combination was used to reduce weight from 9 kg by
increments of 100 grams. Then another system was use to reduce the weight of the
system from 7 kg to 6.5, 6.3 and 6.1 kg and so on in increments of 100 grams. In some
tests, the weight of the same system was increased by 100-gram increments also.
These tests were done to show the correctness of the theoretical principles and its
practical applications in reduction or increase in Magravs forces of one system in
respect to another like the planetary system.
163
CHAPTER 24
Passive Magnetic Fields
In the universe, there are two types of interaction in respect to plasmatic magnetic fields
forces.
One pmtics force is called active magnetic fields force and the other passive magnetic
fields force.
The active magnetic fields forces are the pmtics forces that can exert forces on other
fields and components of other pmtics of plasmas causing them to move or vibrate, or
receive motion or vibration from the pmtics. This is usually matter-based motion and
creates tangible or physical motion of matter.
Active magnetic fields forces usually cause dislocation of the electrons in a cell or
vibration of electron in conductive material, etc.
Matters of the plasma mainly produce the passive plasmatic magnetic fields.
Passive pmtics can deliver their magnetic fields forces as energies to another plasma of
the atom, for them to increase their magnetic fields density or energy without
dislocating any Matters plasma’s.
Through passive magnetic fields strength, if the plasma is in need of the extra pmtics
strength, it can receive the quantity that it needs of the same pmtics strength for it to
return to its ground level pmtics strength level. Otherwise, the pmtics will pass the
plasma without transferring any of its pmtics to the second plasma. At the same time the
second plasma, if it has extra pmtics which it does not need, it gives the extra pmtics to
the passing pmtics, if it needs the extra pmtics for both pmtics to return to ground levels
of their original pmtics strength.
The passive magnetic fields do not cause the atom to move or be dislocated from its
position but also cannot cause vibration of the electron of the atom as such.
Passive magnetic fields are pmtics used for delivering the energy levels of vitamins and
minerals to atoms and molecules of protein chains and are Matter pmtics orientated and
based.
It is important to note that each plasma carries’ one pmtics strength pack in the majority
of cases. Thus for human body to receive all its pmtics strength spectrum, the body need
to consume different minerals and vitamins and proteins that can deliver certain specific
passive plasmatic magnetic fields strength to cover all his cells’ needs.
Where the active pmtics are matter orientated and create heat, motion, and vibration in
the matter components of the plasma.
164
CHAPTER 25
New understandings and New Technologies
From the new explanation and understanding of the creation and control of initial
fundamental particles (magnetic fields), and further in having access to the new
knowledge and the technologies that to be able to replicate the same in small reactors
and their systems, the production and the control of MATTERS and the initial
fundamental plasma as in the universal order of the creation of Matters in these
reactors have become simple and practically possible.
The world of science and technology can find new solutions and new sources of Matters
for the production of energy, the creation of motion and other applications within the
confines of these reactors and this technology will be developed further for these
purposes.
In understanding the principles of the working of these reactors, one can make use of,
and manipulate, the Matters and energies embedded in the initial fundamental plasmas
for the production of new materials, motion and energy. One would be able to use the
new understandings of the Matters sub-plasmatic structure for the release of magnetic
fields and energies from these Matters.
Through progressive development of this technology, new and simpler methods are
devised and developed further for the fission and fusion of Matters and their relevant
technologies. Through these new understandings and developments of reactors, new
ways and opportunities for the production of energy in the world of nuclear physics has
become possible.
For energy production in nuclear fission of today, the state-of-the-art technologies use
the collision effect of neutrons and atoms to break up an atomic structure and release its
energy. On the other hand, in the world of nuclear fusion, the reverse methods are in
use. Scientists in nuclear and physics laboratories use as much force as possible to fuse
plasmas, and harvest the residual released energies from this process.
Through our technology new and simple reactors are in the reach of the scientific world
for the disintegration of an atom, or for the fusing of plasmas through plasma dilution
technology. This new approach is less energy consuming, much simpler, more practical
and the resulting energies produced are easy to harvest.
The same is seen in the world of aircraft and space industry where, jet engines and
propulsion systems are in use to force and displace matters like air to create lift and
motion.
With this new knowledge and approach to plasma dilution technology as one integrated
system, much simpler and more effective methods based on the universal methods for
creation of motion are made available to the aircraft and space industry to move crafts
within atmospheric or outer space (Fig. 57 C). Magravs positioning principle of an
electron in respect to its proton (Fig. 57 A) and Magravs positioning of the planet Earth
165
in respect to Magravs system of its Sun (Fig. 57 B), these shows similarities between
the principle of the use of the new Magravs positioning reactors and their universal
parallel systems.
Fig. 57: Similarities between four different Magravs positioning principles
and systems for motion and position.
Note: Figure 57 D. shows that an independent plasmatic Magravs system can exist
within another Magravs system, and have Magravs positioning in respect to each other,
as the Ganymede, a moon of the planet Jupiter, has been functioning for millions of
years within Jupiter’s Magravs. To cosmologists the case of the Ganymede is the only
known condition of an inter-gravitational planetary system positioning, and its
operation within the Jupiter’s magnetosphere could never be explained with present
scientific knowledge. Similarly, Grapos reactors can be used in crafts for motion and
Magravs positioning within the magnetosphere of the planet Earth, as shown in figure
57 C using the same fundamental principle as the Ganymede.
166
Through the fundamentals of this new understanding of the creation and control of
plasmatic magnetic fields reactors (Grapos), craft systems do not need to burn
Matmags to create lift and motion, but where, the reactor uses the Magnetic fields
strength of the Matter (the Matmags) to create gravitational positioning.
In the Magravs positioning Technology reactors, by the simple creation of the
acquired plasmatic Magravs levels of the desired point in space, within the reactor’s
systems, the system is forced by its’ internally produced Magravs, the need to reach a
new plasmatic Magravs balance position between the system and the planet Magravs
forces‘, this causing the motion of the system in respect to the Earth without burning
any fuel.
The Magravs positioning technology once used in a craft, unusually these crafts become
weight independent. That is to say, the systems payload compared to the power of the
gravitational positioning forces of these reactors are so insignificant, that the payload
mass becomes irrelevant.
This is how small cores size of matters in comparison, in the centre of the planet Earth,
can create such strong plasmatic magnetic fields, that their interactions can keep and
cause continuous motion of the heavy loads of matters of the planet, at ease, for billions
of years.
The important point about using Grapos in aircraft systems is that the plasmatic
Magravs and Magnetosphere fields’ catchments area of the system has to pass the
physical boundary of the craft itself during motion, in-flight and stationary floating
mode or protection mode.
During the operation of plasmatic Grapos, magnetospheres are created around the
system interface between system and the planet. At the interface of the magnetosphere
of the system, due to the friction between two plasmatic Magravs of the system and the
planet, only at the point of the magnetospheric interface of the system, this leads to the
creation of visible light (Chapter 7).
In respect to plasmatic gravitational field systems, once the fields are allowed to pass
beyond the physical boundary of the craft, this gives the craft being in possession and
the advantage of having a dynamic magnetically based magnetospheric protection
environment around the system. This magnetic magnetospheric zone around these crafts
operates and functions exactly and similar to magnetosphere possessed by the Earth,
which, the Earth has generated around itself by the interaction of its own plasmatic
gravitational and Magnetic fields with that of its star and the pmtics around its
environment in space.
This production of plasmatic magnetospheric shielding is a natural protection system
offered by all celestial objects in possession of dynamic plasmatic Magravs for the
entrapped matters within their systems.
Thus, by the use of Grapos in crafts nothing less than that is natural in the universe and
a normal phenomenon for protection of internal matters and structure of the planet are
offered.
167
Using this magnetospheric protection capability of Grapos, crafts of future will travel at
speeds beyond the capability of the present technology in the aircraft and space
industry. These crafts will travel without their outer-surface ever getting heated-up, or
ever being in a position to be hit for example by birds in Earths atmospheric conditions
or in space by space debris. The reason for this is due to the fact that the outer surfaces
of these crafts never come to be in contact with other matters, except its own internally
created plasmatic Magravs.
The interface between the crafts’ dynamic Magravs and planets plasmatic dynamic
Magravs can be extended through the design and control of the Matters within the
reactor cores of these systems, that their interface to be far enough away from the
physical body of the craft, that there will be no contact or interface with other Matters
and matters of physical body of the craft system. These matters outside the boundary of
the system can be Dark Matter, air, liquid or others. These Magravs are needed for the
protection of a system like this in space, as the systems cannot be hit or damaged by any
cosmic dust or asteroid in the path of motion of the system.
The magnetosphere created around these systems, due to the dynamic characteristics of
their nature, create plasmatic magnetic fields that will act and is a magnetic shield for
the embedded craft within it. These dynamic magnetospheres around these crafts are
naturally watertight systems.
If the plasmatic magnetic fields generated by the system, do not reach and pass the
physical outer boundaries of the craft, these crafts can have the gravitational shearing
gradient forces fields effects, enforced on it, half-way within its structure, rather than
around its outer physical boundary; which partial structural cover of Magravs on the
middle of the structure of the craft will end-up in the physical damage or in extreme
cases the breaking-off of parts or the whole section of the craft at the point of interface
between the system and the planet pmtics Magravs. This shearing-off zone is possible
and can happen purely due to a difference in the two Magravs forces strength levels at
the magnetospheric boundary of the reactor system in the middle of the structure of the
craft.
At the same time the passengers of the future, using the Magravs positioning systems,
will travel in gravitational field forces within the boundary structure of the craft in
similar conditions as on the Earth. The passengers of these crafts can travel without the
need for the present compression systems, in use, in the state-of-the-art aircraft industry.
There will be no G-force changes inside these crafts during their flight due to the
sudden changes in directional motion or at high-speed capabilities of these crafts. Using
Grapos, in spacecrafts, this allows normal life and motion within the craft without the
effect of weightlessness as is experienced by the space travels of today.
These crafts through their natural plasmatic magnetic fields interaction will always be
rotating, as all celestial objects in possession of Magravs positioning field force do. This
rotational effect can be facilitated through the design of the craft that the rotational
motion can be transferred and be connected to the outer physical boundaries of these
crafts, without affecting the working of the internal structure or passengers of these
types of crafts.
168
This method of travel using plasmatic Magravs protection for motion for the future
space systems is to be called the Magnetically Originated Joint Habitation And
Nutrition (MOJHAN) system. The passengers of this Man Originated Zone Habitation
And Nutrition to be known as “MOZHAN”.
These new names unify the human race by the use of the name of the technology and
the method of its travel, through the Men’s collective effort to reach this point of
scientific achievement over thousands of years, through their progressive evolution in
science and technology. This takes away the national dependent names, like Cosmo- or
Astro- and the rest from the unique and individual nations, for the collective effort and
contribution by all of the inhabitants of the planet in different measures over the times
to reach this point in Mans scientific evolution.
The use of Grapos will make national boundaries irrelevant except for tax and local
laws. The Grapos will not need airports to land near too. These systems know no
national or planetary boundaries and they have no need for fuel as such.
Thus, in the near future the nations will have to devise new ways of dealing with the
Mozhans as they can land anywhere, without a need for a specific plot or landing strip.
In reality however, these crafts will never even need to touch the ground.
Nevertheless, these systems can reach ground level, when their total reactor Magravs
sizes are reduced to a safe planetary level, within a specific spherical zones cavity,
allocated just out-side the boundary of the reactor systems but within the craft
environment.
Pmtics reactors for production of energy
The creation of energy in the universe and utilisation of Grapos technology for
production of energy in essence are based on the same principles.
In the universal order of production of energy like in stars, in these units, the principle
of the production of current and energy is not on the base of electrons and their
vibration movement. In fact, current and voltages on massive scales in these celestial
objects are produce through their only ingredients, which are the plasmas and their
creation of the pmtics of Magravs of their Matters within their inner natural cores.
In current state-of-the-art power production units like power stations generators, the
rotational motion of magnets, and the magnetic fields forces within the confines of the
copper windings, is used to create a continuous vibration of the electrons in the solid
matters of the copper wire, to generate a flow of current.
We consider the flow of pmtics in materials like that of the wind flow of pmtics or what
is commonly called the current flowing through matters like in copper wires. Where the
plasmatic magnetic fields flow in matters like copper, the strength of the magnetic wind
decides the rate of the vibration of the electrons of the atoms of the copper.
169
In understanding the new concept of the internal structure of an atom there are two
fundamental points to consider.
First, the electron is the smaller and the weaker of the two components of an atom.
Secondly, the proton by order of mass is much heavier and is made itself of greater
amounts of the same plasmatic magnetic fields as the electron.
Thus in utilising the power of the plasma of the proton rather than the plasma of the
electron, it becomes easier to produce the same levels of power with the use of a
fraction of the material compared with the present power units.
This is to say; the new dilution plasma technology will bring into to play the use of
magnetic characteristic of Matters of the plasma of the proton rather than the
vibration of the electron.
To be able to separate the Matters of plasma of proton within the plasma dilution
reactors, one needs to release enough dynamic plasmatic magnetic fields, in motion
(energy), in the field strength level of the plasma of proton. These plasmatic magnetic
fields can move the plasma of the matters of atoms with profound effects, rather than
the electron of an atom.
This new capability and control of magnetic fields strength that can be released by the
plasmatic reactors, brings into play totally new methods for energy production for any
purpose.
The important point to note is that the production of energy through this method does
not mean a change in the common use of electrical equipments. The beauty of this
method is that the generators of the future will not be limited in their power production
capabilities because of the material and size of the system. This means that even pmtics
of plastics, nanolayers or any sort of matters can be used for current production and
flow of current.
This changes the present power production capability, and gives the possibility of any
generator’s construction or any power levels at the point-of-demand, this being nanoamps
or megawatts of power, through the operation of the same reactor, simultaneously
and separately.
The other advantage is that the plasmatic magnetic fields strength of these reactors can
be changed through the operation of the system. This capability of the plasma reactors
gives a new insight into the power production capability of these new generators using
the present equipments and tool.
New type of Generators
Through the control and power of the plasmatic magnetic fields strength DYnamic
Plasmatic Magnetic Flux Strength, abbreviated to: “DYPMFS” that can be released by
these new plasmatic dilution reactors, future electric power generators only need to
170
change their Dypmfs, or the dimensions of the VOlume of the MAgnetospheric Field
Strength, abbreviated to “VOMAFS” of the reactor, to envelop the generators’ winding
using the coil winding method for power production.
Where, the Vomafs of the reactor can cover more of the same copper winding, to
produce larger amounts of currents or the strength of Dypmfs of the reactor can be
increased or decreased to change the levels of the current out-put of the same winding.
With these new types of plasma magnetic fields system there is no need for
transformers, since the exact power input to the motor or engine can be produced by the
plasmatic magnetic fields release at the point-of-demand.
For example: considering the present Power Station generating units (Fig. 58), it can be
seen that, what has been used as fuel (coal, oil, gas, nuclear) to boil water, to generate
steam, to turn the turbine and for the turbine to cause the rotation of the rotor, which is
mounted with fixed flux strength magnets, for the motion of these magnetic fields
cutting with the matter of the copper coil windings, to generate power, for this power to
feed into a power grid.
Fig. 58: Schema of actual electricity production
With the present power station generating units one losses a vast amount of energy
through each step of conversion from solid or liquid or gas to steam to rotation, by all
sorts of channels like different types of frictions, heat lost, losses through the grid.
These systems usually need hundreds of kilometres of transmission lines to transfer the
generated powers to the point-of-demand usually into cities. At the same time these
types of generating systems using matter components of plasma, these always produce
wastes like CO2 or nuclear wastes.
171
In understanding the principle of the rotation of the Earth, through the interaction of two
magnetic fields (Fig. 3) and the capability of the planet to create simultaneously the
external dynamic Magnetic field (Fig. 1, similarly Fig. 61), with the new knowledge of
the use of the plasma dilution Magravs positioning reactors with the ability to produce a
controllable, continuous, dynamic rotational flexible Magnetic field strength,
within the cores of such reactors, it is now easy to construct and produced new strong
and powerful generators that do not need to burn any fuel (Fig. 59), to create rotating
Magnetic fields, but, just by using Grapos nuclear reactor one can achieve the same and
even more power than the present matter-based frictional systems. Even it becomes
possible to produce varying frequencies of current output of the system from the same
generator.
Grapos generators can produce power from kilowatts to megawatts in seconds, by just
increasing the strength of the Magravs for the Dypmfs of the reactor or by increasing
the Vomafs coverage of the Magravs. We have called this new generation of power
generators the Keshe reactor generators (Fig. 60).
Fig. 59: New approach to generate electricity
The use of plasma dilution Magravs positioning reactor brings to an end the need for
burning of fuel (Fig. 59), to create rotational motion of the rotors’ for production of
electricity as it happens in the present generators.
Our new approach puts an end to the production of greenhouse gasses (like CO2)
through the burning of fuels (coal, oil, gas) and finally an end to the habitual burning of
matters to generate motion and energy. This also bringing to an end the current
production of dangerous nuclear waste by running the present nuclear power stations.
By purely using the effects of interaction of the Magravs of the Matters, within the
cores of these reactors, motion and Magnetic fields, for production of any amount of
172
electric power can be achieved in one all-integrated nuclear-based unit without creating
any waste of any sorts.
In a way this is how all plasmas, atoms, planetary systems, stars and galaxies create
their own motion and Magnetic fields (Fig. 60 and Fig. 61). Why not for the man to take
advantage of this new knowledge of clean source of supply of Matters for new energy
production technology through the real universal method of workings of magnetic fields
of Matters?
Fig. 60: The Keshe generator, which rotates for years in a coil structure.
Fig. 61: The virtual Earth generator, which rotates and generates Magnetic fields (MF1 and
MF2) for millions years, and could generate electricity if there was a copper coil around it.
Similarly, using the plasmatic magnetic fields reactors can eliminate the need for
173
generators and transmission lines, due to the fact that the pmtics needed for production
of a given current and voltage level can be created at the point-of-contact of the system.
Even the structure of the matters electrons or plasmas can be used to create current for
their use in the same equipment. This means that one can produce current from the
atoms and plasmas of a silicon or plastic cover of a microchip, to meet the components
energy needs.
One possible use for a small reactor is to produce the right plasmatic vibration of
electrons or the plasma of matter, within any given environment to generate light and
power.
Prototype reactors have already been made and can be further refined that only need to
generate plasmatic magnetic fields within their cores, that the interaction of the pmtics
generated by these reactors with its surrounding matters, creates a magnetosphere at the
point of the interface of the two pmtics of the system and atmosphere, that leads to the
release of pmtics in the range of visible light of any colour and ray. This will be how
future light producing units will be manufactured.
Similarly, in a given environment, in such as a craft, the operation of reactors can
produce Magravs, that the interior of such crafts would always be lit due to the principle
of the interaction of the surrounding Vomafs of the reactor and the dynamic plasmatic
magnetic fields of the particle content of the air within the confines of these crafts.
The strength of these Dypmfs generated by the reactors can be set to produce any colour
rays of any magnetic wavelength, be this red or orange light, and X-rays or gamma rays.
We have seen this effect in laboratory tests and have measured the radiation fields.
The power generating units of the future, using the plasmatic magnetic dilution
technology, will be a departure from the present power and light production technology.
Grapos, due to their ability can create rays at any frequency, can be used for example
for disinfection of any give environment and materials, by the production of Ultra
Violet lights for matter and Extreme Ultra Violet for Matter in space.
The same principle, for generating matching plasmatic magnetic fields for the
production of proteins in these reactors have been tested and proven to be correct. These
tests were carried out in 2008 and the production of proteins by the use of nitrogen from
air through this technology was proven to be simple and achievable.
In separate tests conditions, the hydrogen atoms of water were used to transfer the right
plasmatic magnetic fields to the right pmtics strength of plants and human cells for the
pmtics of the cell to gain nourishment or recover to their original level of plasmatic
magnetic fields’ strength.
This technology has been used in trial cases for helping volunteers with different
vitamin deficiencies, or cell plasmatic deficiencies, to recover from the disorders
produced by the deficiency, and people to live a normal life after years of suffering.
Alternatively, this technology can be used for production of new materials for coating
174
or new processes of coating.
At the same time, through simple magnetic plasmatic reactors, the lattice structure of
matter can be changed so that the nano-components of the matter can be realigned to
change their lattice formation to another. The change of characteristics and properties of
one element to another has been tested and confirmed to be correct by independent
organisations. In these tests, the nano-matter of an element was captured and then its
lattice formation, through the right plasmatic magnetic fields conditions, was changed
to attain new properties from the same matter. This was carried out through several
tests, at room temperature and pressure, where atomic carbon was initially released
from a C-H bound matter. The carbon was then allowed to deposit itself on a layer of
copper. This deposition was dependant on the presentation of the right plasmatic
magnetic fields at different points on the same copper Matter. This copper surface was
then tested and proven to have sections of nanolayer coating in the form of sp2, and on
the same layers and same condition the lattice structure changes the same material to a
diamond lattice structure, or what is known as sp3. Where, sp2 is a two-dimensional
nanolayer, and sp3 is a three-dimensional diamond-lattice nanostructure.
The plasmatic magnetic fields’ of reactors can be tuned to similar frequencies’ as the
plants pmtics, to generate certain vitamins and minerals. These single or multiplasmatic
magnetic fields producing reactor sources can and will replace the fertiliser
industries of today’s technologies in space for food production, once scientists grasp the
method of their use.
In tests, seeds of herbs were grown by being feed using water treated in these reactors,
the parallel seeds, which were grown normally with rainwater, died in early October.
The herbs that were watered from reactor system were still green till March of the
following year, because the molecules of the water were structured through the reactor
system to act as fertilisers. Similar tests are in progress.
In this section, it has been shown and explained some of what has been tested and
achieved through this new understanding. Scientists and users of this new technology
will find their own ways to expand and will add their own new knowledge to our
disclosures.
Seed of thought
Where, in the present time the majority of the nations in the third world due to the lack
of funds to purchase fuel even in having power stations, or being able to afford to build
generators at the cost of tens of million of dollars, they cannot afforded to run these
generators to provide power for their nationals. Secondly, there is not enough
production capacity to build new power stations and power grids. Therefore local
alternatives can be in the range of windmills and solar cells, but these will not solve the
incredible lack of electricity in next decades.
Now, through the use of Keshe generators reactors, which can cost as little as a new
car, these governments can provide electricity and clean water for their nationals.
175
Where, these governments do not need to pay for fuel as these reactors run on hydrogen
extracted from their environment. These reactors can be placed at the point-of-demand
in a village or in the cities without the need for transmission lines or for any expertise to
operate these reactors. Where through the production of electricity, purification systems
which are part of these reactors integral operations will allow fresh clean water supply
to every child, woman and man on this planet. This new energy source and clean source
of water, given opportunities to third world nations to rise above and from poverty and
reliance upon foreign aids and charities organisations. Where these nations can produce
food and warmth for their nation as the rest of developing world without the
backbreaking debt to other nations.
According to a United Nations report (Energy Challenge for Achieving the Millennium
Development Goals 2006), „Currently, at least 1.6 billion people do not have access to
electricity for lighting, refrigeration, mechanical power, telecommunications and
other beneficial uses. … Moreover under today’s policies and investment trends
in energy infrastructure, 1.5 billion people will still lack access to electricity in 2030″.
(42)
Of course this is not acceptable. It is clear that humanity is not capable to deliver
fundamental care to all of its members, even not within next twenty years!
Man is not complete and healthy if parts of it human structure suffers from paint of selfinflicting
disability, this is the same for the human race as whole. This race is not
complete until all its members have and can exists and have the privilege to live the
same standard of the development as the rest.
“The future is bright, the future is plasmatic magnetic fields based, through the
production and control of plasmatic dilution technology reactors to bring peace and
comfort to the human race.”
176
CHAPTER 26
Matters Experimental results and observations
Tests for the proof of all the concepts have been carried out over some years. The direct
results and observations made in some of these tests have already been mentioned in
some other parts of this book and now will be brought under one chapter collectively
and will be discussed in general.
The reason for writing this book is to disclose the theoretical new first principles of our
technology; because most of our test results are so groundbreaking that they cannot be
explained by actual knowledge. Actual science is partly based on a number of
mainstream accepted assumptions about fundamental interactions and particles and
matters, where these assumptions have become almost “laws”, and do not consider the
true occurrences of real events in the universal order of creation of particles, plasmas,
matters, energy, gravity and motion as they take place in the universe.
Where, the major processes in the universe are based on fusion and fission of Matters
and plasmas, and the transformations and conversions of matters from one form to
another. In this book we explain how such conversions and transformations can be
reached in plasma reactors, and by this insight we were able to attain such amazing
results. Where some people don’t feel comfortable with them, or a priori reject them
because these new findings and their applications counter their school of thought and
their financial gains.
For example, one of the major obstacles in the world of nuclear fusion has been to
overcome the Coulomb barrier for fusing two plasmas, and this problem has not been
solved for the past sixty years by all scientists in this industry, even though billions of
US Dollars and more has been spent by different nations in laboratories and fusion
reactors testing to overcome the weakest of the weakest of magnetic fields interactions
in the world of creation, which this is a magnetic barrier, also known as the Coulomb
barrier, where this barrier is exactly the Magravs of the plasma, and as now we know
how it is created, we have found the solution not to fight and force to cross this
magnetic magnetosphere barrier, but the solution is how to create an environment
matching the magnetic fields strength of this magnetosphere of the plasma for it to
open-up and unveil its real constituent Matters. As the environment of the whole reactor
becomes in magnetic fields strength equal to the magnetic fields strength environment
of the plasma. Therefore, through this method, there are no barriers to overcome, and
fusion of matters of plasmas or the use of the Magravs of the Matters of the plasma
becomes a child’s play.
For the first time in the world of energy and motion, we offer through dilution reactor
technology, at low costs, to open the plasma and dictate the strength and the resistance
of this Coulomb barrier to realize the dream of fusion.
Similarly, to achieve lift and motion where, the present space agencies are only able to
177
deliver a limited payload into space, and the burden and the costs of such launches of
crafts and personnel, cannot be met by one nation easily. Where, Magravs Grapos
reactors can lift much larger payloads at low costs, without limitation on passengers and
no weightlessness conditions in space.
Radiation
During tests in 2008, radiation detectors in the surrounding environment of a test reactor
detected high levels of magnetic fields radiation. These high-energy magnetic fields
have been measured more than 1.5 meters away from the plasma reactors. Where, there
were no neutron sources in the laboratory or in the building. Through known physics
or theories, these radiations should have not been in the environment.
These strong radiation fields were tested and looked for and were not present in the
laboratory at any other times with other different testing configurations with the same
reactors, using the same radiation measuring detectors.
Such high levels of magnetic fields radiations could have only been due to the release of
the magnetic fields that had been entrapped in the Matters of the plasmas, which the
system was set to produce. These releases of components of the plasma were achieved
during the specific pre-set configurations of loadings of reactors. These strong magnetic
fields were released by the operation of multi-core plasmatic dilution environment
reactors and at no other time they were detected in the laboratory.
Most of the reactors, mainly built and tested for lift and weight reductions, are made of
different simple parts, which some part have materials like plastic rings, and PVC, thus
these systems do not and could not have been operating at high temperatures.
In other tests in 2008, and in repeats of the same tests in January and February of 2009,
the same results have been achieved, all of which have been recorded on video.
In these tests with the use of a less than one gram of mixture of matters in the similar
multi-core dilution magnetic fields systems, fundamental plasma separations were
created through the same method as before. These tests were done using five different
reactors, each having a different set of internal configurations.
In all test settings of the reactors, different loadings of materials and different dynamics
for the reactors were used.
Weight reduction, motion and lift
In all cases, when the dilution of the plasma and the subsequent untangling of its
Matters in the reactors were achieved, then the effects of the disassociations of Matters
were observed through the effects they created internally in the reactor and externally
through lift and motion, and jamming of radio-frequencies and so on.
178
In the early original reactor tests, full lift was achieved so fast that the effects of free
motion were noticed a while after it was clearly apparent and were in progress, through
the replay of the video recorded sessions of the sessions of tests. Through video replay
of the recordings of tests, the motion of the system freely on the floor of the laboratory
could clearly be seen prior to physical observation of the lift of the reactor system.
These reactors have no protrusions, are not equipped with propellers, or portholes,
which could cause the lift of the reactor by air repositioning means.
In one configuration and loading of the system, control of the system was lost, so the
reactor had to be caught by hand in mid-air, that it could be brought under control
before it was damaged.
In one configuration, two reactors with different external bodies and two different
internal settings were used next to each other. These systems were kept about thirty
centimetres apart from each other. These reactors were entirely different in design and
had different settings and loadings. In the two-system loadings that were adjacent to
each other, the systems’ interacting fields pushed one reactor away from the stronger
Magnetic fields of the two systems. With the same systems and different configurations
of loading one system was attracted by and was pulled by the stronger gravitational
fields strength system, where physical force was used to keep the two systems away
from colliding with each other.
“These systems have no portholes, and no physical means of interaction with the
outside environment and no aerodynamic systems to cause them to propel up or move
side-ways through the air, and they have been no solid magnets or electro-magnets for
repositioning or for motion, for them to move the total collective weight of 15 kg of the
two systems. There are no external systems and tracts used to help causing the lift or
motion of the system in the laboratory. Thus the motion is not due to propulsion or
aerodynamic design and movement”. This is the conclusion of independent expert
appointed as observer for the validation of the results of the tests.
During other tests systems weighting several kilograms, their weight were reduced in a
controlled manner at increments of one hundred grams and two hundred grams per
setting of a reactor and these tests were all videoed and recorded. For reduction of
weight in these increments, the systems needed less than one thousandths of a gram of a
new material combination as Matmags, even in some tests no new material was
introduced and by just adjusting some internal parameters of the reactors reductions
were achieved.
With the use of such a small amount of physical mass of matters used, creation of such
lift and the reduction of system weight seven kilograms, has been said to be impossible
without any external energy or equipment.
Through the understanding of the principles of the plasma dilution methods of
disassembling the plasma components to utilise its sub-components, systems were
designed to achieve these effects in simple ways. With the interaction of the
disassociated Matters components of plasmas in different parts of the system, then the
scene was set for creation of profound effects such as a reduction in weight with respect
to the Magravs forces of the planet.
179
The interaction of the strong Antimatters’ of the plasmas components, which were
released in the different cores of the plasma dilution reactors and the interaction of the
fundamental magnetic fields of Antimatter upon each other, was observed during
different tests. The interaction of pmtics of Antimatter leads to the creation of the strong
Magravs in the vicinity of, and within, the reactor cores.
Through the control of plasmas and by being able to separate the components of
Antimatters and utilising their constituent magnetic fields in reactor cores, this led to the
creation of Magravs forces that initially led to a reduction in the weight of the whole
system. In following on with this process there was a detachment of the system from the
ground as the system found a new Magravs positioning in respect to the Earth’s
Magravs force strength.
When looking at the effects and results achieved, there is no doubt about the powers of
the interaction of the magnetic fields of Matters, which were diluted and their fields
were allowed to interact in these reactors’ cores. These effects were attained by
allowing a number of the pmtics of the Antimatters of the plasmas to integrate in one
core, and allowing these fields of Antimatters to interact with the same and similar
fields integrated through the same principles in other parts of the reactor. Where, the
interaction of the pmtics of the components’ of Antimatters in different parts of the
system with each other, led to the generation of strong specific plasmatic Magravs. The
reactor facilitates for these stronger Magnetic fields to interact and generate strong
plasmatic Magravs in the reactor cores, with allowing these Magravs created in the
reactor cores to interact with the Magravs forces of the planet, and due to the strength of
the fields produced in the reactor, this causes’ reduction or increase in the weight of the
system in respect to the planet’s Magravs.
The new Magravs created within the system, pushing against the Magravs of the planet
at the boundary of the systems fields, causes the variations in the weight according to
the combination and configuration of the Grapos loading. The produced Magravs forces
within the confines of the system are independent of the external planetary gravitational
fields. In numerous tests, it was observed and recorded that the changes in the internal
gravitational field forces of the system, did not necessarily change the weight of the
system in respect to the Magravs of the planet. The interacting internal pmtics forces
clearly showed to be generated independently by increase and decrease through internal
electrical measuring components set in the system for the detection of these types of
changes.
It has become clear that it is the interaction of the Magravs of the planet and the system
that have brought about the reduction or increase in the weight and lift or descend of the
system in respect to the planet. In some tests, these increases or decreases in the weight
of the system have been without any addition or withdrawal of physical matters from
the system.
In continuing with the same processes of creation of varying Magravs in the system,
weight reduction was managed and followed to such an extent that the total balance of
the interaction of Magravs of the system and the planet, in respect to each other,
eventually zero reading on the measuring scale system. The point was reached where
there was total physical detachment of the system from the table or floor first, and then
180
the upward motion of the system, away from the surface was achieved.
Some call this the anti-gravity principle but in fact, this interaction and new balance in
Magravs forces in between the system and planet, is due to both gravitational and
Magnetic positioning of the reactor system in respect to the planet, as both objects are in
possession of active dynamic plasmatic Magravs forces.
In a specific reactor, set for weight reduction, internal gravitational field reduction and
zero-gravitational field force were disturbed, where the human touch was applied
causing the change in the magnetic interface between the fields of the system and
planet. This gave a tingling feeling on the tip of fingers after repeated tests.
In numerous tests over years, where the equilibrium state of internal Magravs strength
between cores were achieved, the whole system, including internal physical dynamic
parts, came to halt, sometimes for up to thirty minutes or more. Then, the dynamic
motion of the systems re-set by itself and the system restarted. This re-setting has been
due to losses and reduction of one Magnetic and/or gravitational field strength in
respect to another within the cores of the reactor.
A number of times, external power sources were used to try to restart the system. In
some cases measured energy of up to three, four and eight times the normal operational
energy was continuously applied to the internal systems to try to push-start the system,
but to no avail.
This shows that the power generated by a countable number of Matters of molecules,
was so powerful that additional systems built in the reactor cores could not overcome
the kinds of powers produced by so few Matters magnetic fields interactions.
These tests have shown the creation of independent Magravs in separate cores of the
reactor. They show the creation of independent plasmatic Magravs within the system
boundary, and then the combination of the same Magravs prevailing around the outside
or beyond physical boundary of the reactor as magnetospheric or cosmic radiations
were produced, which these types of fields are prevalent as have been observed in space
around stars and planets.
Indications are that these radiations created in these system, due to their characteristics,
do not shown any side effects in the human tissue of the operator up to this moment,
years after having been involved with these fields tests.
These fields around the cores are considered to be due to the interaction of plasmatic
magnetic fields’ of Matters of plasma and environments’ Matter or matter, and are
independently created in different parts of the cores of the system.
This technology opens up new opportunities for the industrial development and
manufacturing of systems that have different gravitational conditions inside the system
for living, and have different gravitational conditions compared to the outside and
around the physical boundary of the craft. This allows for having a one-G gravitational
field force for the normal habitation of Man inside spacecrafts, or in a dome outside and
around the crafts for habitation. While the conditions outside the craft can be zero G to
181
tens of G’s. The passengers of crafts using Grapos can walk around the craft, or in and
around the dome created by the extension of Magravs of the systems, on any planet
surface, as if they were in Earth’s gravitational field force environment.
No high temperature core environments or sudden surges of heat were recorded in any
tests. The reactors were in some cases opened immediately after operation for new
settings, in a normal lab environment. There was no physical damage ever noticed to the
internal parts of the system. This includes melting and twisting or destruction of any
parts due to the presence of Matters.
Even though we lost a full system by pure enthusiasm to catch, lift upwards, which the
jumping on the systems after several times cracked the structure and the systems was
lost. We have kept the reactor casing for further analyses of matter lattice changes, and
another reactor was damaged when a Black hole condition was replicated.
On only one occasion, where a specific setting was used, a black spot was noted on one
of the external sides of the reactor core wall. This is supposedly was due to an energy
surge during the test. The effect of the black burn was not removed for further analysis.
Production of matters
In different tests, a new orange and gold coloured material was noticed on two
occasions in a reactor, and samples were collected for further testing to show the
material production capability of the system.
This method of the production of Matter can be used by manipulating and changing the
plasma’s and rearranging them for the production of oxygen, hydrogen and water from
collections of initial fundamental particles found in space, for human deep-space travel
and colonisation. Where, the components of plasma absorbed from the cosmos are
loosened by producing the right pmtics strength in the reactor for production of the first
two atoms of hydrogen. Using further plasmas from space, in the matching gravitational
fields as of the atoms of oxygen in the same reactor, this element can be produced. Then
through the same reactor’s operation, this allows the combination of the two elements,
of hydrogen and oxygen, which was produced from the space plasma, this allowing the
production of drinking water.
In the future tests, one can attempt to combine the gravitational effects of the systems
for production of energy, material production and other capabilities of the technology
all simultaneously in one reactor. We have achieved this much but there is a lot more to
learn.
These reactors are truly an integrated system, which can produce and attain several
effects and properties, like production of Magravs, creation of matters and so on
simultaneously.
182
Dark Matter technology
The system using the Dark Matter in travelling through the Magravs of the planet
creates no magnetospheric conditions, friction, or pmtics force resistance, between its
pmtics Magravs and the planet pmtics Magravs. Thus, zones around a craft can be
created that there is no magnetospheric field between the craft’s magnetic interface and
the planetary system’s. Hence, a craft using the Dark Matter cascading can travel
within a stronger pmtics, like that of the Earth, without detection since the system can
create no interface magnetosphere, as there would be no visible light to be seen with
this method of motion.
Through this method of using the Dark Matter for transportation, high-speed motions
can be attained for spacecraft in planetary systems, solar systems and galaxies.
Using the Dark Matter principle for transportation, the environment between the
systems and the planet is saturated with the dynamic plasmatic magnetic fields of the
system and the planet. This zone appears to possess energies but they cannot be linked
to any source. Even though the source of the dynamic pmtics, in motion around the
system or so-called energies of the pmtics, is set in the centre of a strong plasmatic
Magravs systems inside the crafts and centre of the planet. Such Dark energy fields give
the appearance and confirm the existence of dynamic energies, which have no explicit
source of origin. Where, the source of energy or the dynamic pmtics is the hidden
gravitational source in the centre of the Matters reactors and the planet.
This new technology is a radical breakaway from the hold that physical matter have had
on the destiny of Man on the Earth.
With this new understanding of the methods of how Matters are created in the universe,
it is possible for Man to use the real Matter sources for energies and powers available to
him in the universe for his future scientific evolution.
183
CHAPTER 27
Discussions and Conclusions
With this new understanding, the elementary particles have become to be the ‘magnetic
fields’ and their interaction leading to the creation of Magravs, this leading to the
creation of Matters, as the state of each Matter depending upon the strength of the
magnetic fields which have led to its creation in respect to their environment fields
strength, which the Matter appears as the Matter, the Dark Matter or the Antimatter,
where the collective interaction of the Matters Magravs, leads to the creation of the
Initial fundamental Plasma (the Neutron), where the environmental magnetic fields
forces conditions, around the Plasma, dictates the physical appearance states of the
Matter part of the plasma as matter, this being solid, liquid or gas.
It is obvious that the universe will never stop creating new Matters and matters and their
effects, and their interactions, as the universe is a soup of dynamic and ever-changing
conditions, created by the Magravs positioning of plasmas, dynamic Matters, matters
and their components and effects.
Man can learn how to create the same conditions as the universal order, and to rearrange
these fundamental particles for his use, in a much simpler way than he has chosen up to
this point in his path of technological and scientific evolution by the use of matter(s).
In the present state-of-art technologies for the production of energy, scientists have
chosen the path of force and destruction of atoms and molecules to overcome barriers.
In the universal order of creation, one works within the magnetic fields forces to
achieve the same and even better results.
This ethos of burning and destruction has been the fundamental focal point for Man’s
survival in his environment, due to what he has been conditioned to in his evolutional
path on Earth. He has seen the power of fire, from fires in forests, and he has used this
knowledge to keep himself warm and so he has learned to do the same using the same
methods and materials. By perfecting this art, through the burning of wood and oil and
so on, he has managed to create energies for cooking and warmth and running
industries.
Then he saw the birds and understood the concept of motion in air and so he used the
concept of fire to create propulsion and jet engines, still burning one form of fuel or
another to achieve flight, still based on the principle of matters repositioning and
conversion.
He has seen death through disease, so he has produced other elements to destroy the
germs that can cause and bring an end to his uncertain and fragile physical life.
If man would learn to work within the structure of the universal order of creation of
184
Matters and the method and principle of their use, he will learn that he does not need to
burn or destroy anything to keep himself warm or feed himself, or even to overcome
diseases.
He can very simply change the characteristics of the plasmatic magnetic fields of the
elements that caused the misbalance in the first place, leading to his ailment, without
swallowing a single tablet in his lifetime.
We have developed and tested such simple systems in the past years and have seen their
amazing results.
For example people suffering from Fibromyalgia for thirty years or more, within 3
months of drinking water through these systems, have started living a normal life
without any signs of their disease. Follow-up over 18 months has shown a total
eradication of the ailment.
We have tested this technology on other forms of illnesses and viruses and the results
are amazing. However, this is what is to be expected with the use of the true knowledge
of the creation as has been disclosed in this and future books.
With this new disclosure, man in the future will learn to live and operate in the real
universal order of creation of Matters and their existence in the universe for his life. He
will never destroy any Matter or matter, but he will learn to work within their structure.
He will learn to achieve more, with less use of the resources in his environment. This is
an improvement on the past, whereby at the present by the use of destructive methods,
he has brought himself to the point that the abuse of the matters is now endangering his
future on his own home planet.
Man has to learn to work with the real elementary particles and elements and their
functions in the universe, such as magnetic fields and their interactions, for him to be
able to produce what he needs irrespective of where in space he might be or would want
to be.
Maybe this knowledge and the proof of its pleasures will change the ingrained ethos of
destruction for the survival for man. One could even hope for a change in his animal
instinct of killing other people and other creatures of god to survive.
Additionally he can change his habits and the instinct to want more since through the
understanding of this technology he can have whatever he desires from his materialistic
world.
In this disclosure, some theoretical nature of the universe has been spoken about, but the
real physical aspects can be created to achieve the same conditions as in the universe as
we have shown through our tests.
Man will be able to carry on with his life, but at the same time will be able to live in a
balanced environment.
185
The reactors we have developed, which in real terms are miniature universes, that can
provide man with all his needs, such as water, food and medicine for him to survive and
enjoy the beauties of creation.
The conditions in these reactors are soft and gentle environments and the methods of
their use for control and creation of mans’ needs are based on working within the
universal structure, and not destroying to achieve, as has been the principle of the past
for the Man.
For example, when the principles of the creation of Magravs are applied to the lower
orders of creation, like the interlocking of atoms to make molecules, there are
explanations as to why certain types of Matters are attracted to the reactor, and why
certain molecules are, or can be, produced in certain ways and combinations, in certain
parts of the universe.
The same applies in the even lower orders of creation, that one can explain and produce
certain magnetic fields and their interactions that can lead to the creation of present
fundamental elements in the centre of the proton, plasma, an atom and finally the man
himself.
The world of science has to understand the conditions by which the interactions of
initial magnetic fields can lead to the creation of an initial state, for the creation of the
Matter, matter, plasma and finally atom.
Then there is a need to understand and demonstrate as is done in this book the way
Matters and matters are created in vast spans of the galaxies.
Scientists have studied over centuries the structure of matters and the atom, and their
interactions, in their material and tangible states of matter. However, the structure and
method by which the atom is created, maintains and guaranties it’s existence has not
been fundamentally fully understood, due to the lack of overall overview of workings of
the universal order of Matters. Even the construction of protons with its subcomponents
(quarks, gluons), up to today, is based on assumptions and indications by
the use of particle accelerators and plasma reactors, by only looking at matter
components of the proton and some Antimatter parts. So the present scientific world
looks for an answer in the construction of the proton on the matter-to-matter level.
By the present science, the existence of the Matter, the Antimatter and the Dark Matter
are largely considered to be independent entities in different points in space, and have
never been considered to be as one collective and all being integrated parts of one
system making up the plasma, up to this disclosure.
Mass of the Matters and Mass of the plasma
In the new knowledge we consider the three different quarks of a proton, as the three
different Matters (Matter, Antimatter and Dark Matter) of the plasma.
186
Where each Matter is created through the interaction of at least two different magnetic
fields or pmtics, where through the interaction of these two plasmatic magnetic fields of
different strength, initial gravitational and Magnetic field for creation of different
Matters of the fundamental plasma are set to start.
So that the interaction of at least two pmtics of each Matter creates it’s own Magravs
forces. What we call the interaction of the Magravs strength forces between and in
respect to each other of these three different Matters of the proton.
Where, through the understanding of the method of creation of different Matters of the
plasma, due to interaction of at least two magnetic fields and the creation of
gravitational and Magnetic fields, this confirms that each Matter irrespective of its
environment Magravs possesses an independent mass of its own. In the present science
this is called the mass of the quark. In fact each Matter, Dark Matter, Antimatter and
Matter, has its own individual mass in the plasma. As each Matter is created by the
interaction of at least two different magnetic fields strength, the total mass of the
plasma is the mass of the three Matters plus the total interaction of Magravs interaction
of the overall plasmatic magnetic fields within the plasma. Consequently the total mass
of the plasma is always considered to be larger than the total mass of its three Matters’
components.
Due to the dynamism of the interaction of the two initial pmtics, leading to the
progressive creation of the Magravs of each Matter, each Matter is always in a dynamic
rotational state within the plasma. Where the speeds’ of the dynamic rotation of the
different Matters in the plasma are not the same and they are independent from each
other, since their speed of rotation is set by the strength of their initial magnetic fields
interactions. Where in the present science the observation of this natural phenomenon of
rotation is called the spin of each quark. One can compare this, in cosmological sense,
as the independent speed of rotation of the Sun and Earth, in spite of that they are
within the same solar system. Where the initial plasmatic magnetic fields strength,
which leads to the creation of different Matter(s) in it’s interaction with it’s
environment pmtics strength, leads to the creation of an individual magnetosphere of a
specific field strength for each of the Matters. Where the intensity of each
magnetosphere creates different light intensity in its environment.
Now we understand that the interaction between the pmtics of the magnetosphere of
each Matter of the initial fundamental plasma leads to the release of different pmtics
strength fragments in the range of visible light (Fig. 18).
Due to the interaction of the plasma of each of the three Matters with each other and the
release of light or energy, these interactions in parts reduces their strength and the
pmtics content of each Matter, where due to these reductions in Matters quantity and
strength of pmtics, different colours are attained by these interactions for each Matter
during the cycle of the life of each Matter.
It has become clear that all states of Matters are the same in their nature of their creation
with only differences in their field strength. What does differentiate these Matters from
one another is in principle the strength of their fields and their position(s) and
187
interaction(s) with other pmtics in their environment and in respect to each other.
Thus, Matters are Antimatters and Dark Matters depending on the point-of-observation
and the field strength of the environment of the appearance at a given point and
position, but they are all made of the same entity at source, which is the magnetic field.
The front-cover image of this book has been chosen specifically to emphasise for the
scientific world to reconsider their assumptions.
The Matter can change to, or appears as the Antimatter and the Dark Matter and viceversa,
if the right conditions and the right plasmatic magnetic fields forces are given or
taken away from the pmtics of the Matter.
In this disclosure, we have explained in a simple way that magnetic fields are the new
initial fundamental particles, and the magnetic fields are the new elementary particles
instead of what has been assumed at present as quarks. So, the magnetic fields and their
interactions are the creators of these quarks and so on, in the plasmas.
Then we have explained how the Matter, the Antimatter and the Dark Matter, and the
relevant energies of the Matter, the Antimatter and the Dark Matter, are all decided,
dictated and created at the inception of the creation of the first stages of the creation of
the initial fundamental plasmas of these Matters.
In this disclosure, we have discussed the results and shown how the three states of the
Matter, the Antimatter and the Dark Matter are created, but through real tests
conditions, we have confirmed the co-existence of these three Matters and their
respective energies.
For example, in tests there have been the very strong magnetic wavelengths of cosmic
gamma-like radiations levels, which have been detected for meters around the system,
where there has been no physical source of such radioactive materials ever being
present. Whereas, it is a known fact that alpha and beta rays cannot travel that far in
room condition environment. These levels of radiations could only be created through
the interaction and the creation of strong magnetic fields in the reactors cores, which in
their interaction with the pmtics of matters in the room environment have led to the
release of these gamma-like radiations. This is exactly by the same principle as the
Magravs generated in the centre of the stars in their interaction with the plasmas of
matters on their surface, generate lights and high-level cosmic radiations.
An atom is considered to be “a collection of different densities and strengths of
magnetic fields interacting with each other, in different magnetic mixtures and levels,
in, and under, the same physical rules of the existence as the rest of the Matters, matters
and bodies in the universe”. The atom is nothing more than a collection of the lower
order energy magnetic fields strength in motion in the universe, that always come
together in the same specific pattern of dynamic pmtics and strength.
The question is, that, is it the collections of magnetism, which created the MATTERS’
of the plasma, or did the existence of the MATTERS of plasma create the magnetism?
188
At this point, the existence and understanding of the Dark Matter becomes important,
since the human eye and the physical machines of today can only observe what is in
possession of visible and detectable energy fields.
The Dark Matter is created by interaction of magnetic fields which create and are in
possession of intense fields of gravity and magnetism, and at the same time, and it is
void of visible light in respect to their given environment magnetic fields strength. On
the other hand, the existence of the Dark Matter is position dependent and pmtics
strength balance dependent, in respect to its environments pmtics’ strength.
Through the operation of hundreds of static and dynamic tests we have very strong
indications that the universe is indeed made in the normal conditions and of packages of
dynamic pmtics.
From our observations, we can say with a large degree of certainty, that the dynamism
of the whole universe is constantly maintained through the principle of the interaction
and attraction of different pmtics, according to their strength and positioning in respect
to their neighbouring rays, fields and plasmas. Where magnetic fields of different
strengths are locked to each other by the principle of their Plasmatic Magnetic Energy
(PME) and polarity. These causing the first stage of the creation of the magnetic
attraction or what is called the Magravs force for the creation of the first Matters and
plasma and further on of the first atoms, molecules, matter, stars and galaxies.
Through the above disclosures, it is clear that these components of plasma themselves
have no solid parts, but are merely a collection of energy and fields, trapped or
interlocked in different magnetic fields strength of the other parts, according to their
strength where, they can appear as the smaller components of these parts or near to
visible as the physical state of matter.
These dynamic pmtics or energies on their own in the universe are not that influential,
but as they gather with other collections of dynamic pmtics or energies of the same
levels, they appear as part of Matter, the energy constituents of an electron or the Matter
parts of matters, that they show and exert their influence.
When the pmtics binding principles are fully understood, the world of creation and the
understandings of the origin and working of the universe will become much easier to
work with.
Why, only a part of the pmtics levels is visible to Man is not a mystery, but the reality is
that Man has the habit of only looking at things in physical terms. If Man looks for the
real existence of the effects of the energy levels, he will open his eyes to a new horizon
in the world of creation.
The question is if one can develop the pmtics as in the universe and manage to release
part of these plasmatic magnetic fields from initial plasma as energy, then, one can
manage to control the level of these pmtics and their interactions that are needed to
create and replicate energy combinations that can lead to the creation of the Matter and
then matters. This in time will be done and depending upon the openness of Man to
accept the realities of his owns creation and his existence in the midst of others.
189
In developing reactors, which have been openly disclosed, and in understanding their
modes of operation, which are discussed, these reactors will not only be used as future
sources of energy for Mans energy needs, further, these reactors will become the
incubator for the creation of the energy levels, which can lead to the creation of the
pmtics, which will lead to the creation of Matter and matters, like oxygen, food, water
and so on.
Through the use of the plasma dilution and gravitational reactors systems of the future,
one can and will experience the Black Hole concept and the reversibility of the polarity
of planets (12), as we have done in our lab tests and become aware of their pleasure and
dangers.
In these plasma dilution technology reactors it is not only the fusion of Matters that is
possible, but also the fusion of Antimatters and Dark Matters and their real application
in the production of Antimatter and Dark Matters atoms and molecules that will become
part of daily use. Where, these will be used for the production of energies and effects,
which are above the levels of the Matter components strength.
The beauty of the application of these universal reactors will be the opportunity for the
creation and manipulation of the much weaker and smaller energy levels that can lead to
the creation of electrons and protons.
These weaker strength magnetic fields for the creation of Matters will be noticed and
can be collected at the outer boundary of the plasma, but not on the edge of the plasma
in the reactor. This is due to the fact that the edges of these reactors are dynamic and are
violent areas in which temperature interfaces will not be so suitable, but can allow
creating the conditions for weak energy levels to be maintained and to manifest
themselves. These zones are good to create the conditions for the creation of electrons’
plasma, where loose plasma conditions are needed for fine-tuning of the fields in these
reactors. This is due to the fact that electrons, in their foundation, are made of low
energy levels bindings and interacting with each other, largely in a dynamic volume as
compared to the protons, and in possession of weaker binding energy than protons.
To create conditions for the production of the protons, there is a need for the same
energy levels, but tighter and stronger magnetic fields plasma conditions are essential
and the size of the plasma and the mixture of energies available in both conditions are
important.
The techniques for the use of the ambient temperature reactors to perform fusion or the
production of new and heavier atoms can be learnt through the development of initial
fundamental plasma dilution technology, which is very much different from the mode
of operation of the present fission or fusion reactor technologies.
In the present nuclear fusion industry, the most important point in the world of creation,
the presence of controllable gravitational field forces, has been absent and totally
ignored by scientists.
In dilution plasma technology, as in the universe, gravitational field forces within the
190
systems are the cornerstones of the operation of the reactor.
This is a unique method of the creation of new Matter and the creation of energy, which
has been explained in the operation of dilution plasma technology. This is exactly how
Matters are created in the universe.
In the right conditions and mixture of initial fundamental particles, the use of plasma
dilution technology will lead to the transformation of the initial fundamental plasma
into protons’ and electrons’ to create the basic matter and simple atoms like hydrogen.
With the right method of application of the plasma dilution technology, hydrogen atoms
can be used for the production of the heavier elements.
It is important to note that, in an atom, “The interaction between the two pmtics of
neutrons and protons Magravs are in fact the source of the double magnetic fields of
the atom and consequently the creation of the Magravs of the whole atom.
Even though neutrons are supposed to be balanced pmtics entities, the magnetic energy
of the nucleus can be increased up to a limit without the disintegration of the inner
gravitational forces of its constituent parts for its components Matters field strength to
attain the plasmatic magnetic energy of a higher strength or new pmtics element.
In his progressive evolution, Man has learnt to use what has been available to him, like
wood to create fire, steam to create power, the use of oil for engines to create motion,
and in the recent past the breaking of the atom and joining of plasma in nuclear reactors
for energy.
Through the understanding of the creation of the initial fundamental plasma, the
energies of not only the Matter parts of the plasma are used, but this technology allows
the utilisation of all Matters of the plasma, that is the Matter, the Antimatter and the
Dark Matter and their energies that these possess and can produce, that come into play
and can be used.
In the other words, we welcome the Man to the real world of creation.
191
CHAPTER 28
Insight into the Future
Using the new acquired knowledge from above chapters, one can look into the future
and say that the struggles of the past will bring beautiful fruits of creation for the future
of the man.
From understanding of the operation and relation between magnetic fields within any
structure, this being an atom, molecules, and even a star, different types of life in all
corners of the universe can exist in all forms, and through other matters then the
nitrogen based protein chain of the human race, which other lives through their different
pmtics can operate through the same principles as the human protein chain. These
creatures through the balance of their pmtics criterion do and can exist in the spans of
universe. In fact, their protein chains with different matters than nitrogen could be more
efficient in its use of passive pmtics than the humans’ protein chain in using pmtics
from the soup of the universe.
These Beings might have different colour of liquid distribution medium than Mans’ red
blood, but not necessarily this mean that they are any different from the Man in essence.
For example, if the liquid of life for these creatures of god have the potassium as the
base element instead of nitrogen or mixture of the potassium and the nitrogen, then this
liquid can function as good as, and even better than nitrogen-based protein of the human
blood for converting and the use of Matters and matters in the universal soup of
supplies. Even these Beings’ protein-based cell can be more efficient for the conversion
and the use of the passive pmtics of the Matters of universe. This efficiency can mean
more and different comprehension, intelligence, and brain structure, etc.
Thus difference in these creatures and the Man will, and could be only the colour of
their medium liquid system in their bodies.
The Potassium, in combination with pmtics of matters like the hydrogen and the oxygen
mixture, in vacuum condition of systems in the Earth atmosphere, creates a silver
greenish pmtics magnetospheric interface colour. Which, to mans’ protein mixture, in
the light absorption spectrum, these creatures with potassium-base proteins can be
different in colour. Thus the liquid of life of these creatures in its interaction with
Earth’s atmosphere pmtics will create blood of different colour than the human red
blood. Even in their external appearance they might be, or having to be reflecting the
colour of their blood (9).
In reality as different planets have acquired different matters due to their Matters
Magravs strength as their base materials, at their inception in their galaxies, rather than
nitrogen or potassium as the base for what is called their protein for cell production to
sustain life in their medium, in mans’ journeys into deep space to these planets and
192
zones, he will come across different intelligence, colour, sizes, transparency and shapes
creatures.
Man has to understand that the level of intelligence, colours of skin or blood and shapes
of these beings in the universe, can and is, intriguing as is in his home base with his red
blood of the Earth to them.
What is important is that these creatures, with their pmtics balance protein chain could
have a different viruses tolerance passive magnetic fields levels than to the Man in the
Earth atmosphere pmtics condition too.
From this point on in the journey of the Man in the universe, the prejudices of colour of
skin, and the nationhood will have no meaning. From this point on the colour of the
blood is only the means of indication of the origin of point of life reference and nothing
more and nothing less.
In the short-term for the future one can envisage:
The implications and applications of the transition of Matters will be the key to the
survival of Man in the hostile environments of the universe. If this technology is
understood fully, Man will be able to conquer the control of most of the forces within
the universe and use them to his advantage. The use of the transition states of Matters
are such a powerful tools for science for the future, that if their applications are
harvested in full, most of diseases of the present and future can be eradicated. Through
the appropriate use of this knowledge, Man can use the pmtics strength to free himself
from most ailments, by producing the right pmtics strength equal to his protein level
configuration, to reset the cells in his body to their right and original pmtics strength of
operation without swallowing a single tablet.
For example, Man can produce enough food from the initial plasmas of the universe,
without the need for soil, by simply converting the initial plasma to the atoms and
molecules of the proteins and vitamins that he requires, at the point-of-demand,
anywhere in the universe. As the food, itself is made of and is from the conversion of
different dynamic pmtics strength. Where, the planets and animals do the conversion for
man, for them by absorbing the pmtics strength of the Sun, and converting these
different pmtics strength to vitamins and proteins for mans consumption for his
survival. Where plasma dilution reactors can do the direct conversion of what animals
and plants do for production of pmtics strength in levels that can be used by humans,
and have the same effect and gives the same pmtics amount and strength needed by the
different cells in the human body.
At the same time by the use of plasma dilution reactors, there will be no need to carry
all of Man’s physical needs with him into space, like oxygen, water, food or matters for
his colonisation of planets, and space. Man will be able to convert Matters-to-matters
through the fusion technology using plasma dilution reactors in space as he travels, and
produce what he needs at any given point in space (Fig. 56).
Man can produce any material from the initial plasmas absorbed from the environment
193
of space, he can produce any Matter or matters at the point-of-demand, this being an
atom of hydrogen, oxygen, water, protein molecules, leafs’ of gold or sheets of steel.
The crafts of the future will not need to carry any raw basic materials for the production
of parts into space. Man can produce materials for the construction of permanent
habitation zones at any point in space and any planetary environment, through the use
of dilution plasma and Grapos reactors.
Systems can be developed, which even in possession of the Dark Matter gravitational
field forces, the same system can produce balanced pmtics strength in respect to its
environment, for the system to appear as the source of Dark energy.
Systems can be developed, which have the ability to produce internal Magravs forces
that can be tolerated by the human body. However, at the same time, the same system is
being able to generate a balanced external pmtics strength in respect to its surrounding
environment, these pmtics created by the system can be matching to the environment so
that they do not have to interact with other systems pmtics forces (like those of the
planetary systems’ magnetic fields forces), so the pmtics around this region of the craft
can have the appearance of systems that can produce Dark Matters and Dark energy.
However in one instance, by creating the balanced pmtics in respect to its environment,
the systems that have been physically visible in one position in the given space, without
a change of position, suddenly become dark or translucent in respect to their
environment. In these systems and condition of operation the interaction between the
balanced pmtics strength of the system and the fields of the planetary system can be
brought to be matching without the system ever moving, this giving the impression that
the system has moved to another position.
New systems can be developed that can produce instantly as much energy-on-demand,
at temperature and pressure independent conditions, anywhere in the universe.
In possession of this new knowledge and Technology: Man can free himself from the
shackles of the Earths gravitational field forces.
Through the understanding of the methods of creation and control of pmtics, Man can
produce its own controlled protection Magravs magnetospheric conditions within and
around the crafts, with the use of the plasma dilution Magravs positioning reactors,
these magnetospheric field forces strength will be similar to the Earth Magnetic field
strength (Fig. 62) or similar to the magnetosphere of an electron around its proton (Fig.
63). Where, the Matmags of transport for the crafts of the future can be gathered from
the plasmatic magnetic environment of the universe.
The Magravs positioning systems (Grapos) can be used as much in a plasma, on Earth,
in Space as they can be used in deep liquid environments, and galaxies, irrespective of
the pressures and temperature around the craft.
194
Fig. 62: The plasma dilution Magravs positioning reactors used in a craft due to the interaction
of their plasmatic magnetic fields can lead to the creation of shining silver light in the
atmosphere of the Earth.
Fig. 63: Initial fusion process for the production of matters and creation of bright
magnetosphere of the electron as it approaches’ and is amalgamated into the plasma of the
proton of the atom.
Our hope, is that this technology cannot and will not be allowed to be utilised for
destruction, killing and damage to any environment or against any of God’s created
195
Matters and creatures, whether in possession of intelligence or not.
God help Man with this knowledge so that Man will find peace within himself and
others.
As Mans weakness, his greed and his hunger for power and control, soon he will come
to be thought the lesson that there is no forgiveness for the ones’ whom misuse this
knowledge and the technology for harming others.
By understanding in totality this new knowledge and what it can bring, maybe now Man
will understand the meaning of that there are balances in the overall construction of his
initial fundamental materials and that their lives always have to be within their
limitations, of these balances.
Mans’ fundamental construction of his initial state magnetic field structure, is always
the same in force and energy and specific in its initial components, as the initial
fundamental components of Matters, or matters of the universe cannot take more than
what they need to be constructed of the pmtics of the universe and balance enough to
share their inner constituents pmtics to pass on what is needed by others’ configurations
for them to exist, even if this giving can mean and can bring about their own demise.
Thus every creation, in its essence, has the attributes of its creator. Therefore, with this
new knowledge and the reality of its existence, maybe Man can strive to understand the
truth about himself and purpose of his creation in the universe.
196
Fig. 64: The fundamental insight.
In general, I can say,
“God has been the creator of All,
and Man the converter of some”.
197
References
1: The inner-inner core of Earth
Don L. Anderson*
Seismological Laboratory, California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, CA 91125
http://www.pnas.org/content/99/22/13966.full.pdf
2: Researchers confirm discovery of Earth’s inner, innermost core
Public release date: 10-Mar-2008
James E. Kloeppel
kloeppel@uiuc.edu
University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign
The work was funded by the National Science Foundation
3: The innermost inner core of the Earth: Evidence for a change in anisotropic
behavior at the radius of about 300 km
Miaki Ishii* and
Adam M. Dziewo ski Department of Earth and Planetary Sciences, Harvard
University, 20 Oxford Street, Cambridge, MA 02138
The National Academy of Sciences
4: The inner inner core of Earth
D. L. Anderson
Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 2002 99:13966-13968
5: Robust Normal Mode Constraints on Inner-Core Anisotropy from Model Space
C. Beghein and J. Trampert
SearchScience 2003 299:552-555
6: Fermilab
http://www.fnal.gov/
7: Fermilab Finds Antimatter Clues in Quick-Change Particle
http://www.particlephysics.ac.uk/news/news-archive/2006/new-clues-in-Antimattermystery.
html
8: Fermilab probes Matter- Antimatter transitions
http://physicsworld.com/cws/article/news/24639
9: The universal order of creation. (Written 5.7.2006)
10: Cosmic Rays (Release date 24.3.2004)
11: The Airborne reactor (Release date 25.3.2004)
198
12: The seed of the Earth (Release date 25.3.2004)
13: The creation of Black Hole (Release date 25.3.2004)
14: Magnetosphere (Release date 9.6.2004)
15: Correction to the Einstein equation of Relativity (Release date 15.6.2004)
16: Introduction to the new system (Release date 2.7.2004)
17: The rings of Saturn (Release date 2.7.2004)
18: The creation of gravity (Release date 11.7.2004)
19: Death of a star (Release date 26.7.2004)
20: Fusion (Release date 28.7.2004)
21: Life of a Cell (Release date 28.11.2004)
22:The Atom (Release date 19.12.2004)
23: Magnetism (Release date 8.1.2005)
24: The creation of the magneto-gravitational force (Release date 5.2.2005)
25: The core of the Earth (Release date 20.4.2005)
26: The electron-atomic welding (Release date 3.5.2005)
27: Shutdown and safety of the reactor core (Release date 6.6.2005)
28: Reactor Start-up (Release date 9.6.2005)
29: The energy balance of the reactor (Release date 29.6.2005)
30: Nuclear decay or half-life (Release date 20.7.2005)
31: The decontamination system (Release date 10.10.2005)
32: The difference in atomic and molecular structure
under gravitational force and pressurised conditions. (Release date 15.8.2005)
33: The Defence and shielding system (Release date 4.9.2005)
34: Method of creation of an atom or nano Matter (Release date 11.10.2005)
199
35: The relationship between Gravity and Mass (Release date 21.1.2006)
36: The Dark Matter The Fifth state of Matter (Release date 21.1.2006)
37: The inter-atomic fusion (Release date 3. 5. 2006)
38: The conductivity of the Matter in the vacuum of the interplanetary mediums
(Release date 21.1.2006)
39: The production of Graphene (Release date 25.7.2006)
40: Mini-magnetospheric plasma propulsion (M2P2)
(http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mini-magnetospheric_plasma_propulsion
41: Inner-inner core articles:
A: Professor Guy Masters Scripps institute of Oceanography
(http://www.solstation.com/stars/earth.htm)
B: BBC Earth inner inner core
(http://www.news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/science/nature/2290551.stm)
C: Radioactive potassium may be major heat source in Earth core
Work founded by National science Foundation and department of energy
http://www.physlink.com/News/121103Potassiumcore.cfm
200
Published and unpublished works by M. T. Keshe
There are a number of unfinished articles that are to be converted to full disclosures
when completed, like Antimatter method of energy releases, Nano space technology,
relation between the creator and the created, space communication system, deep space
defence technology, dynamic magnetic fields force regions (wormholes) construction
and control, creation of magnetic fields, and so on.
Some of these works have already been published through different channels and some
have not yet been released.
In the following section some of the works done by the same author are mentioned, with
a brief disclosure of their contents.
Some of these papers can be purchased and obtained through direct request and access
through specific links.
A number of papers with * and ** marks are not for public release due to their
sensitivity of information and only available to relevant commercial and governmental
organisations for peaceful applications of the technology.
The universal order of creation
(5.7.2006)
In this disclosure the main construction principles and the method of the link and
control in the universal order of the existence of living cells, like the function and
operational method of any matter based on so called proteins chains, as for example in
human cell are explained in detail.
REF 9
The author considers this paper as one of his most important and fundamental works to
be published and to be added to the sets of disclosures written by him.
Cosmic Rays
(Release date 24.3.2004)
This paper explains the source and the origin of cosmic rays and the way these work
within our cosmos, their function and their benefits.
REF 10
201
*The Airborne reactor
(Release date 25.3.2004)
This paper covers the total design of airborne reactors for space technology. This covers
all aspects of operation, design and control of such reactors.
REF 11
The seed of the Earth
(Release date 25.3.2004)
Some extracts from this paper:
The theory that the heat of the core of the Earth is due to inertia of the material pilled on
top of each other is completely dismissed through this new disclosure.
The author M T Keshe believes that this centre core is made of hydrogen, other gases
and a mixture of liquid and solid Matters, which were in the vicinity of the centre of the
core of the Earth at the time of its inception in the solar system.
Through this new understanding of the new inner cores of the planet, this brings to play
the fact that the old inner core of the Earth that is already assumed to be made of a solid
piece itself becomes a sealed container for the new inner core.
The author through design of a parallel system has set to confirm the validity of this
assumption, that the centre of the Earth possesses a semi- fusion atomic reactor and not
a fission reactor as has been assumed by other scientists.
This theory of hydrogen in the centre of the planet is in line with the physical reality of
the creation and the present situation in the physical construction of the solar system.
By the laws of physics all the gases in the solar system should have been in the giant
gas planets at the outer layers of the solar system, like in Jupiter and Saturn.
The physical reality in the solar system, is that the lightest of all these gasses, the
Hydrogen, has taken its place right in the centre of the solar system in its star, the Sun.
It has to be recognised that the centre of all planets in possession of gravity due to the
centre cores heating, are always in possession of two Magnetic Field Forces in their
inner sanctum (M. T. Keshe ” The creation of gravity”).
In the case of the Earth up to now and with the present knowledge there has been
acceptance of only one inner core and one magnetic force.
As it is explained in the paper titled „the creation of gravity”, there is an inner core in
the inner core. This inner core, due to it physical content, motion and position in the
centre of the Earth, creates and maintains its own magnetic field force, independent of
the magnetic force which has been known to be created by the interaction of the inner
core and the outer core of the planet.
These two magnetic fields interact to create the planet’s own double magnetic fields in
its centre. The interaction of these two magnetic fields forces upon each other leads to
the new concept of the „DOUBLE MAGNETIC FIELD EFFECT”, where the
interaction between these two field forces in the centre of the planet leads to the creation
of the gravity and the magnetic forces of the planet (Paper: The creation of gravity).
This new second core is the seed core of the planet, the mother seed of the planet
202
positioned in this new inner core.
REF 12
The creation of Black Hole
(Release date 25.3.2004)
In this paper it is explained that the Black Hole is created out of a natural sequence of
events, and that the existence of the Black Hole in a galaxy is a normal event. Further it
is explained that a Black hole is created in similar ways to the Dark Spots on the surface
of the Sun. In this paper for the first time, it is explained how the Black Hole is
physically created and what function it plays in its galaxy.
REF 13
Magnetosphere
(Release date 9.6.2004)
„The shape and the strength of the magnetosphere of a planet is exactly what a
fingerprint is to a man. It is unique to each planet, star and galaxy. It is a tell tale of all
its attributes, and it reveals the hidden mysteries of the internal materials’ structure”.
REF 14
Correction to the Einstein equation of Relativity
(Release date 15.6.2004)
In this paper the physical reality of the Einstein equation is considered, and efforts are
made to bring this equation to the real conditions. Even Einstein considers this equation
applicable for very small mass, and not in real three-dimensional multi-Magnetic and
gravitational conditions, which are external and have nothing to do with the theoretical
object’s mass and speed, but have effect on the speed and the mass of the object under
consideration.
REF 15
*Introduction to the new system
(Release date 2.7.2004)
In this paper it is written „It is essential to understand that, with the application of this
system of motion, one cannot bring into play the solid, liquid and gas fuel method to
create motion, as is used today. What is offered in this system is in simple words a fully
integrated plasmatic magnetic energy system. Which creates within and around the core
environmental conditions as known to man in the universe, like creation of gravity and
203
magnetic field protection the same as the magnetospheric protection condition of
planets and motion through interaction of magnetic fields as planets and stars do in their
given environment”.
REF 16
The rings of Saturn
(Release date 2.7.2004)
One of the oldest puzzles in the world of astronomy has been the existence of the rings
around Saturn. How did these rings come to exist the way they are now? How did they
come to appear and behave the way they do? These questions and much more about the
creation of these rings are all answered in this paper.
REF 17
The creation of gravity
(Release date 11.7.2004)
In this paper it is explained that „the source and the creator of the magnetic forces and
the gravitational forces are due to the interaction between the same materials in the
same region of the planet.”
Further it is explained how the gravitational field force can be created, replicated and
controlled within a nuclear reactor. Further it is explained how this property can be used
for the motion of a system within a planetary or solar system.
Now by understanding the principal of the creation of gravity, in this paper it is further
explained that „the gravity in reality is the effect of the interaction of two plasmatic
magnetic energy fields of any two object in respect to each other.”
REF 18
Death of a star
(Release date 26.7.2004)
In this paper the death of stars is explained, „The death of a star and the creation of a
supernova is in reality the same as the half-life cycle energy step-down of an atom.
With the difference that this show is in a larger scale, and more spectacular, in all
aspects of its dimensions”.
REF 19
Fusion
(Release date 28.7.2004)
204
In this paper the physical and scientific problems with present fusion technology is
considered. Where it is written, „nuclear Scientists, with the fusion reactors of today,
are trying to create fusion in the opposite way to the known laws of physics and their
parallels in the universe”. Further in this paper it is written, „if the present path for
creation of fusion is followed, with the present scientific knowledge of physical
materials for construction of such system, then following the present path of
development to create energy from current fusion systems will be a distant dream”.
REF 20
Life of a Cell
(Release date 28.11.2004)
Extracts from this paper; „The reality of the transportation and transmutation of a cell is
not far from the reality of the life of an atom or a star. Where the life cycle of the cells
are slightly more complicated, as they contain other Matters like acids, which have their
own magnetic characteristic of their on chemical structure. For this reason the control
and replication of the energy of the cell is very much complex, but very simple to
achieve”.
REF 21
The Atom
(Release date 19.12.2004)
The content of this paper explains how and where atoms in the universe are originated
from and how the construction of atoms in a cold plasmatic nuclear reactor can be
replicated.
REF 22
Magnetism
(Release date 8.1.2005)
In this paper it is written, „The question is where did the Magnetism come from? This is
the Secret of creation. The world is made of one thing and only one thing and that is
Magnetism. Its combination and interaction with its own different strength fields makes
it appear as different Matter. The rest of creations are the outcome of these interactions
of different strength of this thing called magnetism and the forces it creates. Magnetism
is the origin of existence and the real singularity in its full meaning”.
REF 23
205
*The creation of the magneto-gravitational force
(Release date 5.2.2005)
The creation of magneto-gravitational field force is and will be fundamentally
independent of temperature and pressure, proviso to the fact that as long as a
homogenous free floating PMF within a Matter is created.
REF 24
The core of the Earth
(Release date 20.4.2005)
One of the original assumptions in developing the new Magravs system some thirty
years ago by M.T. Keshe was on the basis that the centre of the Earth possesses addition
cores, which create the necessary gravitational conditions of the planet. After some
twenty years of space technology and through Earthquake seismological data’s this
assumption has been shown to be correct and after over twenty years, it has been
scientifically proven that the inner core of the Earth has an inner core of 600 km.
Professor Guy Master in 2002 ref 24 nuclear planet. The centre of this core is assumed
to have an inner core of 8 Km, this he thought to be made of the plutonium or other
nuclear materials
But the developer of this new plasma reactor technology has proven through physical
dynamic cores that these cores possess a mixture of hydrogen plasmas and the process
of the heating of the centre of the Earth are due to a semi-fusion chain of events.
REF 25
*The electron-atomic welding
(Release date 3.5.2005)
Some extracts from this paper:
„The electron atomic welding or atomic welding principle is the phenomenon that atoms
of the same material, through a common shared electron, become a magnetically
balanced molecule of the same Matter, with the difference that the shared electron will
create a balanced PMF in the molecule”.
REF 26
*Shutdown and safety of the reactor core
(Release date 6.6.2005)
In this paper the safety parameters in the operation of the gravitational and energy
206
reactors are simply explained to avoid the loss of plasma and gravitational field forces
created within its cores.
REF 27
*Reactor Start-up
(Release date 9.6.2005)
In this paper the systematic start-up of the dynamic reactors for the creation of
gravitational field forces and the production of energy are set out. The start up of these
systems are totally different then the prior arts known in the nuclear industry.
REF 28
*The energy balance of the reactor
(Release date 29.6.2005)
Some extracts from this paper:
The energy balance of these types of reactors is not as simple as might look in the first
instance. The energy creation is simple. But the heat leakage and dissipation through the
deliberate inherent material design are and can be zero. That is to say the system not
only can hold on the heat it creates. At the same time due to the close circuit feed
operation will become self-sufficient but long lasting.
In planets, the loss of heat through their surface creates the variation in the central core
condition over several billions of years. In this reactor as losses can be literally
negligible, the system can operate at low energy loss temperatures. Even the boundary
of the body could be made through the right combination of material in the chambers,
so that the body of the reactor will be colder then its surrounding boundary. So the
system will not only lose energy to its surrounding, but it can be made to absorb heat in
the negative temperature gradient from its surrounding, so that there are no losses.
REF 29
Nuclear decay or half-life
(Release date 20.7.2005)
Extracts from the paper:
„The nuclear decay always has the same or near the same time duration. This is due to
the fact that the all neutrons and protons, from their inception, carry a predetermined
level of plasmatic magnetic energy. This energy is continually used for the motion and
vibration of different elements of the nucleus in respect to each other and the
surrounding Matters of the atom. As the space and dimensions of a nucleus of an atom
always obeys the same principal of the magnetic separation and magnetic attraction.
Protons or neutrons can and will need to use or consume the same energy before they
become weak enough that the splitting or decay becomes a clockwork job. The nuclear
decay is the natural levelling done of a nucleus’ energy, due to the energy consumption
207
and heat dissipation for the motion of the elements of the nucleus for its remaining
plasmatic magnetic fields energy necessarily needed for them to hold one together”.
REF 30
*The decontamination system
(Release date 10.10.2005)
„What this means is that, for example in trying to recycle the CO2, by the use of the
right Matter in one of the cores of the reactor, the system will then use the O2 to
produce H2O, in the form of pure water, and C in the form of atomic or molecular
carbon, or even by feeding this back through certain operational compressions and
gravitational interactions within a small core, to create industrial diamond or graphite,
for different industries.”
The use of the reactor for this purpose has been proven to be correct and Raman
spectroscopy has proven the concept and physical reality of the separation of Matter in
atomic level after separation in the same system from a composite Matter.
(See the graphene on the technology web site)
REF 31
The difference in atomic and molecular structure
under gravitational force and pressurised conditions.
(Release date 15.8.2005)
In this paper is written that „the atomic and molecular structure of Matter is totally
aligned and positioned in a fundamentally different configuration where it has come
together due to gravitational forces, than when Matter has been brought together by the
means of pressure. This has a fundamental effect on the behaviour of the structure and
properties of the Matter which is created in either way”. Where this is explained and
utilised to develop a new method in creating graphene and Sp3 atoms and walls in a
simple core made of a coca- cola bottle.
REF 32
**The Defence and shielding system
(Release date 4.9.2005)
Some extract from this paper:
The design of the side open system for lunch of high saturation magnetic plasma
package is one of the most effective technologies for defence of the reactor and the
208
craft, which is in possession of such a system.
It is essential for any space technology in the open environment of the universe, if the
craft is to keep a straight line of motion and to be able to protect itself from any solids
or Matters in its path in the cosmos.
This technology can destroy any object by the principal of plasmatic magnetic energy
saturation of the incoming object at a molecular level, that object will disintegrate in the
form of magnetic vapour and not atomic level destruction, before Matter can damage
the craft as debris, and before the craft ever becomes in touch or near these space
Matters.
This technology can also be used to protect Earth from the collision risk of NEO’s (Near
Earth Objects), like comets and asteroids.
REF 33
Method of creation of an atom or nano Matter
(Release date 11.10.2005)
The manufacture of an atom of any density, this being of the simplest form of nucleus
or a full atom of hydrogen, or even heavier elements in the universe, all follow the same
principal.
Atoms are created in the soup of the cosmos from collections of very weak plasmatic
magnetic fields, which for their existence cluster and share their energies with the
magnetic fields that are not far from their own plasmatic magnetic field strength.
REF 34
The relationship between Gravity and Mass
(Release date 21.1.2006)
Extracts from text of this paper:
„A planet like Earth possesses a combination of both gravity and inertia. Where the
gravity comes from the interaction of plasmatic magnetic energy fields from the
processes within its core, and the inertia comes purely from the collection molecules
PMF of Matters which has built the physical body of the planet.
Any object, being an electron, atom, molecule or even a human body, is a collection of
plasmatic magnetic energy fields of different strengths and their interactions between
each other, which in total decides the total or collective magnetic field possessed by that
object where this is the mass of the object.
Where the mass of an object is a collective package of plasmatic magnetic energy field
tightness of a given object and will not change as long as the object is intact as one
entity in its overall atomic or molecular or collective molecular appearance.
Which plasmatic magnetic energy of a physical body (so called the mass of the body) in
interaction with molecular or atomic magnetic field (this being gravitational or inertia)
of another object will determine the weight of the two object in respect to each other in
each others environment”.
209
REF 35
The Dark Matter
The Fifth state of Matter
(Release date 21.1.2006)
Extracts from text of this paper:
The existence of Dark Matter is not questionable,
Proving its existence, and its effect on the energy balance of the universe, in all Matters
as small as in the heart of an electron or in a solar system needs to be created, replicated
and its effect measured.
The theory of Dark Matter does not and needs not to be considered as complicated, if
one understands in real terms the plasmatic magnetic energy of the Matter in the visible
and invisible dimensions of the universal work.
The Dark Matter has two distinctive characteristics, which makes it totally apart from
the visible Matter.
The Dark Matter possess mass but not visible light, where its existence can only be
determined by the weight of the its hidden mass, which could be substantial due to its
internal gravitational field.
REF 36
*The inter-atomic fusion
(Release date 3. 5. 2006)
Extract from this paper:
„The fusion of two or more atoms has been the pre-occupation of nuclear physicists for
past years.
Conditions to achieve fusion of two hydrogen plasmas in the TOKAMAK reactors have
taken years to teach scientists a lot about the behaviour of plasma and their fusing.
The reality about the fusion in someway has to be reconsidered as, if the scientific
world is trying to amalgamate the contents of two plasmas to release energy. There
must be a simpler way to achieve releases of similar energies.
The fundamental principal of the inter-atomic fusion is a much simpler way to achieve
fusion. If this principal is applied to the atomic condition of fusion, then fusion will be
attained in a simple but in a much more physically realistic environment.
The explanation for the inter- atomic fusion is very simple and direct.
In the fusion of two plasma of proton of hydrogen atom, the physicists try to fuse two
large plasmas, and by doing so, they try to release a large amount of energy. Where in
this process enormous amount of magnetic field forces and currents are needed to bring
two plasma in close proximity, so that the energy barriers in between them can be
overcome for them to amalgamate or fuse.
210
In the inter-atomic fusion the overcoming of energy barriers does not exist, as in this
method of fusion, the electron of the atom which is circulating the nucleus of the atom
and is of the same origin will be encouraged to return into and fuse with the nucleus of
its atom”.
Where this is a more practical way to create and release manageable energies and there
is no need for elaborate systems where even if the energy release will be small
compared to dreamed up fusion systems of today.
With inter-atomic fusion method at least small and practical systems can be developed
to handle low temperatures of the fusion process.
REF 37
The conductivity of the Matter in the vacuum
of the interplanetary mediums
(Release date 21.1.2006)
Some extracts form this short paper „Therefore plasmatic magnetic energy field of
elements within the interplanetary medium will cover the space given to them in their
environment. Where due to their motion and their electric charges even in eV levels,
they become perfect conductor, and in turn, due to their motion on their environment,
they become plasmatic electromagnetic generators.
REF 38
The production of Graphene
(Release date 25.7.2006)
Repeated experiments and tests in simple static reactors, and tests in more complex
dynamic reactors, prove that atomic separation and recombination of Matter like carbon
and hydrogen can be reached at room temperature and at atmospheric conditions.
We have now indications – through static and dynamic tests in our reactors – that the
universe was made in normal condition, which was originally nothing but packages of
plasmatic magnetic fields of different strength, which were themselves nothing but
areas of plasma or collections of loose magnetic fields energies. Where magnetic fields
of different strength in locking to each other, by the principle of their plasmatic
magnetic energy (PME), have caused in the first stage the creation of fundamental
particles, secondly atoms, then molecules and then Matter, clouds and asteroids and
then stars and galaxy’s”.
The big bang theory conditions have no room in the reality of the creation of the
universe.
REF 39
211
INTERNET LINKS
Web site: www.keshefoundation.com
Large images of this book on the web site:
http://www.keshefoundation.com/book/images/
Links on the web site to YouTube movies: http://www.keshefoundation.com/youtube/
Forum: http://www.keshefoundation.com/forum/
212
INDEX
1
1.5 billion people ……………………… 175
A
accelerators……………… 16, 91, 151, 185
action and reaction …………………… 154
A-D Matter ………………………………. 110
aircraft ……………………. 57, 99, 144, 164
amplitude…………………………………. 141
annihilation………………………………. 108
anti-gravitational……………………….. 162
anti-gravity ………………………………. 180
Antimatter ………………….. 14, 32, 66, 92
energy ……………………………………. 92
strongest pmtics……………………….. 90
apple…………………………………………. 68
argon ………………………………………. 157
asteroids …………………….. 113, 126, 127
atom .. 11, 20, 24, 35, 50, 51, 65, 68, 81,
89, 106, 111, 115, 123, 129, 130, 132,
140, 158
mass ………………………………………. 67
atomic carbon ………………………….. 174
atoms………………………………………… 14
attraction……………………………………. 85
attraction field……………………….. 14, 23
B
bacteria……………………………………. 120
Big Bang …………………………………… 58
Black Hole…..45, 85, 93, 100, 101, 111,
181, 189
blood …………………………………120, 192
red……………………………………….. 191
blue shift………………………………58, 104
bread…………………………………………. 20
C
carbon…………………….. 27, 79, 120, 126
Caroline Core……………………21, 27, 29
cascade ………………………………..87, 113
cascading……………………………111, 182
Casimir effect …………………………… 105
catchments 13, 26, 84, 87, 110, 160, 166
charge
negative………………………………… 139
positive…………………………………. 138
CO2…………………….. 126, 148, 154, 170
coiling ………………………………………. 65
collection …………………………………… 12
weak………………………………………. 13
collective existence …………………….. 14
collision.37, 57, 73, 75, 76, 81, 95, 106,
115, 121, 126, 164
colonisation of planets ……………….. 192
colours………………………………………. 51
controlled fission………………………. 130
convection principle…………………….. 22
conversion principle…………………….. 66
copper……………………………………… 174
cosmic dusts …………………………….. 158
Coulomb barrier. 15, 117, 119, 148, 176
cube of sugar………………………………. 72
cup of tea …………………………………. 108
current …………………………………….. 105
current flow ……………………………… 138
D
Dark Energy……………………………… 98
dark light ………………… 80, 83, 102, 103
Dark Matter ………………………12, 14, 32
Dark Rings…………………………………. 93
Dark Spots ………………………45, 93, 100
darker zone ………………………………… 95
darkness…………………….83, 96, 97, 100
daylight……………………………………… 78
decay …………………………………. 51, 130
natural ………………………………….. 137
neutron …………………………………. 129
decay of the neutron…………………… 111
dense pmtics ………………………………. 65
dependent
balance …………………………………… 83
density……………………………………. 85
distance ………………………………….. 60
environment……………………14, 79, 99
forces……………………………………… 53
friction……………………………………. 31
gravitational…………………………….. 84
inertia …………………………………… 124
2
mass ………………………………………. 18
payload…………………………………. 154
position ………….. 26, 84, 99, 142, 188
size………………………………………… 18
strength …………………… 26, 53, 80, 88
diamond lattice …………………………. 174
dictation of position…………………… 143
different speed ……………………………. 66
dilution ……………………………………. 177
Grapos………………………………….. 159
process …………………………………. 150
reactors……….152, 158, 169, 177, 189
soup………………………………..148, 152
technology………… 151, 164, 176, 189
direct conversion………………………. 192
disentangle……………… 15, 62, 150, 158
dislocation ……………………………….. 163
domain pmtics ……………………………. 60
drinking water………………………….. 181
DYPMFS……………………169, 171, 173
E
Einstein …………………………………….. 65
electricity…………………………………. 175
electromagnetic…………………………… 89
electron… 51, 65, 89, 132, 134, 135, 140
enegry ……………………………………. 32
motion…………………………….121, 141
path ……………………………………… 141
plasmas ………………………………… 118
elementary particle………………………. 52
energy…………………………………. 58, 93
energy of the pmtics……………………. 58
enough food…………………………….. 192
equation of relativity………………. 65, 71
equilibrium……………………..58, 94, 159
Extreme Ultra Violet………………….. 173
F
faster
than light ………………………………… 81
Fermilab …………………… 17, 66, 91, 158
field force………………………………….. 60
field strength………………………………. 31
fields…………………………………………. 11
fission………………………………15, 16, 37
food……………………………………………. 5
fragments…………………………………… 78
pmtics……………………………… 75, 105
residual…………………………………… 78
frames-of-reference……………………… 88
free lift…………………………………….. 159
friction. 29, 31, 37, 57, 75, 99, 119, 153,
166, 170, 182
fundamental source ……………………… 90
fused into…………………………………. 115
fusion………………………..15, 16, 37, 117
G
galaxies……………………………………… 52
gamma rays………………………………. 173
Ganymede ………………………………. 165
gap …………………………….120, 135, 138
Geo-Reactor ……………………………… 27
gluons……………………………………… 185
graphene ……………………………………. 17
Grapos .79, 99, 126, 155, 156, 158, 160,
161, 166, 173
crafts …………………………….. 167, 181
lift and motion …………………………. 79
nuclear reactor ……………………….. 171
reactors……. 64, 79, 80, 165, 177, 193
test-reactors …………………………….. 91
Grasers …………………………………… 126
gravitational field………………………… 14
gravitational fields ………………………. 12
gravitational lensing…………………….. 85
Gravity ………………………………… 25, 28
greenhouse gasses ……………………… 171
ground energy level …………………… 121
ground level……………………………….. 32
H
half-life …………………………………… 131
hard ball…………………………………….. 20
heating………………………………………. 27
heavier elements ……………………….. 190
heavy atoms……………………………… 138
Helium……………………………… 138, 157
hydrogen………….. 13, 81, 147, 157, 190
I
illnesses …………………………………… 184
impedance………………………………… 139
independent pmtics ……………………… 28
inertia ………………………………… 19, 123
initial
3
fundamental Particle…………………. 12
fundamental particles…………5, 12, 37
fundamental plasma…………….. 14, 51
fundamental plasmas ………………… 35
gravitational field …………………….. 14
pmtics…………………………………….. 14
seeds of plasma ……………………….. 11
set………………………………………….. 39
initial pmtics………………………………. 14
inner core…………………………………… 27
interaction………………………………….. 14
inter-atomic fusion……………………. 115
interface ………………………………….. 167
interface colour…………………………. 191
interlocked……………………………….. 123
interlocking ……………………………….. 39
inter-transit ………………………………. 53
invisibility …………………………………. 57
irrespective ………………………………… 30
K
Keshe principle
conversion energy…………………….. 66
Magravs positioning …………………. 17
transition ………………………………… 55
Keshe Theory
creation of Matters………………….. 104
Dark Matter …………………………….. 45
Dilution………………………………….. 16
Earth Rotation …………………………. 28
gravitational field …………………….. 24
Gravity …………………………………… 25
Mass………………………………………. 62
Transition……………………………….. 55
L
lift…………………………………………… 162
lift and motion …17, 18, 21, 77, 91, 148,
154, 159, 164, 166, 176, 177
light …………………………………….. 32, 84
Antimatter ………………………………. 88
bright……………. 79, 81, 115, 155, 156
dark……………………………………….. 83
Dark Matter …………………………….. 88
day ……………………….. 76, 78, 81, 155
fuzzy ……………………………………… 81
matter …………………………………….. 88
night………………………………………. 78
rays………………………………………… 88
spectrum………………………….. 81, 121
sun……………………………………….. 120
UV ………………………………………. 173
M
M2P2………………………………………. 157
magnetic ………………………………. 12, 13
field…………………………………………. 5
magnetic field……………………11, 12, 13
plasmatic ………………………………… 34
weak………………………………………. 16
magnetic interface……………………… 112
magnetic ray ………………………………. 87
magnetosphere ….. 13, 94, 99, 104, 138,
155, 158, 166, 173, 176, 186
independent …………………………….. 50
magnitude difference …………………… 47
Magravs………………………………. 13, 15
balance ………………………….17, 18, 78
balanced …………………………………. 51
collective ………………………………… 40
overall ……………………………………. 44
plasmatic …………………………… 28, 35
positioning….. 17, 141, 143, 154, 156,
157, 159, 164, 171
reactors…………………………………. 162
strong ……………………………… 17, 179
weak………………………………………. 39
Magravs positioning…………………… 141
mass………………………………………….. 51
independent …………………………… 186
plasma ………………………………….. 186
mass of matter…………………………….. 65
matching numbers ……………………. 137
Matmags……………………19, 31, 72, 144
matter ………………………..14, 31, 32, 99
Matters ……………………….12, 14, 30, 53
Matters-to-matters …………………….. 192
Matter-to-Matter …………….92, 123, 185
medicine ……………………………………… 5
Mercury…………………………………….. 13
method of motion …………………….. 143
minerals ……………………………. 163, 174
mini-plasma ………………………. 110, 135
MOJHAN ………………………………… 168
molecules………………………14, 143, 146
mono-Magravs………………………….. 126
4
mono-material ……………………………. 13
MOZHAN……………………………….. 168
N
nanolayer …………………………………. 174
nano-oxides ……………………………….. 17
nanostructure ……………………………. 174
NASA……………………………………… 157
neutron ……………… 35, 49, 65, 120, 190
Newton……………………………………… 26
nitrogen …………………………………… 120
nothing …………………………………… 101
nothingness………………………………. 108
Nova condition…………………………. 113
nuclear
-based……………………………….. 15, 19
decay…………………………….27, 37, 51
fission…………………………………….. 27
reactor ………………………………. 27, 56
nuclear decay………………………129, 137
nuclear waste ……………………………. 171
nucleus ………….. 50, 129, 130, 138, 143
O
omelette…………………………………… 117
out of nowhere ………………………….. 109
oxygen…………………………………….. 120
P
photon ……………………….. 105, 106, 108
Plasma …………………………..14, 32, 157
Plasma Dilution…………………………. 16
plasmas……………………………………… 53
plasmatic ………………………….12, 14, 39
Plasmatic Magnetic Field……………… 12
plasmatic strength……………………….. 55
pmtic ………………………………………… 12
environment ……………………………. 54
soup………………………………….16, 102
strength ………………………………….. 66
strong …………………………………….. 92
pmtics………………………………….. 12, 37
active……………………………………. 163
magnitude……………………………… 103
passive………………………………….. 163
remaining ……………………………….. 40
slower…………………………………….. 66
spectrum……………………………….. 163
strength ………………………………….. 54
stronger …………………………….. 37, 92
weak…………………………………. 12, 16
weaker ……………………………………. 37
pmtics in motion………………………… 58
pmtics strength……………………………. 42
polarity ………………………………. 88, 188
change ………………………………….. 100
planets ………………………………….. 189
same …………………………………….. 159
Potassium ………………………………… 191
poverty ……………………………………. 175
processes of transition…………………. 58
protection system………………………. 166
proteins…….79, 147, 163, 173, 191, 192
proton ….13, 22, 35, 51, 52, 62, 65, 115,
118, 120, 132, 133, 140, 141, 189,
193
accumulations………………………… 120
purification ………………………………. 175
push and pull…………………………… 106
Q
quark ………………………………………… 52
quarks…………………………….12, 51, 185
R
radio waves………………………………. 157
rays…………………………………………… 11
reactor
multi-core……………………………….. 15
red shift………………………………. 58, 104
replicating………………………………… 147
residual pmtics………………………. 46, 48
residuals …………………………………… 37
resistance …………………………………. 139
rings………………………………………… 112
rotation ……………………………………. 140
S
saturated…………………………………. 182
Saturn ……………………………………….. 22
rings ………………………………………. 93
seed of plasma ……………………………. 39
SEPMAF ……………………………. 36, 129
SET P1……………………………………… 40
SET P2……………………………………… 43
SET P3……………………………………… 44
shielding ………………………………….. 158
singularity………………………………….. 58
5
solar system………………………….82, 186
solid core …………………………………… 28
solid magnet ………………………………. 23
soup…………………………… 104, 150, 183
atomic plasma………………………… 117
environments…………………………. 148
galaxy…………………………………… 114
Matters ……………………………148, 152
plasma …………………………….119, 148
pmtics…………………………………….. 39
principle …………………………………. 17
universal……………………………….. 125
sp2………………………………………….. 174
sp3………………………………………….. 174
space in-between ………………………. 103
space technology ………………………… 19
spacecraft ………………………………….. 57
spectrum…………………… 79, 84, 88, 191
colours………………………………….. 102
electromagnetic ……………………… 121
light………………………………….99, 101
speed of attraction……………………….. 88
speed of rotation ……………………30, 186
spin……………………………………..51, 186
squeezing…………………………………. 117
states of matters …………………… 14, 32
step
first………………………………………… 39
fourth …………………………………….. 45
second ……………………………………. 41
third……………………………………….. 43
strength
same ………………………………………. 14
stronger ……………………….42, 85, 107
unequal…………………………………… 64
weaker……………………………………. 57
sub-plasmatic……………………………… 16
swirling …………………………………….. 65
swirling effect…………………………….. 87
T
tail ……………………………………………. 64
tests ………………………………………….. 91
the Antimatter…………………………….. 30
the Dark Matter…………………………… 30
the F1 …………………. 46, 65, 70, 71, 111
the Matter ………………………………….. 30
the Sun…20, 34, 45, 76, 77, 78, 90, 100,
108, 155, 186, 192
Theory
Gravity …………………………………… 25
time …………………………………54, 71, 88
Tokamak………………………………….. 117
transformation…………………………… 190
transition………………………………. 54, 58
transition of Matters……………………. 55
translucent …………………………………. 56
Translucent Darkness…………………. 102
transmission lines…………………….. 173
transmutation……………………………… 54
U
UFO……………………………………….. 157
uncertain………………………………….. 140
UN-report………………………………… 175
V
Van der Waals ………………………….. 106
virtual Matter …………………………… 104
virtual particles …………………………. 104
viruses …………………………………….. 184
vitamins……………………………. 163, 174
voltage…………………………………….. 105
VOMAFS…………………………. 170, 171
W
warp …………………………………………. 85
warping……………………………………… 86
warping effect…………………………….. 86
weak
magnetic fields ………………………… 11
weaker binding …………………………. 189
Wormhole………………………………….. 47
X
X-rays……………………………………… 173
Z
zero weight ………………………………. 159
In this book nuclear engineer Mehran Keshe discloses in a very logical
way that the initial fundamental building blocks of the universe find their
origin in a cosmic magnetic soup that contains an uncountable number
of magnetic fields of different strengths. In this soup magnetic fields of
similar or equal strength can meet, interact and entangle into a larger
dynamic spherical pack. The interaction between different dynamic
packs, leads to the creation of Gravitational and Magnetic field effects
and properties in their given environments. Due to the differences in
their magnetic field strength each spherical pack will possess a different
strength, which each magnetic field strength will be in the order of magnitude
of the three basic types of Matters (Dark Matter, Antimatter and
Matter).
The discovery of these new first principles in physics will open for mankind a large number of
benefits, since the various type of interactions of the three basic Matters and their field forces in
their environment leads to the creation and control of matters (solid, liquid and gas).
In this book, new first principles and criterions for the creation of Gravitational and Magnetic field
forces of the planet Earth are explained. Similarly it is explained how safe, simple, nuclear reactors,
which have been build to replicate the structure of the planet inner cores, confirm the Keshe theory
of creation of gravitational fields of the planet, as these reactors can produce fields which can
cause reduction in weight, cause motion and lift of the reactor system, and produce an independent
magnetosphere around such reactors. The interaction of the dynamic plasmatic magnetic
fields of the magnetosphere around these reactors with the planetary magnetic fields creates light
around the reactor. These light-effects confirm the Keshe’s theory of creation of light through the
interactions of plasmatic magnetic fields. These systems will open new ways of Space Travel.
By this knowledge it became possible to design, develop and test new low cost reactors that can
dilute plasma and achieve fusion of plasmas in a simple and affordable way. So it now becomes
possible to create vast amount of energies (like electricity and heat) and motion without the need
of burning any fuel and without creating any waste. These reactors can create at any point-ofdemand
matters like air, water, food, medicine, and new materials, also at nano-level.
This new revolutionary technology can help to solve a number of global problems, like of the
climate change, since Keshe reactors can be build to attract greenhouse gasses like CO2, or the
global issue of water shortage and water pollution since it becomes now possible to create water
and to attract hazardous elements out of the polluted and contaminated waters.
As these three Matters being made of magnetic fields, they also interact, inter-balance and can
interlock with each other, these interactions of three Matters results in a larger integrated dynamic
system, called the Initial Fundamental Plasma, or the Neutron. By the natural decay of this plasma,
the proton and the electron come to be generated and to co-exist, where plasma of each proton
and each electron still contains the Trinity of the three Matters of the original plasma.
Kt
The Keshe
Foundation
The Keshe Foundation is an
independent non-profit and
a non-religious organization
founded by nuclear engineer
M.T. Keshe, aiming to bring
new scientific knowledge
and new technologies to
mankind, and to bring new solutions for the
major global problems, like famine, water
shortage, shortage of electrical power supply,
climate change, illnesses, by the use of new
types of plasma reactors, and to give Man the
real freedom to travel in Space.
ISBN 978-94-6087-002-6